2023 LINCOLN AVIATOR Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications,
design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language
in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2022
All rights reserved.
Part Number: -20220323112249
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................11
Symbols Glossary ............................................11
Perchlorate .......................................................14
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
..........................................................................14
Replacement Parts Recommendation
..........................................................................14
Special Notices ...............................................15
Mobile Communications Equipment .........16
Export Unique Options ..................................16
Data Privacy
Data Privacy .....................................................18
Service Data .....................................................19
Event Data ........................................................19
Settings Data ..................................................20
Connected Vehicle Data ...............................21
Mobile Device Data ........................................21
Emergency Call System Data .....................22
Environment
Protecting the Environment ........................23
At a Glance
Instrument Panel ............................................24
Child Safety
General Information ......................................27
Installing Child Restraints ............................29
Booster Seats .................................................40
Child Restraint Positioning ..........................42
Child Safety Locks .........................................44
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation ..................................46
Fastening the Seatbelts ...............................47
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .......................49
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ...........................................................49
Seatbelt Reminder ........................................50
Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance
........................................................................52
Seatbelt Extensions ......................................53
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™ .............................54
Supplementary Restraints System
Principle of Operation ..................................55
Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................56
Front Passenger Sensing System .............58
Side Airbags ...................................................60
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags .........61
Safety Canopy™ ...............................................61
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .........63
Airbag Disposal ..............................................64
Pedestrian Protection - Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Pedestrian Alert System ..............................65
911 Assist
What Is 911 Assist ...........................................66
How Does 911 Assist Work ..........................66
Emergency Call Requirements ..................66
Emergency Call Limitations .........................67
1
Table of Contents
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio Frequencies
........................................................................68
Remote Control ..............................................69
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
.........................................................................73
Phone as a Key
What Is Phone as a Key ................................74
Phone as a Key Limitations .........................74
Programming Your Phone ............................74
Using the Valet Mode ...................................75
Using the Backup Start Passcode .............75
Phone as a Key – Troubleshooting ...........76
MyKey™
Principle of Operation ...................................78
Creating a MyKey ..........................................79
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................80
Checking MyKey System Status ................80
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems
..........................................................................81
MyKey – Troubleshooting ............................81
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ................................83
Opening the Doors .......................................90
Emergency Door Release ............................91
Soft Closing Door ...........................................91
Keyless Entry ...................................................91
Liftgate
Power Liftgate ................................................94
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ..........................99
Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................100
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column .......................................................102
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering Column
.......................................................................102
Audio Control ................................................104
Voice Control ................................................104
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control With Lane Centering
.......................................................................104
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control ........................................................105
Information Display Control ......................106
Heated Steering Wheel ..............................106
Horn .................................................................106
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers - Vehicles Without:
Heated Wiper Blades ..............................107
Windshield Wipers - Vehicles With: Heated
Wiper Blades .............................................108
Autowipers .....................................................108
Windshield Washers ....................................109
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ...........109
Lighting
General Information .......................................111
Lighting Control ..............................................111
Autolamps .......................................................112
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .......................112
Headlamp Exit Delay ....................................113
2
Table of Contents
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running Lamps
........................................................................113
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..............113
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................113
Adaptive Headlamps ....................................114
Direction Indicators ......................................116
Welcome Lighting .........................................116
Interior Lamps .................................................117
Ambient Lighting ...........................................117
Automatic High Beam Control
What Is Automatic High Beam Control
........................................................................119
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off ..................................................119
Automatic High Beam Control Indicators
.......................................................................120
Overriding Automatic High Beam Control
.......................................................................120
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows .............................................121
Global Opening and Closing ....................122
Exterior Mirrors .............................................122
Interior Mirror ................................................124
Sun Visors ......................................................125
Moonroof ........................................................125
Instrument Cluster
Gauges ...........................................................128
Warning Lamps and Indicators ..................131
Audible Warnings and Indicators .............135
Information Displays
General Information .....................................136
Personalized Settings .................................140
Information Messages ................................142
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control ........................165
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
.......................................................................168
Rear Passenger Climate Controls -
Vehicles With: Quadruple Zone
Automatic Temperature Control ..........169
Rear Passenger Climate Controls -
Vehicles With: Triple Zone Automatic
Temperature Control ...............................170
Heated Rear Window ...................................171
Heated Exterior Mirrors ...............................171
Remote Start ..................................................172
Interior Air Quality
What Is the Cabin Air Filter ........................173
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter ...................173
What Is Auto Air Refresh .............................173
How Does Auto Air Refresh Work ............173
Checking the Interior Air Quality ..............173
Auto Air Refresh Indicators ........................174
Refreshing the Interior Air ..........................174
Auto Air Refresh Hints .................................175
Interior Air Quality – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................175
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position ...................176
Head Restraints .............................................177
Power Seats ...................................................179
Memory Function .........................................184
3
Table of Contents
Rear Seats ......................................................187
Heated Seats ..................................................191
Ventilated Seats ...........................................192
Rear Occupant Alert System
What is the Rear Occupant Alert System
.......................................................................193
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert System
Work ............................................................193
Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions
.......................................................................193
Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations
.......................................................................193
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System On
and Off ........................................................194
Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators
.......................................................................194
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings ....................................................194
Garage Door Opener
Garage Door Opener Introduction ..........195
Garage Door Opener Precautions and
Frequencies ..............................................195
Programming the Garage Door Opener
.......................................................................196
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ...............................200
Wireless Accessory Charger
What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger
......................................................................202
Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions
......................................................................202
Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger
......................................................................202
Charging a Wireless Device .....................202
Storage Compartments
Overhead Console .....................................204
Starting and Stopping the Engine
General Information ...................................205
Keyless Starting ...........................................205
Starting a Gasoline Engine .......................206
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle System
.......................................................................210
Engine Block Heater ...................................213
Unique Driving Characteristics
Auto-Start-Stop - Excluding: Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV) ...........................215
Hybrid Vehicle Operation ...........................217
Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation ............219
Hybrid Vehicle Frequently Asked
Questions ...................................................221
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions ......................................223
Fuel Quality ...................................................224
Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................224
Running Out of Fuel ...................................225
Refueling - Excluding: Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ...........................................226
Refueling - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV) ........................................................229
Fuel Consumption .......................................233
4
Table of Contents
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law ................................................234
Catalytic Converter .....................................235
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
General Information ....................................238
Charging the High Voltage Battery -
Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
......................................................................238
Transmission
Automatic Transmission ............................259
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive ................................264
Brakes
General Information .....................................271
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
......................................................................272
Electric Parking Brake ................................272
Hill Start Assist .............................................274
Auto Hold ......................................................275
Reverse Braking Assist
What Is Reverse Braking Assist ...............277
How Does Reverse Braking Assist Work
.......................................................................277
Reverse Braking Assist Precautions .......277
Switching Reverse Braking Assist On and
Off ...............................................................278
Overriding Reverse Braking Assist .........278
Reverse Braking Assist Indicators ..........278
Reverse Braking Assist – Troubleshooting
......................................................................279
Traction Control
Principle of Operation .................................281
Using Traction Control ................................281
Stability Control
Principle of Operation ................................282
Using Stability Control ...............................283
Hill Descent Control
What Is Hill Descent Control ....................284
Switching Hill Descent Control On and Off
......................................................................284
Setting the Hill Descent Speed ...............284
Hill Descent Control Indicator .................285
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ................................286
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................286
Front Parking Aid ........................................288
Side Sensing System .................................290
Active Park Assist .......................................292
Rear View Camera ......................................297
360 Degree Camera ..................................300
Cruise Control
What Is Cruise Control ...............................303
Switching Cruise Control On and Off .....303
Setting the Cruise Control Speed ...........303
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................304
Resuming the Set Speed ..........................304
Cruise Control Indicators ..........................304
5
Table of Contents
Adaptive Cruise Control
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work ..................................305
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With Lane
Centering ..................................................305
What Is Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
......................................................................305
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering ..............................305
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go ...................................306
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering ..............................307
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go ....................................307
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On and
Off ...............................................................309
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Speed
.......................................................................310
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap
........................................................................311
Canceling the Set Speed ...........................312
Resuming the Set Speed ...........................312
Overriding the Set Speed ..........................312
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering ...............................312
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go .....................................313
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Intelligent Adaptive
Cruise Control ...........................................313
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control ......................................313
Switching Lane Centering On and Off
.......................................................................314
Switching Intelligent Mode On and Off
.......................................................................315
Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance ........316
Adaptive Cruise Control – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................316
Driving Aids
Driver Alert .....................................................319
Lane Keeping System ................................320
Blind Spot Information System ................326
Cross Traffic Alert ........................................330
Speed Sign Recognition ............................335
Steering .........................................................336
Pre-Collision Assist .....................................337
Drive Mode Control
What Is Drive Mode Control .....................343
Selecting a Drive Mode .............................343
Drive Modes .................................................343
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage .........................346
Luggage Covers ..........................................346
Roof Racks and Load Carriers ..................347
Load Limit ......................................................348
Air Suspension .............................................352
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................354
Trailer Sway Control ...................................355
Recommended Towing Weights .............356
Essential Towing Checks ...........................357
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......359
6
Table of Contents
Driving Hints
Reduced Engine Performance ..................361
Cold Weather Precautions .........................361
Breaking-In .....................................................361
Driving Economically ...................................361
Driving Through Shallow Water ..............362
Floor Mats .....................................................362
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance ..................................364
Hazard Flashers ..........................................365
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................365
Jump Starting the Vehicle .........................366
Collision, Damage or Fire Event ..............368
Post-Crash Alert System ............................370
Transporting the Vehicle ...........................370
Crash and Breakdown
Information
Post Impact Braking ....................................372
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ...............373
In California (U.S. Only) ..............................374
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) .......................375
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only) ..........................................376
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................377
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
......................................................................379
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) ......380
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
......................................................................380
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart ...........................382
Changing a Fuse .........................................395
Maintenance
General Information ....................................398
Opening and Closing the Hood ..............398
Under Hood Overview ..............................400
Engine Oil Dipstick ......................................401
Engine Oil Check .........................................401
Oil Change Indicator Reset ......................402
Changing the Engine Air Filter ................402
Engine Coolant Check ...............................404
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check ......408
Brake Fluid Check ......................................409
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................409
Changing the 12V Battery - Gasoline ......410
Changing the 12V Battery - Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV) ...........................413
Adjusting the Headlamps ..........................416
Washer Fluid Check .....................................417
Fuel Filter ........................................................418
Checking the Wiper Blades .......................418
Changing the Front Wiper Blades -
Vehicles Without: Heated Wiper Blades
.......................................................................418
Changing the Front Wiper Blades -
Vehicles With: Heated Wiper Blades
.......................................................................419
Changing the Rear Wiper Blades ............419
Changing a Bulb ..........................................420
Vehicle Care
General Information .....................................421
Cleaning Products .......................................421
7
Table of Contents
Cleaning the Exterior .................................422
Waxing ...........................................................423
Cleaning the Engine ...................................424
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
......................................................................424
Cleaning the Interior ..................................425
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ........................425
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................426
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ................427
Cleaning the Wheels ..................................427
Vehicle Storage ............................................427
Body Styling Kits ..........................................429
Wheels and Tires
General Information ....................................430
Tire Care ........................................................432
Using Summer Tires ...................................444
Using Snow Chains .....................................445
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ............447
Changing a Road Wheel ............................451
Technical Specifications ............................458
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - Excluding: Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) ............460
Engine Specifications - Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV) ...........................461
Motorcraft Parts - Excluding: Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV) ..........................462
Motorcraft Parts - Plug-In Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (PHEV) .........................................464
Vehicle Identification Number .................465
Capacities and Specifications - Excluding:
Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
......................................................................465
Capacities and Specifications - Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) ............477
Bulb Specification Chart ............................488
Vehicle Identification
Installing the Vehicle Identification Card
......................................................................489
Network Connectivity
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network .....................................................490
Network Connectivity – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................491
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot ............494
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
or Password ..............................................494
Audio System
General Information ...................................496
Audio Unit ......................................................497
Digital Radio .................................................499
Satellite Radio ..............................................502
USB Port ........................................................505
SYNC™ 3
General Information ....................................507
Using Voice Recognition ...........................509
Entertainment ................................................521
Climate ...........................................................533
Phone .............................................................536
Navigation .....................................................538
Electric Vehicle Information ......................546
8
Table of Contents
Apps ...............................................................552
Settings ..........................................................555
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .........................557
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................574
Lincoln Protect
Lincoln Protect .............................................576
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ..........579
Normal Scheduled Maintenance ............583
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance .............................................587
Customer Information
Rollover Warning ..........................................591
Radio Frequency Certification Labels
.......................................................................591
Warranty Information ..................................628
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility ................630
End User License Agreement ..................635
9
Table of Contents
10
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the vehicle
you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so may appear different to you on
your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E1
5
4
903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
E67017
Airbag
E162384
E162384
Air conditioning system
11
Introduction
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Blower motor
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
E270480
Brake system
E139223
E139223
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
E141
E141
128
128
Child seat tether anchor
E332905
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Electric Parking brake
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
12
Introduction
Headlamp high beams
E270968
Headlamps on
Heated rear window
E163171
Hill descent control
E270945
Horn control
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low fuel level
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking lamps
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
E65963
E65963
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Side airbag
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
13
Introduction
E130458
Stability control off
E332910
Trail control
Turn Signal
Windshield defrosting system
E270969
Windshield wiping system
E270967
Windshield wash and wipe
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offer
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
We offer a number of convenient ways to
contact us and to manage your account
online.
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
P.O. Box 542000
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
For more information, visit www
.lincoln.com/
finance.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford, Lincoln and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford, Lincoln and Motorcraft
parts by looking for the Ford, Lincoln,
FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts
or their packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s
Manual. Genuine Ford, Lincoln and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
14
Introduction
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford, Lincoln replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection and
dent resistance. During vehicle development
we validate that these parts deliver the
intended level of protection as a whole
system. A great way to know for sure you
are getting this level of protection is to use
genuine Ford, Lincoln replacement collision
parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford, Lincoln and Motorcraft
replacement parts are the only replacement
parts that benefit from a Lincoln Warranty.
Damage caused to your vehicle as a result
of the failure of non-Ford, non-Lincoln parts
may not be covered by the Lincoln Warranty.
For additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Lincoln Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see
your warranty guide that is available online.
For more information, refer to our website
and download your copy of the warranty
guide.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: You risk death or serious
injury to yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect wireless
plug-in devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction
with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle
diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming
services. Installing an aftermarket device that
uses the DLC during normal driving for
purposes such as remote insurance company
15
Introduction
monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to
other devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to vehicle
systems. We do not recommend or endorse
the use of unapproved aftermarket plug-in
devices. The vehicle Warranty will not cover
damage caused by an aftermarket plug-in
device.
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Utility Type Vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle is
not a passenger car. As with other vehicles
of this type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle does not have a snowplowing
package.
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle does not have the Ambulance
Preparation Package.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
16
Introduction
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
17
Introduction
WARNING: Do not connect wireless
plug-in devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.
We respect your privacy and are committed
to protecting it. The information contained
in this publication was correct at the time of
release, but as technology rapidly changes,
we recommend that you visit the local Ford
website for the latest information.
Your vehicle has electronic control units that
have data recording functionality and the
ability to permanently or temporarily store
data. This data could include information on
the condition and status of your vehicle,
vehicle maintenance requirements, events
and malfunctions. The types of data that can
be recorded are described in this section.
Some of the data recorded is stored in event
logs or error logs.
Note: Error logs are reset following a service
or repair.
Note: We may provide information in
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third
parties acting with lawful authority or through
a legal process. Such information could be
used by them in legal proceedings.
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Operating states of system components,
for example fuel level, tire pressure and
battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt status.
• Events or errors in essential systems, for
example headlamps and brakes.
• System responses to driving situations,
for example airbag deployment and
stability control.
• Environmental conditions, for example
temperature.
Some of this data, when used in combination
with other information, for example an
accident report, damage to a vehicle or
eyewitness statements, could be associated
with a specific person.
Services That We Provide
If you use our services, we collect and use
data, for example account information,
vehicle location and driving characteristics,
that could identify you. We transmit this data
through a dedicated, protected connection.
We only collect and use data to enable your
use of our services to which you have
subscribed, with your consent or where
permitted by law. For additional information,
see the terms and conditions of the services
to which you have subscribed.
For additional information about our privacy
policy, refer to the local Ford website.
18
Data Privacy
Services That Third Parties Provide
We recommend that you review the terms
and conditions and data privacy information
for any services equipped with your vehicle
or to which you subscribe. We take no
responsibility for services that third parties
provide.
SERVICE DATA
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada in Canada), and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted
by law, use vehicle diagnostic information
for vehicle improvement or with other
information we may have about you, for
example, your contact information, to offer
you products or services that may interest
you. Data may be provided to our service
providers such as part suppliers that may
help diagnose malfunctions, and who are
similarly obligated to protect data. We retain
this data only as long as necessary to
perform these functions or to comply with
law. We may provide information where
required in response to official requests to
law enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with lawful
authority or court order, and such information
may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S.
only (if equipped), if you choose to use
connected apps and services, you consent
that certain diagnostic information may also
be accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic information
may be used to provide services to you,
personalizing your experience, troubleshoot,
and to improve products and services and
offer you products and services that may
interest you, where permitted by law. For
Canada only, for more information, please
review the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data storage
and use of service providers in other
jurisdictions who may be subject to legal
requirements in Canada, the United States
and other countries applicable to them, for
example, lawful requirements to disclose
personal information to governmental
authorities in those countries.
EVENT DATA
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event data
recorder is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle; this
data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The event data
recorder is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for
a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
19
Data Privacy
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
seatbelts were buckled/fastened.
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (for example name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder.
SETTINGS DATA
Your vehicle has electronic control units that
have the ability to store data based on your
personalized settings. The data is stored
locally in the vehicle or on devices that you
connect to it, for example, a USB drive or
digital music player. You can delete some of
this data and also choose whether to share
it through the services to which you
subscribe. See Settings (page 555).
Comfort and Convenience Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Seat and steering wheel position.
• Climate control settings.
• Radio presets.
Entertainment Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Music, videos or album art.
• Contacts and corresponding address
book entries.
• Navigation destinations.
20
Data Privacy
CONNECTED VEHICLE DATA
The modem has a SIM. The
modem was enabled when your
vehicle was built and periodically
sends messages to stay connected to the
cell phone network, receive automatic
software updates and send vehicle-related
information to us, for example diagnostic
information. These messages could include
information that identifies your vehicle, the
SIM and the electronic serial number of the
modem. Cell phone network service
providers could have access to additional
information, for example cell phone network
tower identification. For additional
information about our privacy policy, visit
www.ConnectedLincoln.com or refer to your
local Lincoln website.
Note: The modem continues to send this
information unless you disable the modem
or stop the modem from sharing vehicle data
by changing the modem settings.
Note: The service can be unavailable or
interrupted for a number of reasons, for
example environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
modem, visit www
.ConnectedLincoln.com.
MOBILE DEVICE DATA
If you connect a mobile device to your
vehicle, you can display data from your
device on the touchscreen for example,
music and album art. You can share your
vehicle data with mobile apps on your device
through the system. See Apps.
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the
United States. The data is encrypted and
includes, for example, the vehicle
identification number of your vehicle, the
SYNC module serial number, odometer,
enabled apps, usage statistics and
debugging information. We retain it only as
long as necessary to provide the service, to
troubleshoot, for continuous improvement
and to offer you products and services that
may be of interest to you according to your
preferences and where allowed by law.
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to that
cell phone. The cell phone profile enables
more mobile features and efficient operation.
The profile contains, for example data from
your phonebook, read and unread text
messages and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system.
If you connect a media device, the system
creates and retains a media device index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity.
The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when you
connect your cell phone or media device. If
you no longer plan to use the system or your
vehicle, we recommend you use the master
reset function to erase the stored
information. See Settings.
21
Data Privacy
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's module.
For additional information about our privacy
policy, refer to the local Lincoln website.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has
connectivity technology, visit
www.ConnectedLincoln.com.
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM DATA
When the emergency call system is active,
it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to the emergency call system may
also be capable of electronically or verbally
disclosing to emergency services operators
your vehicle location or other details about
your vehicle or crash to assist emergency
services operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do not
activate the emergency call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency call
systems that are required by law.
22
Data Privacy
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You can take significant steps toward
protecting the environment with correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal
of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www
.sustainability.ford.com.
23
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E282064
E282064
24
At a Glance
Air vents.A
Direction indicator. See Direction Indicators (page 116).B
Voice control. See Using Voice Recognition (page 509).C
Audio control. See Audio Control (page 104).D
Information display. See General Information (page 136).E
Information display control. See Information Display Control (page 106).F
Wiper lever. See Windshield Wipers (page 107).G
Ignition switch. See Keyless Starting (page 205).H
Information and Entertainment display.I
Camera button. See Rear View Camera (page 297). See 360 Degree Camera (page 300).J
Park aid button. See Rear Parking Aid (page 286). See Front Parking Aid (page 288). See Active Park Assist (page 292).K
Driver assistance button. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 215). See Using Traction Control (page 281). See Auto Hold (page 275). See
Settings (page 555).
L
Audio unit. See Audio Unit (page 497).M
Climate control. See Automatic Climate Control (page 165).N
Hazard flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 365).O
Transmission selector. See Automatic Transmission (page 259).P
Cruise control. See Cruise Control (page 104).Q
Horn. See Horn (page 106).R
Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 102).S
25
At a Glance
Cruise control.T
Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 111).U
Power liftgate. See Power Liftgate (page 94). Fuel release door. See Refueling (page 229).V
26
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or animals
to these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.
27
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended Restraint TypeChild Size, Height, Weight, or AgeChild
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
restraint (generally children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall,
are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seat backrest upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 57 in
(1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
28
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly use
child restraints for infants and toddlers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about the
safety of children in your vehicle.
• When possible, properly restrain children
12 years of age and under in a rear
seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in a front seating
position. See Front Passenger Sensing
System (page 58).
• When installing a rear facing child
restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to avoid
interference between the child restraint
and the vehicle seat in front of the child
restraint.
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers and children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally
four-years-old or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
29
Child Safety
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
When installing a child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the child restraint, with
the tongue between the child restraint
and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright
position before you install the child
restraint.
• For second row seating positions, adjust
the recliner slightly to improve child
restraint fit. If needed, remove the head
restraints.
• For third row seating positions, stow the
head restraints to improve child restraint
fit. See Head Restraints (page 177).
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking
mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child restraint with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint illustrated
is a forward facing child restraint, the steps
are the same for installing a rear facing child
restraint.
Note: Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
E142
5
2
8
1. Position the child restraint in a seat with
a combination lap and shoulder belt.
30
Child Safety
E142
5
2
9
2. After positioning the child restraint in the
proper seating position, pull down on the
shoulder belt and then grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142
530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure you do not twist
the belt webbing.
E142
531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure you
securely latch the tongue by pulling on
it.
31
Child Safety
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until you
pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should not
be able to pull more belt out. If the
retractor did not lock, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142
533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint as you pull
up on the shoulder belt to force slack
from the belt. This is necessary to remove
the remaining slack that exists once you
add the extra weight of the child to the
child restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child restraint to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle provides extra help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
attach it.
E142
53
4
32
Child Safety
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure you have the seat
securely held in place. To check this,
grab the seat at the belt path and
attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor
points: two lower anchors where the seat
backrest and seat cushion meet (called the
seat bight) and one top tether anchor behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child restraints have two
rigid or webbing mounted attachments that
connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach
the child restraint. However, you can still use
the seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must also
attach the top tether strap to the proper top
tether anchor if one came with your child
restraint.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
Second Row Bucket Seats and Third Row
Seats
E
3
1
9061
33
Child Safety
Second Row Bench Seats and Third Row
Seats
E
318
8
8
969
969
969
9
969
96
96
969
969
6
969
69
69
969
969
69
969
969
969
969
96
969
6
9
969
6
969
9
969
96
6
969
69
969
96
969
96
6
6
9
69
9
9
9
9
9
9
969
9
9
9
6
6
6
9
E144054
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seat backrest below the symbols as shown.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child restraint
with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
restraints with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps later in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
restraint only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outermost Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. Do not use LATCH lower
anchors for the center seating position
unless the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions permit and specify using
anchors spaced at least as far apart as
those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row bench seat are spaced 20.5 in
(52 cm) apart. The standardized spacing for
LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (28 cm) center
to center. You cannot install a child restraint
with rigid LATCH attachments at the center
seating position. You can only use LATCH
compatible child restraints with attachments
on belt webbing at this seating position
provided that the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with
the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a
child restraint to any lower anchor if you have
an adjacent child restraint attached to that
anchor.
Each time you use the child restraint, check
that the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child restraint from side to side and
forward and back where you secured it to
your vehicle. The child restraint should move
less than 1 in (2.5 cm) if you properly installed
it.
If you do not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of injury to a child greatly
increases in a crash.
34
Child Safety
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Restraints
When used in combination, you can attach
either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower
anchors first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward,
if included with the child restraint.
Using Tether Straps
E141
E141
128
128
Many forward-facing child
restraints include a tether strap
which extends from the back of the
child restraint and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many
older child restraints.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap
if the tether strap on your child restraint does
not reach the appropriate top tether anchor
in your vehicle.
Once you install the child restraint using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of the
LATCH system, or both, you can attach the
top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view):
Second Row Bucket Seats and Third Row
Seats
E
3
1
9055
Second Row Bench Seats and Third Row
Seats
E
3
1
90
4
7
Perform the following steps to install a child
restraint with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
35
Child Safety
For second row outermost seating positions,
route the child restraint tether strap over the
seat backrest, under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. If needed,
remove the head restraint to improve the fit
of the child restraint or tether strap.
For the second row center seating position,
route the child restraint tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. If needed, remove
the head restraint to improve the fit of the
child restraint or tether strap. See Head
Restraints (page 177).
For third row seating positions, route the
child restraint tether strap over the seat
backrest, under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. If needed,
fold the head restraint down to improve the
fit of the child restraint or tether strap. See
Head Restraints (page 177).
1. Route the tether strap.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown. The tether hook may be twisted
½ turn to improve installation. If you clip
the tether strap incorrectly, the child
restraint may not be retained properly in
the event of a crash.
E190833
4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If the child restraint is not anchored properly,
the risk of injury to a child greatly increases
in a crash.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend its
use.
36
Child Safety
Second Row Bucket Seats
E251594
37
Child Safety
Second Row Bench Seats
E251593
38
Child Safety
Third Row Seats
E286303
Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edge
of the floor are not tether anchors.
39
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child to
put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back.
Failure to follow this instruction could
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt
and increase the risk of injury or death in
a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety restraint
(generally children who are less than 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 and less
than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and
80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat backrest with knees
bent comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E
689
24
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head (as
measured at the tops of the ears) above the
top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position
with a higher seat backrest or head restraint
and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using
a high back booster seat.
40
Child Safety
E7
0
71
0
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
E142
596
41
Child Safety
E142597
42
597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
42
Child Safety
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided by
the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not allow a passenger
to hold a child on their lap when your
vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows, books
or towels to boost your child's height.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child to
put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back.
Failure to follow this instruction could
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt
and increase the risk of injury or death in
a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
43
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined Weight
of Child and Child
Restraint
Restraint Type
Seatbelt OnlySeatbelt and LATCH
(Lower Anchors and
Top Tether Anchor)
Seatbelt and Top
Tether Anchor
LATCH (Lower
Anchors Only)
LATCH (Lower
Anchors and Top
Tether Anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
restraint
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
restraint
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child restraint
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child restraint
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
176).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When the child safety locks are set, you
cannot open the rear doors from the inside.
44
Child Safety
E295318
The child safety lock control is on the driver
door.
Press the control to switch the child safety
locks on. Press the control again to switch
them off. A light on the child safety control
illuminates when you switch them on.
The child lock setting remains on when you
switch off the ignition.
45
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always be
properly restrained.
WARNING: Do not allow a passenger
to hold a child on their lap when your
vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position in
your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
assembly made up of one buckle and one
tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use
the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder
only. Never wear the shoulder belt under
the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for
more than one person.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats may
be hot in a vehicle that is in the sunshine.
The hot seatbelts or seats may burn a small
child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.
All seating positions in your vehicle have lap
and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants of the
vehicle should always properly wear their
seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking
mode, (except driver seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outermost
seating positions.
46
Seatbelts
• Seatbelt pretensioners at the front
outermost and second row outermost
seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front outermost
passenger seating position.
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to
tighten the seatbelts when activated. In
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt
pretensioners may be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. The pretensioners may
also activate when a Safety Canopy airbag
deploys.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure that
you securely fasten the tongue in the
buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.
47
Seatbelts
E14
2
2590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low across
the hips below the belly and worn as tight
as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt
to cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is involved
in a crash, have the seatbelts and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode, and the front outboard passenger and
rear seat seatbelts have both types of locking
modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination seatbelts lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the design of the retractor is to
lock if you pull the webbing out too quickly.
If the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt to
retract. If the retractor does not unlock, pull
the seatbelt out slowly then feed a small
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position. For rear seatbelts, recline the rear
seat backrest or push the seat backrest
cushion away from the seatbelt. Feed a small
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt automatically
pre-locks. The belt retracts to remove any
slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver
seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use this mode any time you install a child
safety seat, except a booster, in passenger
front or rear seating positions. Properly
restrain children 12 years old and under in a
rear seating position whenever possible.
See Child Safety (page 27).
48
Seatbelts
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
E142591
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
turn on the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the seatbelt
height adjuster so that the seatbelt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the seatbelt correctly could
reduce its effectiveness and increase the
risk of injury in a crash.
E201
573
E201
E201
E201
E20
E
E201
E201
2
E201
E201
E201
E
E2
E201
E201
E201
201
2
201
201
201
0
0
E
E
E
E
E2
E
201
E201
2
573
7
573
573
573
573
573
573
573
5
573
7
7
573
573
573
573
3
573
573
573
573
573
573
1. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
2. Slide the adjuster up to raise the belt.
Press the button and slide it down to
lower the belt.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND
INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
49
Seatbelts
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and the indicator chime sounds
for a few seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator chime turn off.The driver seatbelt is buckled while the warning lamp is illuminated
and the indicator chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator chime remain off.The driver seatbelt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to
the on position...
SEATBELT REMINDER
WARNING: The system will only
provide protection when you use the
seatbelt correctly.
This system monitors all seating positions
and provides audio and graphic feedback.
E71880
This lamp illuminates and a
warning tone sounds if you do not
fasten your seatbelt when you
switch the ignition on. The lamp and tone
switch off when you fasten your seatbelt or
about one minute has elapsed.
When the initial warning expires for the
driver, more warnings are provided for the
driver and front outermost passenger. This
lamp illuminates and a warning tone sounds
if you or your front passenger do not fasten
the seatbelt buckle and the vehicle speed
exceeds 6 mph (9.7 km/h). To deactivate the
warning, see Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature.
Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do not
place large objects on the front passenger
seat.
E206718
This lamp illuminates when you
switch the ignition on, identifying
the number of seating positions
with fastened buckles. It illuminates again
when a seating position changes from
unfastened to fastened.
50
Seatbelts
E274569
E274
569
This warning displays and a tone sounds if
an occupant unfastens the rear seatbelt
buckle or it becomes unfastened.
Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an
occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle
to begin with, the warning will not display.
Note: Front seating positions appear in this
warning display. Warnings for unfastened
front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial
warning lamp.
Seatbelt Status
To view the seatbelt status, use the
information display controls on the steering
wheel. See General Information (page 136).
E274570
E274
5
7
0
03
E2747
03
Seatbelt fastened.A
Seatbelt not fastened.B
Seatbelt recently unfastened.C
FaultD
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature - Front outermost seats only
WARNING: While the system allows
you to deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle.
51
Seatbelts
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this terminates the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 before starting the
procedure.
Make sure that:
• You set the parking brake.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• You close all vehicle doors.
• You unbuckle the driver and front
passenger seatbelts.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning lamp turns
off (about one minute). After Step 2, wait
an additional five seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 60 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
seatbelt warning lamp turns on.
4. When the seatbelt warning lamp is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt. After
Step 4, the seatbelt warning lamp flashes
for confirmation.
• This switches the feature off if it is
currently on.
• This switches the feature on if it is
currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT
MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child safety
seat systems periodically to make sure they
work properly and are not damaged. Inspect
the vehicle and child restraint seatbelts to
make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts.
Replace if necessary. All vehicle seatbelt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front seatbelt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat backrest (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions for
additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt assemblies
in use in vehicles involved in a crash be
replaced. However, if the crash was minor
and an authorized dealer finds that the belts
do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Seatbelt assemblies not in use
during a crash should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 421).
52
Seatbelts
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Persons who fit into the
vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle, model
year and seating position. The use of an
extension intended for another vehicle,
model year or seating position may not
offer you the full protection of your
vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the way the seatbelt fits across
the torso, over the lap or to make the
seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from our
dealers. Only use our seatbelt extensions
made by the original equipment seatbelt
manufacturer with our seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your vehicle restraint system.
53
Seatbelts
This system provides an improved overall
level of frontal crash protection to front seat
occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The
system analyzes different occupant
conditions and crash severity before
activating the appropriate safety devices to
help better protect occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, seatbelt pretensioners, front
seatbelt usage sensors, front passenger
sensing system and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
seatbelt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
54
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from
a deploying airbag is the greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them
after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and right
front passenger from certain upper body
injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there
is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
55
Supplementary Restraints System
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E151
E151
127
127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
56
Supplementary Restraints System
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 63).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant's
chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seatback, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E142
8
4
6
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
57
Supplementary Restraints System
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seatback reclined too
far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
This system works with sensors that are part
of the front passenger seat and seatbelt to
detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
E1
8
1
98
4
The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator that
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled).
The indicators are on the overhead console.
Note: The indicators illuminate briefly when
you first switch the ignition on to confirm they
are functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even
with this technology, parents are strongly
encouraged to always properly restrain
children in the rear seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the airbag off
indicator illuminates and stays lit to
remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
• If you have installed the child restraint
and the airbag on indicator illuminates,
switch the vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the restraint according to the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the front passenger seat.
58
Supplementary Restraints System
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the airbag on
indicator illuminates and remains
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
is lit, it is possible that the person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Switch the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seat backrest in an upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to detect
that person and enables the passenger
frontal airbag.
• If the airbag off indicator remains lit even
after this, advise the person to ride in the
rear seat.
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status IndicatorOccupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
59
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat backrest, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 63).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact our Customer
Relationship Center. See Getting the
Services You Need (page 373).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the front or rear
seatbacks, or in areas that may come into
contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Accessory seat covers
not released by Ford Motor Company
could prevent the deployment of the
airbags and increase the risk of injuries in
a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The side airbags are on the outermost side
of the front seat backrests. In certain
sideways crashes or rollover events, the side
airbags will be inflated. The airbag was
designed to inflate between the door panel
and occupant to further enhance the
protection provided to occupants in side
impact crashes.
60
Supplementary Restraints System
E1
5
2
533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that your vehicle has side
airbags.
• Side airbags inside the driver and front
passenger seat backrests.
E67017
Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 63).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER KNEE
AIRBAGS
Driver and passenger knee airbags are
located under or within the instrument panel.
During a crash, the restraints control module
may activate the driver and passenger knee
airbags (individually or both) based on crash
severity and respective occupant conditions.
Under certain crash and occupant conditions,
the driver and passenger knee airbags may
deploy (individually or both) but the
corresponding front airbag may not activate.
As with front and side airbags, it is important
to be properly seated and restrained to
reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
E67017
Make sure the knee airbags are
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 63).
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
61
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by
the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is
mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes and rollover events.
E75004
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags above the
trim panels over the front and rear side
windows identified by a label or wording
on the headliner or roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 63).
Always properly restrain children 12 years
old and under in the rear seats. The Safety
Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child or
booster seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
62
Supplementary Restraints System
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front of your vehicle
could affect the performance of the airbag
system, increasing the risk of injury. This
includes the hood, bumper system, frame,
front body structure, tow hooks, hood pins,
push bar and snowplows.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module. The
restraints control module deploys (activates)
the seatbelt pretensioners, driver airbag,
passenger airbag, knee airbag(s), seat
mounted side airbags and the Safety
Canopy. Based on the type of crash, the
restraints control module deploys the
appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. Routine maintenance of
the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
• The readiness light will not illuminate
immediately after you switch the ignition
on.
• The readiness light either flashes or stays
lit.
• A series of five beeps is heard. The tone
pattern repeats periodically until the
problem, the light or both are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The restraint system is designed to activate
when the vehicle sustains conditions
sufficient to cause the restraint control
module to deploy a safety device.
The fact that not all the safety devices
activate for all occupants in a crash does not
mean something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, type of crash, belt usage) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices.
• The front airbags are designed to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers.
63
Supplementary Restraints System
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
• The side airbags are designed to inflate
in certain side impact crashes or rollover
events. Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if your vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood of
rollover.
• The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate
in certain side impact crashes or rollover
events. The Safety Canopy may activate
in other types of crashes if your vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood of
rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
64
Supplementary Restraints System
PEDESTRIAN ALERT SYSTEM
Due to the quiet operation of hybrid and
electric vehicles at low speeds, the system
creates a subtle sound to alert pedestrians.
The system is on when your vehicle is
running and not in park (P). Some sound may
be audible in the passenger compartment.
65
Pedestrian Protection - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
WHAT IS 911 ASSIST
911 Assist is a SYNC system feature that can
call for help.
For more information, visit
www
.owner.ford.com.
HOW DOES 911 ASSIST WORK
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts, or
activates the fuel pump shut-off, your vehicle
may be able to contact emergency services
by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth® enabled phone.
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off. If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
searches for and tries to connect to a
previously paired cell phone. SYNC then
attempts to call the emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides about 10 seconds to
cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the
call, SYNC attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your
screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel.
If you do not cancel the call and SYNC makes
a successful call a pre-recorded message
plays for the 911 operator. The occupants in
your vehicle are able to talk with the
operator. Be prepared to provide your name,
phone number and location immediately
because not all 911 systems are capable of
receiving this information electronically.
During an emergency call the system
transmits vehicle data to the emergency
service.
EMERGENCY CALL
REQUIREMENTS
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist
to make an emergency call if you can do
it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent
911 Assist from working properly.
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
66
911 Assist
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth®
enabled and compatible cell phone to
SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth® enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time of
the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth® enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and
be located in the U.S., Canada or in a
territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
EMERGENCY CALL LIMITATIONS
The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates
in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which
911 is the emergency number.
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system
has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
67
911 Assist
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a decrease
in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones, battery
chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be able
to use your remote control. You can lock and
unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 69).
68
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Passive Key
E
305
1
98
The passive key operates the power locks
and the remote start system. The passive
key must be in your vehicle to use the push
button start.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the passive key is inside your
vehicle.
Note: If the passive key remains motionless
for 40 or more seconds, you need to move
the passive key for passive entry to operate.
If the passive key remains motionless for 8
or more hours, you need to move the passive
key for push button start to operate.
E1
5
17
95
Note: Your vehicle keys come with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Removable Key Blade
The passive key also contains a removable
key blade you can use to unlock your
vehicle.
E
305
1
99
Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.
69
Keys and Remote Controls
Replacing the Battery
WARNING: Keep batteries away from
children to prevent ingestion. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death. If ingested,
immediately seek medical attention.
WARNING: If the battery
compartment does not securely close, stop
using the remote control and replace it as
soon as possible. In the meantime, keep
the remote control away from children.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery is
low. See Information Messages (page 142).
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery, CR2450, or
equivalent.
E
305
1
99
1. Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.
E3038
24
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
70
Keys and Remote Controls
E21
8
4
02
3. Insert a screwdriver in the position shown
and carefully remove the battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery cover onto the
remote control and install the key blade.
Note: Refer to local regulations before you
dispose of the remote control batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the remote control battery
does not erase the programmed key from
your vehicle. The remote control operates
as normal.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds. A tone sounds and the
direction indicators flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Remote Start
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
remote control.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from the outside. The remote control has an
extended operating range.
You can configure the automatic climate
control to operate when you remote start
your vehicle. See Climate Control (page
165).
Many states and provinces restrict the use
of remote start. Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.
71
Keys and Remote Controls
The remote start system does not work if any
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch the feature off through the
touchscreen.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides status
feedback of remote start or stop commands.
StatusLED
Remote start
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful
Solid red
Request failed or
status not received
Blinking red
Status incompleteBlinking green
Remote Starting Your Vehicle
E138626
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps flash twice.
A tone sounds if the system fails to start.
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
Note: Press the push button ignition switch
on the instrument panel as you apply the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn on.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
the duration is set to 15 minutes, the duration
extends by another 15 minutes. For example,
if your vehicle had been running from the
first remote start for 5 minutes, your vehicle
continues to run now for a total of 30
minutes. You can extend the engine running
time duration to a maximum of 30 minutes.
72
Keys and Remote Controls
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. Your
vehicle and the parking lamps turn
off.
Due to ground reflection and the added
noise of your vehicle running, you might
need to move closer to the vehicle when
using remote start to switch it on or off. You
can switch this feature on or off using the
touchscreen. See Settings (page 555).
Memory Feature
You can program your passive key to recall
memory positions. See Memory Function
(page 184).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle.
73
Keys and Remote Controls
WHAT IS PHONE AS A KEY
Phone as a Key allows you to use your phone
in place of a passive key.
You can use your phone for the following
functions:
• Remote locking and unlocking.
• Passive entry and exit.
• Passive start and drive the vehicle.
• Remote start.
• Memory function recall.
PHONE AS A KEY LIMITATIONS
Limitations can vary based on the make and
model of your phone, phone location and
physical obstructions.
The following items could impact Phone as
a Key performance or prevent functionality
in some cases:
• The typical operating range for Phone as
a Key is 131 ft (40 m).
• Your Bluetooth® connection is not
enabled, is disrupted, or out of range.
• Your Phone as a Key is not active or
enabled on at least one phone.
• Your vehicle battery has depleted.
• Your phone battery has depleted.
• Interference from other devices using
radio frequencies or physical
obstructions.
• Your phone is too close to metal objects
or other electronic devices.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
phone and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle.
PROGRAMMING YOUR PHONE
To program your smartphone as phone as a
key:
1. Visit your device's app store to download
the Lincoln Way app.
2. Create a new account or sign in to an
existing account on the Lincoln Way app.
3. Add the vehicle identification number to
your account and follow the prompts in
the Lincoln Way app to complete the
Sync Connect Authorization process.
4. After the authorization is complete, you
can set up phone as a key following the
prompts in the Lincoln Way app.
5. After phone as a key is set up, you can
set up the backup start passcode by
following the prompts on your
touchscreen.
Note: Keep your new backup start passcode
with you in case of an emergency.
Resetting Phone as a Key
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press General.
3. Press Reset.
4. Press the app connect reset option.
5. Press Phone as a Key Reset.
6. Confirm you would like to continue with
erasing all phone as a key, keys and
backup start passcodes.
7. Press Continue.
74
Phone as a Key (If Equipped)
8. Confirm you are aware you are
de-authorizing all authorized users and
Lincoln Way Connect settings.
9. Press Continue.
USING THE VALET MODE
Classic Valet Mode
Enabling Valet Mode
Make sure the remote control is in your
vehicle.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Valet Mode.
3. Enter a four digit code to lock the
touchscreen.
4. Re-enter the same four digit code to
complete enabling valet mode.
Disabling Valet Mode
1. Press Exit Valet Mode.
2. Enter your four digit code to disable valet
mode and unlock your touchscreen.
Enhanced Valet Mode
Enabling Valet Mode
Have your backup start passcode completely
set up before using valet mode.
Note: If your vehicle detects a remote
control, the system defaults to classic valet
mode.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Valet Mode.
Note: If the system detects a valid phone as
a key, the temporary passcode displays in
both the touchscreen and mobile app.
Note: If the system does not detect a valid
phone as a key, it prompts you to enter your
backup start passcode on the touchscreen.
Once validated, the temporary passcode
displays on the touchscreen.
3. Provide the valet the first five digits of the
passcode to enter on the keyless entry
keypad to unlock your vehicle.
4. Provide the valet the eight-digit passcode
to enter on the touchscreen to start and
drive your vehicle.
Disabling Valet Mode
1. Press Exit Valet Mode.
Note: If the system detects an authorized
phone as a key, valet mode disables.
Note: If the system does not detect a valid
phone as a key, it prompts you to enter your
backup start passcode. Once validated, valet
mode disables.
USING THE BACKUP START
PASSCODE
Make sure you have phone as a key active
on at least one phone to use the previously
created backup start passcode.
1. Press the brake pedal and the push
button ignition switch. If the system does
not detect a valid phone as a key or
remote control, a message appears on
the touchscreen and the system prompts
you for your backup start passcode.
Note: The touchscreen times out after 30
seconds with no interaction.
75
Phone as a Key (If Equipped)
Note: If the backup start passcode screen
does not appear, press the brake pedal and
push button ignition switch again.
2. Use the touchscreen to enter your
backup start passcode.
3. After entering your backup start
passcode, press Enter within 30 seconds.
4. Once the system validates the backup
start passcode, a message alerts you to
start your vehicle.
5. Press the brake pedal and the push
button ignition switch within 20 seconds
to start the vehicle.
6. If your vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1-5.
System Lockout
The system locks after five combined
incorrect attempts of the following:
• Entering a backup start passcode.
• Resetting a current passcode.
• Entering a valet mode passcode.
Note: The system remains locked for five
minutes. After five minutes the system allows
codes to be entered again.
PHONE AS A KEY –
TROUBLESHOOTING
PHONE AS A KEY – FREQUENTLY
ASKED QUESTIONS
How can I tell if my vehicle has Phone as a
Key?
The touchscreen shows the Phone as a
Key reset option if your vehicle has
Phone as a Key. If you have registered
your vehicle through the Lincoln Way
app, a control button appears on the
home screen of the Lincoln Way app.
What happens if I cannot unlock the vehicle
with Phone as a Key?
Attempt to move your phone closer to
the vehicle. Check that the Lincoln Way
app is still running and that the Phone
as a Key control screen shows
connected. If the phone is connected,
attempt to press the remote unlock
button in the Lincoln Way app. If the
phone is not connected or the remote
unlock button does not work in the
Lincoln Way app, attempt to force close
and restart the app.
Why do I get a No Key Detected message
in the instrument cluster display when I am
using Phone as a Key and my phone is in
the car?
Your phone’s Bluetooth connection has
been disrupted or is not connected. Try
reconnecting your phone's Bluetooth
connection. Move the phone closer to
the center of the vehicle near the cup
holder or center console. Verify your
Phone as a Key is still active, enabled
and has not been revoked.
76
Phone as a Key (If Equipped)
What do I do if my phone is lost, damaged,
or the battery has depleted?
Use the Backup Start Passcode that you
created to protect you in the event that
you lose your phone, damage it, or the
battery depletes. See Using the
Backup Start Passcode (page 75).
How many phones can I use for Phone as
a Key?
You can program and activate up to four
phones with Phone as a Key to your
vehicle.
How does a valet drive my car if I only use
my Phone as a Key?
Have the valet use the temporary valet
passcode that you created when using
valet mode. See Using the Valet Mode
(page 75).
I uninstalled my Lincoln Way app and
reinstalled it. Why am I not able to get a
new Phone as a Key?
Remove the Phone as a Key that was
previously associated with your phone
or reset Phone as a Key from your
vehicle, and then request a new Phone
as a Key. See Programming Your
Phone (page 74).
Why can I not remotely start the vehicle
with my Phone as a Key?
Using the Lincoln Way app, verify your
Phone as a Key setup is complete and
enabled via Bluetooth connection on at
least one phone. If Bluetooth has
connected but Phone as a Key setup is
not complete, complete the setup of
your Phone as a Key, as prompted from
the Lincoln Way app. See Programming
Your Phone (page 74).
77
Phone as a Key (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can program the
restrictions to all keys except one. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator
keys or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a MyKey
and an admin key are present when you
start your vehicle, the system recognizes the
admin key only.
Standard Settings
Not every vehicle includes the features listed
below. If your vehicle has this equipment,
then you cannot change the following
settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™. MyKey
mutes the audio system until drivers, and
in some instances, passengers, fasten
their seatbelts. Note: If your vehicle
includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic
audio system, then the radio may not
mute.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
• Certain driver alerts, stability systems or
parking aids turn on automatically when
you use the MyKey system. For example,
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure warning
or forward collision warning. Note: MyKey
drivers may be able to turn the lane
departure warning feature off, but this
feature turns back on automatically with
every new key cycle.
• Restricted touchscreen operation in some
markets. For example, MyKey may
prevent manual navigation destination
input while the vehicle is in any gear
other than park (P) or when the vehicle
reaches a certain rate of speed.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions,
if this feature is available in your market.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward with
an admin key.
78
MyKey™
Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in the information display, providing choices
to switch them on or off, or to select a more
specific setting.
• Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a safe
speed considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
• Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in the information display and a
tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
• The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display when
MyKey drivers attempt to exceed the
limited volume. MyKey also disables the
automatic volume control. Note: If your
vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a
very basic audio system, then the radio
may not limit.
• Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and active
for MyKey drivers. For example, E911 or
emergency assistance and the do not
disturb features stay on even if a MyKey
driver uses the feature's control to switch
it off. When selected, you will not be able
to turn off Advance Trac or traction
control (if your vehicle has this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the touchscreen to create a MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle has a push
button start, place the remote control into
the backup slot. See Starting a Gasoline
Engine (page 206).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Press SETTINGS.
4. Press Vehicle.
5. Press MyKey.
6. Press Create MyKey.
7. Press Ye s .
8. Switch the ignition off.
You have successfully created a MyKey.
Make sure you label it so you can distinguish
it from the admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key.
79
MyKey™
Programming and Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the touchscreen to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or the remote control you want to
program.
2. Press SETTINGS.
3. Press Vehicle.
4. Press MyKey.
5. Select a setting and configure it by
following the instructions on the
touchscreen.
The programmed restrictions apply when
you switch the vehicle off, open and close
the driver door and restart your vehicle with
the programmed key or remote control.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, you need an
admin key to change or clear your MyKey
settings. When you make any changes to
your MyKey settings, you change the settings
for every MyKey. You cannot make
individual changes to apply to specific
MyKeys.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their
original admin key status at once. To clear
all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the
touchscreen.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Press SETTINGS.
3. Press Vehicle.
4. Press MyKey.
5. Press Clear All MyKeys.
6. Press Ye s .
7. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
touchscreen. See Settings (page 555).
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
80
MyKey™
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys you have
programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature
to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when you have
deleted all MyKeys.
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys you have
programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature
to determine how many admin keys you have
for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
· The key or remote control used to start the vehicle does not have
admin privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place the remote control
into the backup slot. See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 206).
· The key or remote control used to start the vehicle is the only admin
key. You always need at least one admin key.
· The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited
mode.
· The key or remote control used to start the vehicle does not have
admin privileges.
I cannot program the configurable settings.
81
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a
MyKey (page 79).
· The key or remote control used to start the vehicle does not have
admin privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· You do not have any MyKeys created. See Creating a MyKey (page
79).
· Purchase a new key or remote control from your authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
· Program a spare remote control. You may need to see your author-
ized dealer. See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 206).
I lost a remote control.
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
82
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
Your vehicle has an intelligent electronically
controlled door system that is in constant
communication with overall vehicle systems.
When you lock your vehicle using either the
lock switch on each door interior trim panel,
the keyless entry keypad or the lock sensor
on each exterior door trim panel, the exterior
door handle switches do not release the
doors. This helps secure your vehicle and
prevent unauthorized entry. Also, when your
vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h), the exterior door handle switches
do not release the doors.
If the airbags deploy or the fuel pump shutoff
switch activates, all interior and exterior
unlock switches do not unlock your door for
six seconds. This helps secure the doors in
the event of a crash. After six seconds, all
switches reset and you can open the doors
using the interior and exterior unlatch
switches.
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on each door lock switch illuminates
when you lock the doors. It remains on for
2 to 5 seconds after you switch the ignition
off.
Door Lock Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the door lock switches and the interior
luggage compartment release switch do not
operate after 20 seconds. To restore
function to these switches, you must unlock
your vehicle with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad, or switch the ignition
on.
Activating Intelligent Access
The intelligent access key must be within 3 ft
(1 m) of the door or luggage compartment
you intend to lock or unlock.
At a Door
E295769
83
Doors and Locks
Electronic door handles are on each door.
Gently press the switch inside the exterior
door handle to unlock and open the door.
An unlock symbol illuminates on the door
window trim indicating your vehicle is
unlocked.
E295770
Locking sensors are on both front doors.
When the intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, you can lock your
vehicle by touching the locking sensor below
the keyless entry keypad. Doing so causes
a lock symbol to illuminate on the door
window trim indicating your vehicle is locked
and you can no longer release the door using
the exterior door handle switches. Touching
the locking sensor when the intelligent
access key is not within 3 ft (1 m) causes the
lock status to display, but does not lock the
doors.
Swipe across the locking sensor to display
the current lock status of your vehicle. The
lock status also displays when you open a
door or when the lock status changes.
Note: You cannot use the locking sensors
to unlock your vehicle.
84
Doors and Locks
At the Luggage Compartment
E291416
E291416
Press the exterior release button.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time.
When you press the lock button on the
remote control, all exterior door handle
switches are not able to open the doors.
When you press the unlock button, all
exterior door handle switches are able to
open the doors.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button. The direction
indicators flash. You can then use
the exterior door handle switch to
open the door.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators flash twice to confirm the change.
Driver door mode only unlocks the driver
door when you press the unlock button
once. All door mode unlocks all doors when
you press the unlock button once. The
unlocking mode applies to the remote
control, keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button. The direction
indicators flash. You can no longer
use the exterior door handle switch
to release the door.
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. A
tone sounds and the direction indicators
flash if all the doors and the luggage
compartment are closed.
Mislock
If any door is open, or if the luggage
compartment or hood is open, a tone sounds
and the direction indicators do not flash. The
exterior lock status display also flashes if any
door does not lock.
Switching the Mislock On or Off
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Locks.
4. Switch Mislock Chirp on or off.
85
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking the Doors from
Inside
E295772
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Locking the Doors
Press the lock switch on the door interior trim
panel. The doors can no longer be released
using the exterior door handle switches and
the luggage compartment locks.
Unlocking the Doors
Press the unlock switch on the door interior
trim panel. The doors can then be released
using the exterior door handle switches.
Locking the Doors from the Luggage
Compartment
E295
2959
5920
95920
95920
On the left-hand side of the liftgate, press
the lock switch. The doors can no longer be
opened using the exterior door handle
switches and the luggage compartment
locks.
Emergency Locking
Each door has a backup power system which
allows the door to function if your vehicle
has no power. The system has a limited
number of operations before the power is
depleted and turns off. When the system
turns off, the door remains open and
unlatched and does not close.
If your vehicle has no power and the backup
power system is turned off, you can close
and secure your vehicle by manually
resetting each door latch using a key in the
position shown.
86
Doors and Locks
E316247
E316247
316247
316247
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to reset the latch.
Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to reset the latch.
When you have reset the latch, you are then
able to fully close and latch the door.
Note: You cannot open the door again until
the vehicle battery is fully charged and
operational.
Unlatching the Driver Door with the
Key Blade
If your vehicle has no power and the backup
power system is turned off, you can manually
unlatch the driver door using a key in the
position shown.
E295771
1. Remove the key blade from the remote
control.
2. Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder.
3. Turn the key clockwise to unlatch the
driver door.
Note: All other doors remain locked.
87
Doors and Locks
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys
This prevents you from locking your
intelligent access key inside your vehicle’s
passenger compartment or rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key inside
your vehicle after you close the last door. If
the system finds a key, all the doors
immediately unlock and the horn sounds
twice, indicating that a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
To do this, lock your vehicle after you have
closed all the doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking sensor on the door
window trim with another intelligent
access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off, and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the accessory
position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Switching Autounlock On and Off
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Locks.
4. Switch Autounlock on or off.
88
Doors and Locks
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when you unlock the doors with
the remote control.
The illuminated entry system turns off the
lights if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• More than 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lights do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when all doors are closed and you
switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• More than 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You press the push button ignition
switch.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on, it shuts
off when it detects a certain amount of
battery drain, or after 30 minutes.
Opening the Luggage Compartment
From Inside Your Vehicle
E138633
With the transmission in park (P),
press the button on the instrument
panel.
With the Remote Control
E306276
Press twice within three seconds
to open the luggage compartment.
From Outside Your Vehicle
E291416
E291416
Press the exterior release button. Your
vehicle must be unlocked or have an
intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m) of the
luggage compartment.
89
Doors and Locks
Closing the Luggage Compartment
From Inside Your Vehicle
E138633
Press the button on the instrument
panel to close the luggage
compartment.
With the Remote Control
E306276
Press twice within three seconds
to close the luggage compartment.
From Outside Your Vehicle
E295
59
919
E295
2959
5919
95919
95919
On the left-hand side of the liftgate, press
the liftgate button.
OPENING THE DOORS
Front Doors
E232417
Press the door release button on
the armrest to release the door.
Push the door out to open the
door.
Rear Doors
E232417
Press the unlock switch on the
door and then press the door
release button on the armrest to
release the door. The first press unlocks the
door and the second press unlatches the
door. Push the door out to open the door.
Note: When your vehicle reaches a speed
greater than 2 mph (3 km/h), you will only be
able to release the door by pressing the
unlock button and then door release button
within two seconds.
Note: Do not use the door latch assembly
to attach any accessory, such as handles or
steps, as this can cause damage to your
vehicle.
90
Doors and Locks
EMERGENCY DOOR RELEASE
E29
95773
E295773
295773
If you are inside your vehicle and unable to
use the electronic door system, you can
open the driver door using the emergency
door release switch in the map pocket.
SOFT CLOSING DOOR
Gently close the door until it fully latches.
The system automatically closes the door,
making sure it is fully secure.
Note: The system does not work if the
vehicle battery charge is low.
Note: The system is limited to 25 cycles
between each ignition cycle. This is to
prevent the vehicle battery from losing
charge.
Note: You can override soft close by fully
closing the door manually.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
E1
38637
You can use the keypad to do the following:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
91
Doors and Locks
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner's wallet card in the glove box
and is available from an authorized dealer.
You can also program up to five of your own
five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat steps 1 through 3, then for step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if
you enter the wrong code seven times. This
mode turns off the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after any of
the following occur:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch your vehicle on.
• You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad
simultaneously with the driver door closed.
You do not need to enter a code first.
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code, then press 3·4 on the keypad
within five seconds.
Unlocking Only the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The
interior lamps illuminate.
92
Doors and Locks
Note: All doors unlock if you switch the
two-stage unlocking feature off. See
Locking and Unlocking (page 83).
93
Doors and Locks
POWER LIFTGATE
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are
unable to fully close the liftgate, open the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Keep keys out of reach
of children. Do not allow children to
operate or play near an open or moving
power liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent cargo from falling out
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
If there is a problem with the open or close
request, a tone sounds for one of the
following reasons:
• The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The liftgate is not fully closed and your
vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully
opened, this indicates there could be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible
strut failure. A repetitive tone sounds and
the liftgate closes under control. If the liftgate
continues to close after opening, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Remove any excessive weight from the
liftgate.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power liftgate area before
using the power liftgate control.
94
Liftgate
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
you are driving. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Opening from the Instrument Panel
E138633
With the transmission in park (P),
press the button on the instrument
panel.
Opening with the Remote Control
E267940
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
Opening with the Outside Control Button
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. If
a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate, the liftgate unlocks when you
press the liftgate release button.
E291416
E291416
2. Press the control button to the right of
the rear view camera.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate could activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Keep clear of the liftgate
when using the rear switch.
E291417
Press and release the liftgate button.
95
Liftgate
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This could
damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by doing
any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the remote
control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.*
*This method only works for vehicles with
the hands-free liftgate feature.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when it
reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped moving,
you can also manually move it to the desired
height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control button
on the liftgate until you hear a tone,
indicating programming is complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the power
liftgate, you can manually move it to a
different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height until you reprogram it,
even if you disconnect the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after you
have programmed a lower height than fully
open, you can fully open the liftgate by
manually pushing it upward to the maximum
open position.
Obstacle Detection
Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate
is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce
and activate obstacle detection. To prevent
this, let the power liftgate close completely
before you enter your vehicle. Before driving
off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate
or door ajar message or warning indicator.
Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the liftgate open
while driving.
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. A tone sounds and the system
reverses to open. Once you remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and a tone sounds. Once you
remove the obstacle, you can continue to
operate the liftgate.
96
Liftgate
Switching the Power Liftgate On or Off
You can switch the power liftgate on or off
through the vehicle settings on your
touchscreen.
When switched off, the liftgate only unlatches
and will not power open or close.
Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped)
Make sure you have the passive key within
3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
1. Stand behind your vehicle, and face the
liftgate.
2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion,
without pausing, under and away from
the rear bumper detection area.
E300
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
3
3
3
799
E300
E3
E300
E300
E3
E30
E
E
E3
E3
3
E3
E3
E3
E30
3
30
E30
E30
30
30
E30
E300
300
300
300
30
300
300
300
E
E3
E
3
30
E30
0
00
300
300
300
E
E
300
300
300
E
E
E
0
0
0
0
00
0
0
E
0
0
E
0
E
3
E
3
3
3
E
3
7
799
7
7
7
3. The liftgate opens or closes.
Avoid the following actions when using the
hands-free opening feature:
• Making physical contact with the bumper.
• Holding your foot under the bumper.
• Sweeping your foot from side to side, or
kicking at an odd angle.
Detection Zones
Vehicles Without a Trailer Hitch
E310717
E310717
The detection area is in the center of the rear
bumper.
97
Liftgate
Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch
E310718
E310718
The detection area is on the left-hand side
and right-hand side of the hitch, between the
exhaust and the hitch.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate could activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
Note: Any physical actions that mimic a
kicking motion such as splashing water,
trailer chains or vacuum hoses could cause
the hands-free liftgate to activate. Switch the
power liftgate off through your vehicle
settings or keep the passive key away from
the rear bumper detection area.
98
Liftgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or
a second coded key on the same key chain
may cause vehicle starting problems if they
are too close to the key when starting the
engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine.
Switch the ignition off, move all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and
restart the engine if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a coded
key programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the engine
from starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two
intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or
stolen and you do not have an extra coded
key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. You need to
erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your vehicle.
99
Security
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The active anti-theft system is designed to
warn you in the event of unauthorized
vehicle entry and is also designed to help
prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle.
You can choose what is monitored by arming
the system in different ways. See
Information Displays (page 136).
The turn signals flash and the horn sounds
if the system triggers while the alarm is
armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Using the System
You can select two levels of alarm security.
You can change the level of security when
the ignition is switched off through the
information display with the two options
below:
Perimeter Sensing (If Equipped)
Perimeter sensing monitors the following:
• Doors.
• Hood.
• Liftgate.
All Sensors (If Equipped)
All sensors monitors the following:
• Doors.
• Hood.
• Liftgate.
• Movement inside your vehicle.
• Change in vehicle inclination, for
example, unwanted towing.
Note: Do not choose all sensors monitor
mode when the vehicle is in transport or if
movement within the vehicle is likely to
occur.
Note: For correct operation of the interior
motion detection system, make sure you
close all the windows prior to arming the
system. This helps prevent accidental alarm
activation due to external influences.
Additionally, the interior motion sensing
system does not arm if any door is ajar.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle using
the remote control or keyless entry keypad.
You can also lock your vehicle using the lock
sensor on the exterior door handle if your
vehicle is equipped with intelligent access.
See Locking and Unlocking (page 83).
The turn signals flash once after you lock
your vehicle. This indicates the alarm is in
the pre-armed mode. It fully arms after 20
seconds.
100
Security
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-armed mode.
• Unlock the doors with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad. If equipped with
intelligent access, you can use the unlock
sensor on the exterior door handle. See
Locking and Unlocking (page 83).
• Switch the ignition on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door lock cylinder
to unlock your vehicle, then switch the
ignition on within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control stops the horn and turn
signals, but does not disarm the system.
101
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
- VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL
ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering
wheel when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 176).
E279960
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E279962
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
- VEHICLES WITH: POWER
ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering
wheel when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 176).
102
Steering Wheel
E2
6
1
582
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the
control.
End of Travel Position
The steering column stops just short of the
end of the column travel to prevent damage
to the steering column. A new stopping
position sets if it encounters an object when
tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the
motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
stops just short of the end of the column
travel.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 184).
Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves up when you switch the
ignition off. Switch the ignition on to return
the system to its previous settings. You can
switch this feature on or off through the
touchscreen. See Settings (page 555).
Note: If you press any adjustment or
memory button when in easy exit mode, the
system cancels the operation.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the column
may move up and in.
103
Steering Wheel
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following
functions with the control:
E281219
E280803
Move the selector switch up to
increase volume level.
E280802
Move the selector switch down to
decrease volume level.
E265045
Move the selector switch to the left
to access the previous media
selection.
E265044
Move the selector switch to the
right to access the next media
selection.
E
E281
281
81
81
81
81
81
1
1
1
1
1
8
220
220
220
2
22
220
2
220
220
Note: The controls change when you enter
a submenu.
The following controls are not available when
you enter a submenu:
Move the selector switch to the
right to enter the mode phone
submenu.
E100027
Move the selector switch to the left
to enter the media submenu.
VOICE CONTROL
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E142599
Press and release to activate voice
recognition.
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH LANE CENTERING
E281217
The following controls are only available
when you switch cruise control on.
104
Steering Wheel
Note: You must press the controls from
behind the wheel.
E281221
E281225
See What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With
Lane Centering (page 305).
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: CRUISE CONTROL
E281218
The following controls are only available
when you switch cruise control on.
Note: You must press the controls from
behind the wheel.
E281222
E281224
See What Is Cruise Control (page 303).
105
Steering Wheel
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
E
E281
281
81
81
81
81
81
1
1
1
1
8
220
22
220
220
2
220
220
22
220
Note: The controls change when you enter
a submenu.
The following controls are only available
once you enter a submenu:
E
E299
299
99
99
99
99
99
9
9
9
9
99
701
70
70
701
701
0
0
701
701
See General Information (page 136).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF
EQUIPPED)
The heated steering wheel button is on the
climate controls.
Press the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
HORN
E270945
Press on the center of the steering
wheel near the horn icon to
activate the horn.
106
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS - VEHICLES
WITHOUT: HEATED WIPER
BLADES
E270969
Push the lever up or down to
operate the windshield wiper.
E269410
Single wipe.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Normal wipe.C
High-speed wipe.D
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure that you switch the
windshield wipers off before entering a car
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Intermittent Wipe
E269411
Intermittent wipe.A
Shortest wipe interval.B
Longest wipe interval.C
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
107
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS - VEHICLES
WITH: HEATED WIPER BLADES
Heated Wiper Blade
The heated wiper blades turn on in low
temperature when the windshield wipers are
active or defrost is on. See Automatic
Climate Control (page 165).
Note: In below freezing temperatures, the
heated wiper blades turn on when the wipers
are inactive.
AUTOWIPERS
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
E269411
Autowipers On.A
High sensitivity.B
Low sensitivity.C
E270969
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers.
When you select low sensitivity, the wipers
operate when the sensor detects a large
amount of water on the windshield. When
you select high sensitivity, the wipers
operate when the sensor detects a small
amount of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit
the windshield.
In these conditions, you can do the following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on the
windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure that you switch the
windshield wipers off before entering a car
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
108
Wipers and Washers
Autowipers Settings
This setting defaults to on and remains on
until you switch it off in the touchscreen.
When you switch the feature off, the wipers
do not operate based on the rain sensor.
When you switch on the windshield wipers
to the intermittent wipe position with the
feature off, the wipers use the wipe speed
set by the rotary control.
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit
The rain sensing feature will not operate
immediately after starting your vehicle when
it is in park (P) and the outside temperature
is below 32°F (0°C). You can switch on the
wipers by adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
or adjusting the wiper speed.
This prevents damage to the wiper blades
from ice and snow on the windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E269412
E269412
E270967
Pull the lever toward you to
operate the windshield washers.
When you release the lever, the wipers
operate for a short time. When activated, a
courtesy wipe occurs a short time after the
wipers stop to clear any remaining washer
fluid.
Note: You can switch courtesy wipe on or
off in the touchscreen.
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer also turns
on the front camera washer.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
E24
2
23
2
4
Intermittent wipe.A
Continuous wipe.B
Rear window wiper off.C
109
Wipers and Washers
Depending on your vehicle, when you switch
on the front wipers and move the gearshift
lever to reverse (R), the rear intermittent wipe
may turn on.
Note: Make sure you switch the rear window
wiper off before entering a car wash.
Rear Window Washer
E269727
E269727
Push the lever away from you to operate the
rear window washer. When you release the
lever, the wipers operate for a short time.
Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Switching on the rear washer also turns on
the rear camera washer.
110
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes in
air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
Lighting Control Selections
E281338
Press the toggle switch upward or downward
to make a selection.
Note: An indicator illuminates next to the
active selection.
E265031
Lamps off.
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and rear
lamps.
E281240
Autolamps.
E270968
Headlamps on.
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps each time you switch your vehicle
on.
Switching High Beam Headlamps On
and Off
E
E
27
31
182
111
Lighting
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the lever
toward you to switch the high beams off.
Flashing High Beam Headlamps
E273181
Pull the lever toward you and release it to
flash the high beam headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low light
situations or when the wipers operate.
E281240
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps each time you switch your vehicle
on.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use the
touchscreen to adjust the period of time that
the headlamps remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons are
on the lighting control.
E291299
E296433
Repeatedly press one of the
buttons to adjust the brightness.
112
Lighting
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You will
hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch
off automatically after three minutes with any
door open or 30 seconds after the last door
has been closed. You can cancel this feature
by pulling the direction indicator lever toward
you again or switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH: CONFIGURABLE
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
Switch the daytime running lamps on or off
using the touchscreen:
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page 555).
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Lighting.
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. You switch the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
you release the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in all
switch positions.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight
conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the lighting
control to any position except headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On or
Off
Only switch the front fog lamps on during
reduced visibility.
113
Lighting
You can switch the front fog lamps on if any
of the following occur:
• You set the lighting control to the parking
lamps position.
• You set the lighting control to the
headlamps position.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position and the headlamps
are on.
The front fog lamp button is on the lighting
control.
Press the button to switch the front
fog lamps on or off.
Note: The brightness of the daytime running
lamps may decrease when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
Front Fog Lamp Indicator
It illuminates when you switch the
front fog lamps on.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
About Adaptive Headlamps
The headlamps are designed to adapt when
you are steering around a curve, or if the
camera detects lane markings indicating a
curve or traffic signs indicating an
intersection.
The system is designed to operate if all of
the following occur:
• You switch the system on through your
vehicle settings.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
• The ambient light level is low enough that
low beams are required.
114
Lighting
Steering Around a Curve
E161714
E161714
Without adaptive headlamps.A
B With adaptive headlamps.
Camera Detects Lane Markings (If Equipped)
WARNING: Inspect and replace the
windshield wiper blades regularly to make
sure the camera sensor has a clear view.
The windshield wiper blades must be the
correct length.
E267903
115
Lighting
Camera Detects Traffic Signs (If Equipped)
E292505
Note: The camera only detects traffic signs
if your vehicle speed is below 31 mph
(50 km/h).
Switching Adaptive Headlamps On or
Off
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Lighting.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E
E273180
0
Push the lever up or down to use
the direction indicators.
Indicating a Lane Change
Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The Lincoln welcome mat projection lights
are on the bottom of the exterior mirror
housings. They project an image onto the
ground a short distance from your vehicle
when welcome lighting or lighted entry turns
on.
For auto-fold mirrors, the Lincoln welcome
mat turns on when welcome lighting or
lighted entry turns on and the mirrors fold in
upon locking or using the switch on the door.
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up or
other types of contamination on the surface
of the light lens can cause non-permanent
distortion or reduced brightness of the
image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
Note: If you enable auto-fold and then you
fold the mirrors in to the door window glass,
the welcome mats do not turn on.
Switching the Welcome Lighting On or
Off
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
116
Lighting
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page 555).
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Lighting.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a button on the remote control.
• You press the all lamps on button on the
overhead console.
Front Interior Lamp
E301059
E301059
E301059
The front interior lamp switches are on the
overhead console.
Note: The position of each button on the
overhead console depends on your vehicle.
All Lamps On or Off
Press to switch all interior lamps
on or off.
Individual Map Lamps
Touch the lamp lens to switch the map lamps
on and off.
Interior Lamp Function
Press to switch the interior lamp
function on and off.
When the interior lamp function is off and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps stay off.
When the interior lamp function is on and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps turn on.
Note: The indicator lamp lights amber when
the door function is off.
Rear Interior Lamps
E281231
The rear interior lamps may be above the
rear seat or above the rear windows.
Press to switch the lamps on or off.
Note: If the rear lamps are switched on
through the overhead console, you cannot
switch them off with the rear lamp switch.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
117
Lighting
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
E279027
Select ambient lighting.
E281470
Switching Ambient Lighting On
Touch a color once.
Changing the Color
Touch any color once.
Adjusting the Brightness
Drag the selected color up or down.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Touch the selected color once or drag the
selected color down to zero brightness.
118
Lighting
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps
or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead, the
system turns the high beams off. Low beams
remain on.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to turn the high beams
on and off.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use the system in
poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Lighting.
Activating the Automatic High Beam
Control
E281240
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See
Autolamps (page 112).
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps each time you switch your vehicle
on.
When active, the high beams turn on if all
the following conditions occur:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
When active, the high beams turn off if at
least one of the following conditions occur:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that you do not require high beams.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The system detects severe rain, snow or
fog.
• A blocked vehicle camera.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).
Note: The deactivation speed is lower on
curves.
Note: Certain curvy road situations may
delay high beam reactivation.
Note: If you have a blocked sensor, the
system may not operate properly. Keep the
windshield free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. If you have a
blocked camera, a message may appear in
the information display.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
119
Automatic High Beam Control
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL INDICATORS
The indicator illuminates to confirm
when the system is ready to assist.
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the high beams on or off.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system during inclement
weather.
E
E
27
31
182
Push the lever away from you to switch
between high beam and low beam.
120
Automatic High Beam Control
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the power windows. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, verify they are free of obstruction
and make sure that children and pets are
not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E295317
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Resetting One-Touch Up
Start the engine.
1. Lift and hold the window switch until you
fully close the door window. Continue to
hold the switch for a few seconds after
you close the window.
2. Release the window switch.
3. Press and hold the window switch until
you fully open the door window.
4. Release the window switch.
5. Lift and hold the window switch until you
fully close the window.
6. Test for correct window operation by
carrying out the one-touch down and
one-touch up features.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: If you override
bounce-back, the window does not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal
injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
121
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock
E295318
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It illuminates when you
lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several
minutes after you switch the ignition off or
until you open either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
You can use the remote control to open the
windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See Remote Control
(page 69).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your vehicle,
press and hold the remote control unlock
button to open the windows. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the lock
or unlock button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, verify they are free of obstruction
and make sure that children and pets are
not in the proximity of the window
openings.
To close the windows, press and hold the
remote control lock button. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the lock
or unlock button to stop movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
122
Windows and Mirrors
E295322
Power-folding mirror control.A
Window lockout.B
Adjustment control.C
Right-hand mirror.D
Left-hand mirror.E
Switch your vehicle on to adjust the mirrors.
With the ignition in accessory mode or the
engine running:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the
position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Auto-Folding Exterior Mirrors
The exterior mirrors fold in toward the glass
after you place the transmission into park (P),
switch off the vehicle, open and close the
driver side door and lock the vehicle. The
exterior mirrors unfold and return to their
driving position after you unlock the vehicle
and open and close the driver side door.
You can switch this feature on and off
through the touchscreen.
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control on
the door. The control lights and the mirrors
fold in toward the glass. Press the control
again to unfold the mirrors. The control light
turns off.
Note: If you use the power-folding control to
fold the mirrors on demand with the auto
fold feature on, you must use the control
again to unfold them.
Loose Mirror
If you manually fold your power-folding
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to reset
them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
123
Windows and Mirrors
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise
as you reset the power-folding mirrors. This
sound is normal. Repeat this process as
needed each time you manually fold the
mirrors.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 171).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 184).
Auto-dimming Feature
The driver exterior mirror dims when the
interior auto-dimming mirror turns on.
Direction Indicator Mirrors
When the vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.
Lincoln Welcome Mat Projection Lamp
The lamps on the bottom part of the exterior
mirror lower housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when you
open a door.
360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)
See 360 Degree Camera (page 300).
Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System (page
326).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. A rear center
passenger or raised rear center head
restraint may also block light from reaching
the sensor.
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of bright
light from behind. It returns to normal when
the bright light from behind is no longer
present or if you shift into reverse (R).
124
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the moonroof. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, verify that it is free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the roof
opening.
The moonroof controls are on the overhead
console and have a one-touch open and
close feature. To stop it during one-touch
operation, press the control a second time.
125
Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E295253
Moonroof open. Press and release
to open the moonroof.
A
Moonroof vent or close. Press and
release to vent or close the
moonroof.
B
Sunshade open. Press and release
to open the sunshade. The
sunshade opens with the
moonroof.
C
Sunshade close. Press and release
to close the sunshade.
D
Note: The sunshade stops short of the fully
open position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To fully open the sunshade,
press the control again.
Note: When closing, the sunshade stops
at the first panel for the dual panel
moonroof. Press and release again to
continue to fully close the sunshade.
Rear Sunshade Opening and Closing (If
Equipped)
E297640
E297640
Sunshade close. Press and release
to close the sunshade.
A
Sunshade open. Press and release
to open the sunshade. The
sunshade opens with the
moonroof.
B
Note: The rear sunshade open and close
controls can be on the rear console or fold
down armrest bezel.
126
Windows and Mirrors
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To fully open the sunshade,
press the control again.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof reverses some distance if it
detects an obstacle when closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close control within two seconds
after the roof comes to a stop following a
bounce-back reversal.
127
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E307726
E307726
128
Instrument Cluster
Status bar.A
Speedometer.B
Information on demand.C
Vehicle range display.D
Fuel and battery gauges.E
Engine coolant temperature gauge.F
Tachometer.G
Note: Clusters shown in single gauge view.
Note: Displays may appear slightly different
depending on region.
Status Bar
Displays information related to the current
audio source, compass direction and outside
air temperature.
Information On Demand
Displays selected on-demand information
screens. See General Information (page
136).
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates approximately how
much fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol
indicates on which side of your vehicle the
fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when
your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder displays and sounds
when the distance to empty reaches 75 mi
(120 km) to empty for MyKey, and at 50 mi
(80 km), 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and
0 mi (0 km) for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Battery Gauge
The high voltage battery gauge displays the
total amount of charge associated with your
available electric only driving range. A full fill
represents the total amount of energy you
can get from an external charge by plugging
your vehicle in. When the fill reaches empty
the powertrain system switches to hybrid
operation. See Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle
Operation (page 219).
129
Instrument Cluster
Vehicle Range Display
Displays the approximate range your vehicle
can travel with the energy currently onboard.
Estimates vary based on the energy used
when driving.
Changes in driving pattern can cause the
values to not only decrease but also increase
or stay constant for periods of time.
The amount of energy being used when
driving is affected by:
• Mild or aggressive acceleration or
braking.
• Vehicle speed.
• Use of accessories, such as climate
control.
• Ambient temperature and other weather
conditions.
• Driving in a city or on a highway.
• Driving on flat or hilly roads.
• Towing.
Note: It is normal for vehicle range estimates
to vary due to changes in average energy
usage. This is why you typically see different
range estimates each time you fill up the fuel
tank or fully charge the battery.
Note: Electric range is lower in cold
temperatures due to reduced energy
capacity in the high voltage battery. Set a
departure time and cabin temperature to
maintain battery temperature for best range
and performance. See Electric Vehicle
Information (page 546).
Gasoline Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank.
Electric Range
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on electric power only with
the engine off.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with
a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
Indicates the engine coolant temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level
indicator is in the normal range. If the engine
coolant temperature exceeds the normal
range, stop your vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the
engine cool.
130
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Depending on your vehicle options and
instrument cluster type, not all warning lamps
and indicators shown are available.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the instrument cluster and function the same
as a warning lamp, but do not display when
you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
what mode the system is in. See
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work (page 305).
On (white light): Illuminates when you switch
on the adaptive cruise control system. Turns
off when the speed control system is turned
off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when you
engage the adaptive cruise control system.
Turns off when you disengage the speed
control system.
Anti-Lock Brake System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a system
error. You continue to have the
normal braking (without ABS) unless the
brake system warning lamp also illuminates.
Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Automatic High Beam Control
Illuminates when this feature is on.
See Automatic High Beam
Control (page 119).
Auto Hold Active
E197933
Illuminates when the system holds
your vehicle stationary.
Auto Hold Unavailable
E197934
Illuminates when the system is on,
but unavailable to hold your
vehicle stationary.
Auto Start-stop (If Equipped)
E121
3
7
7
Illuminates when the engine shuts
down or in conjunction with a
message.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a system error. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
immediately.
131
Instrument Cluster
Blind Spot Monitor
E151262
Illuminates when you switch this
feature off or in conjunction with a
message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 326).
Brake System Warning Lamp
WARNING: Driving your vehicle with
the warning lamp on is dangerous. A
significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
This lamp is a dual function lamp and
illuminates when:
• You apply the parking brake with the
ignition on.
• Your vehicle has a brake fault or low
brake fluid level, regardless of parking
brake position.
E270480
If the lamp illuminates when you
are moving, you may have the
parking brake applied. Make sure
the parking brake is off. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as
possible if the lamp continues to
illuminate.
Cruise Control
E71340
Illuminates when you switch this
feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on the
left-hand or right-hand direction
indicator or the hazard flasher. If
the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
for a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 420).
Distance Alert
E281485
Flashes when your vehicle is
rapidly approaching another
vehicle or a pedestrian within your
driving path. See Pre-Collision Assist (page
337).
Door Ajar
Illuminates when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Electric Park Brake
E270480
Illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake has a system
error. See Electric Parking Brake
(page 272).
Engine or Motor Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when your vehicle
coolant temperature is high. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Allow the engine to cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 404).
132
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a system error. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 401).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Fasten Seatbelt
E71880
Illuminates and a tone sounds to
remind you to fasten your seatbelt.
See Seatbelt Reminder (page 50).
Fasten Rear Seatbelt
E206718
Illuminates and a tone sounds to
signal the rear seatbelts are not
fastened.
Front Airbag
E67017
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
there is a system error. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Illuminates when you switch the
front fog lamps on.
High Beam
Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It flashes
when you use the headlamp
flasher.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
Illuminates when you switch hill
descent on.
Hood Ajar
E246598
Illuminates when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Lamps On
Illuminates when you switch the
low beam headlamps or the
parking lamps on.
Liftgate Ajar
E162453
Illuminates when the liftgate is not
completely closed.
Low Beam Warning
E181350
Illuminates when the low beam
headlamp bulb is not functioning
properly.
Low Fuel Level
Illuminates when the fuel level is
low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
133
Instrument Cluster
Low Tire Pressure Warning
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the lamp remains on with
the engine running or when
driving, check your tire pressure as soon as
possible.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked as soon
as possible.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when the system
detects a powertrain or an 4WD
fault. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Ready to Drive (If Equipped)
E224090
Illuminates when you have
switched on your vehicle and it is
ready to drive. A corresponding
message may appear stating ready to drive.
Service Engine Soon
It illuminates when you switch the
ignition on prior to engine start to
check the bulb and to indicate
whether your vehicle is ready for Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
system errors are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Catalytic Converter (page 235).
If it illuminates when the engine is running
this indicates a system error. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected an error in
the vehicle emission control system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be occurring.
Continuing to drive your vehicle may cause
reduced power or the engine to stop. Failure
to respond to the warning lamp may cause
component damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Stability Control
E138639
It flashes when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated or
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a system
error. During a system error the system
switches off. Have the system checked
immediately. See Using Stability Control
(page 283).
Stability Control Off
E130458
Illuminates when you switch the
system off. It goes out when you
switch the system back on or when
you switch the ignition off. See Using
Stability Control (page 283).
134
Instrument Cluster
Stop Safely Now
E144693
Illuminates if your vehicle has an
electrical component fault or failure
that could cause your vehicle to
shutdown or enter into a limited operating
mode. You may also see a message.
Tow Haul Indicator (If Equipped)
E246592
Illuminates when the system
switches on.
Vehicle Plugged in (If Equipped)
E228962
Illuminates when your vehicle is
plugged in. A corresponding
message may display after
attempting to start your vehicle.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Keyless Warning Alert
The horn will sound twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key and
your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle
is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the headlamps
or parking lamps on and open the driver door
with the vehicle off.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
135
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the quick action menu on the
right-hand side of the steering wheel. The
information display provides the
corresponding information.
Information Display Controls
E
E281
281
81
81
81
81
81
1
1
1
1
8
220
22
22
220
220
2
2
220
220
Note: The controls change when you enter
a submenu.
E281481
Move the selector switch up to
enter the navigation submenu.
E280315
Move the selector switch down to
enter the settings submenu.
Move the selector switch to the
right to enter the mode phone
submenu.
E100027
Move the selector switch to the left
to enter the media submenu.
E281483
Press the folder button to scroll
through information on demand
display screens. See Personalized
Settings (page 140).
Menu Controls
The following controls are only available
once you enter a submenu:
E
E299
299
299
99
99
99
99
9
9
9
9
9
701
701
701
0
701
0
701
0
701
Use the selector switch to toggle up and
down.
E272621
Press the home button to exit a
submenu.
136
Information Displays
E281480
Move the selector switch to the left
to exit a submenu.
E265041
Move the selector switch to the
right to choose and confirm
settings or messages.
Menu
E204495
This icon shows the features on or
off status. A check in the box
indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
Note: Some menu items are regional specific
or optional and may appear slightly different
or not at all.
Settings
Settings
See Personalized Settings (page 140).Information ScreensDisplay Setup
Speedometer km/h
Speedometer MPH
Add Tachometer to View
Hold OK to ResetDriving History
Enter the submenu and select your settingBorder Crossing
Brake Coach
Displays your oil life statusOil Life
Hold OK to Reset
Hold OK to ResetTire Monitor
137
Information Displays
Note: Additional vehicle settings are
available through your touchscreen. See
Settings (page 555).
Head Up Display
Head Up Display
Menu options covered in the head up display section.
Phone
Phone
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See Phone (page 536).
Audio
Audio
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See Entertainment (page 521).
138
Information Displays
Navigation (If Equipped)
Navigation
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See Navigation (page 538).
Hybrid Display Information
Displays unique hybrid vehicle information
when you shut off your vehicle or come to a
stop.
Brake Coach
Appears after the vehicle has come to a stop.
It coaches you to brake in a manner that
maximizes the amount of energy returned
through the regenerative braking system.
The percent displayed is an indication of the
regenerative braking efficiency with 100%
representing the maximum amount of energy
recovery. Brake Coach can be turned on or
off in the settings menu.
Trip Summary
Displays when you shut off your vehicle. The
values are cumulative since you last started
your vehicle.
The information shown is the same as the
This Trip on demand screen. See
Personalized Settings (page 140).
Vehicle Charging Status
Displays when you shut off your vehicle and
when you turn on your vehicle while plugged
in. Charging status includes the charge start
or charge end time as appropriate. You can
modify your vehicle's charge settings through
the touchscreen. See SYNC™ 3 (page 507).
139
Information Displays
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
Information On Demand (If Equipped)
Note: On Demand information appears on the right-hand side of the instrument cluster in single gauge view, and in the center of the instrument
cluster in dual gauge view when you switch certain drive modes on.
Note: Pure EV information is only available when you switch on the Pure EV drive mode.
Information On Demand
Calm Screen
PURE EV
Trip 1
Trip 2
This Trip
Fuel Economy
Seatbelts
Tire Pressure
Power Distribution
Trailer Light Check
Off Road
140
Information Displays
Information On Demand
EV Coach
Electric Efficiency
Trip 1 and 2
Provides trip timer, trip average fuel
economy, total trip distance traveled, and
distance traveled on electric power only with
the engine off.
Press and hold the folder button to reset.
This Trip
Provides trip timer, trip average fuel
economy, total trip distance traveled, and
distance traveled on electric power only with
the engine off. If the gasoline engine has not
turned on during the trip, then trip average
fuel economy does not display. This Trip
automatically resets each time you start your
vehicle.
Fuel Economy
An Instant Fuel Economy gauge is provided
along with Average Fuel Economy. Average
fuel economy is continuously averaged since
the last reset.
Both electric only and hybrid operation are
included in the calculation. More electric only
driving will result in greater average fuel
economy.
While viewing this screen you can reset your
average fuel economy by pressing and
holding the folder button.
When the gasoline engine is off the instant
fuel economy gauge is replaced with an
electric driving message.
EV Coach
EV Coach can help you to get the most out
of your vehicle’s electric driving and
regenerative braking capabilities.
When you are accelerating or maintaining
speed you will see a blue or white solid bar
indicating vehicle power. You may also see
a blue rectangular box which shows the
power level at which the engine will turn on.
• When the power level is within the box,
the color of the bar will be blue. This
means you are in Electric operation and
the engine is off.
• When the power level is outside of the
box, the color of the bar will be white.
This means you are in Hybrid operation
with a combination of the electric motor
and the engine providing vehicle power.
141
Information Displays
When you are decelerating with either your
foot off the accelerator pedal or on the brake
pedal, you will see a green or white solid bar
indicating the power being used to slow
down the vehicle. You may also see a green
rectangular box which shows the amount of
power that can be recaptured by the
regenerative braking system and returned
to the high voltage battery.
• When the power level is completely
within the box, the color of the bar will
be all green. This means that the
regenerative braking system is being
used to efficiently slow the vehicle down
and return the maximum percentage of
energy to the high voltage battery.
• When the power level is outside of the
green box, then the bar will be white. This
means that both the regenerative braking
system and conventional braking system
are in use.
Electric Efficiency
This screen shows your average driving
distance per kWh of electricity used on your
hybrid vehicle. The value is calculated only
when your available electric range is being
used and the gasoline engine is off.
Distance per full charge is also shown. This
is an estimate of the electric range you would
have if you plugged in and fully charged your
vehicle right now. The higher your electric
efficiency, the higher your distance per full
charge.
Your electric efficiency is affected by your
driving style and route, climate control use,
outside temperature and other factors. Best
efficiency is achieved in mild ambient
temperatures with mild to moderate
acceleration and braking, moderate speeds
and low climate control usage.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
E
E281
281
281
81
81
81
81
1
1
1
8
220
22
220
220
2
2
220
2
220
22
220
E265041
Move the selector switch to the
right to acknowledge and remove
some messages from the
information display. The system removes
other messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
The system requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Active Park Fault
142
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar concern is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging. See How Does Adaptive
Cruise Control With Stop and Go Work (page 305).
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See How Does
Adaptive Cruise Control With Stop and Go Work (page 305).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
Inclement weather, ice, mud, or water is blocking the radar, causing the system to become
unavailable. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See How Does Adaptive Cruise
Control With Stop and Go Work (page 305).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displays when the system disables automatic braking.Normal Cruise Active Adaptive Braking Off
Displays when the system reinstates adaptive cruise control to you.Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to Activate
Adaptive Headlamps
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a concern. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Check Headlamp System See Manual
143
Information Displays
AdvanceTrac™ and Traction Control
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The status of the system after you switch it off.AdvanceTrac Off
The status of the system after you switch it on.AdvanceTrac On
The status of the system after you switch it on.AdvanceTrac SPORT MODE
The status of the system after you switch it off.Traction Control Off
The status of the system after you switch it on.Traction Control On
Alarm
ActionMessage
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 100).Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle.
144
Information Displays
AWD
ActionMessage
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating.AWD Temporarily Disabled
The all-wheel drive system is locking the torque transfer clutch to reduce clutch temperature.AWD Temporarily Locked
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating or if you
are using the temporary spare tire.
AWD OFF
The all-wheel drive system resumes normal function and clears this message after driving a
short distance with the road tire re-installed or after the system cools.
AWD Restored
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, have the system checked as soon as possible.
AWD Fault Service Required
Displays when the transfer case fluid requires service.Change AWD Power Transfer Unit Lube
Displays when the transfer case fluid has been changed and reset to new.AWD Power Transfer Unit Lube Set to New
145
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System (12 volt)
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have
the system checked as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on have
the system checked as soon as possible.
Charging System Service Soon
The charging system needs servicing. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Charging System Service Now
The battery management system determines that the 12V battery is at a low state of charge.
Start the engine to charge the battery or charge the battery using an aftermarket battery
charger. This message clears once you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge
has recovered.
Battery State of Charge Low
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn
the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message clears once the
vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unneces-
sary electrical loads allows faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save Battery
Displays when the battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition.
The system disables various vehicle features to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many
of the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. When the system
voltage recovers, the disabled features operate again as normal.
Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned Off
146
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System (High Voltage)
ActionMessage
Your vehicle needs confirmation it is unplugged before allowing a start. Make sure you unplug
your vehicle and respond to the message prompt before starting your vehicle.
Vehicle Plugged In ? Yes No
Your vehicle detects it is still plugged in after you attempt to start it.Unplug Prior to Starting Vehicle
Your vehicle enables the engine due to the climate control defrost setting. This is normal
operation.
Engine Enabled Due to Defrost Setting
For full defrost heat, select a drive mode other than Pure EV. The engine may run to provide
more cabin heat.
Press EV Button for Full Defrost
Your vehicle enables the engine for system performance. This is normal operation.Engine Enabled for System Performance
You can press OK to enable the engine temporarily for increased performance when in Pure
EV drive mode.
Press OK to Enable Engine
147
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
The system may require service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Blind Spot System Fault
Something is blocking the sensor, causing the system to become unavailable. You can
typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Blind Spot Information System (page 326).
Blind Spot Not Available Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle and applies the brakes.Cross Traffic Alert Applying Brakes
Something is blocking the sensor, causing the system to become unavailable. In most cases,
you can clean the sensor to resolve.
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The system may require service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Cross Traffic System Fault
The system automatically turns off and displays this message when you connect a trailer to
the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Cross Traffic Alert (page 330).
Cross Traffic Alert Deactivated Trailer
Attached
The system automatically turns off and displays this message when you connect a trailer to
the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind Spot Information System (page
326).
Blind Spot Alert Deactivated Trailer Attached
148
Information Displays
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The driver door is not completely closed.Driver Door Ajar
The passenger door is not completely closed.Passenger Door Ajar
The rear left-hand door is not completely closed.Rear Left Door Ajar
The rear right-hand door is not completely closed.Rear Right Door Ajar
The liftgate is not completely closed.Liftgate Ajar
The hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar
The system has disabled the door switches.Switches Inhibited Security Mode
Displays when the door lock is turned on and you attempt to open the door.Doors Locked Unlock Before Opening
Indicates a driver door concern that requires manually opening the door by the override lever.
Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Driver Door Fault Use Inside Override Lever
In Map Pocket
Indicates a concern with the electronic door system. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Door Fault Service Required
Displays when the system requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Child Lock Malfunction Service Required
149
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Indicates that the rear seat interior door release switches and power windows are switched
off, preventing rear seat occupants from opening the doors or windows.
Child Lock ON
Indicates that the rear seat interior door release switches and power windows are switched
on, allowing the rear seat occupants to open the doors and windows.
Child Lock OFF
The factory keypad code displays in the information display after the system resets the keypad.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 99).
Factory Keypad Code {X X X X X}
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet valve may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Wait for up to 15 seconds while the fuel system depressurizes.Fuel Door Opening
150
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The fuel system has finished depressurizing and you can begin to refuel.Fuel Door Open
A reminder to close the fuel door. Failure to follow this instruction can cause the check engine
light to illuminate.
Close Fuel Door to Avoid ""Check Engine""
Light
There is an error in attempting to refill your vehicle.Refuel Error See Manual
Hill Descent Control
ActionMessage
Displays when you switch off hill descent control mode.Hill Descent Control OFF
Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h).For Hill Descent Reduce Speed 20 MPH or
Less
Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h).For Hill Descent Reduce Speed 32 Km/h or
Less
Displays when hill descent control mode requires you to shift the transmission into gear.For Hill Descent Select Gear
Displays when the hill control mode requires you to resume control.Hill Descent Driver Resume Control
Displays when a hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control Fault
151
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when you disable the hill descent control mode to cool the brake system.Hill Descent Control Off System Cooling
Displays when hill descent control mode is ready.Hill Descent Control Ready
Displays when you activate the hill descent control mode.Hill Descent Control Active
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Hill start assist is not available. Have the system checked as soon as possible. See Hill Start
Assist (page 274).
Hill Start Assist Not Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake
The key is not detected by the system.No Key Detected
The start stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an intelligent access key is not
detected inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Full Accessory Power Active
152
Information Displays
ActionMessage
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Starting System Fault
Displays when you successfully program an intelligent access key to the system.Key Program Successful
Displays when you successfully program the maximum number of intelligent access key to
the system.
Max Number of Keys Learned
Displays during spare key programming when intelligent access key programming fails.Key Program Failure
Displays during spare key programming when you have not programmed enough keys.Not Enough Keys Learned
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low Replace Soon
Displays when you switch the vehicle off.Vehicle Switched Off
153
Information Displays
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
Displays when the system requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
Check to make sure there are no objects or debris blocking the camera. Have the system
checked if this condition persists.
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
Clean the windshield to improve visibility and allow the camera to properly operate.Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
Displays when the system requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction Service Required
The system requests that you keep your hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If
this message stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life is low and needs to be changed soon. See General Maintenance
Information (page 579).
Change Engine Oil Soon
The engine oil life is low and needs to be changed immediately. See General Maintenance
Information (page 579).
Oil Change Required
154
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The brake fluid level is low. Have the system checked immediately. See Brake Fluid Check
(page 409).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Check Brake System
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high. Have the system checked immediately.Engine Coolant Over Temperature
The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may not allow some features to
properly operate. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Transport Mode Contact Dealer
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not allow some features to
properly operate. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Factory Mode Contact Dealer
Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a powertrain concern. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
See Manual
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temperature.Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp
The brake system has reduced stopping power.Brake Applied Power Reduced
The motor electronics are overheating. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off
your vehicle and let it cool. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Motor Coolant Over Temperature
EV functionality is disabled and the engine is running to maintain oil quality. See Plug-In
Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 219).
Engine ON Due to Low Use Normal Operation
155
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive Safely
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays that the MyKey speed limit is
on.
Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph
(130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed Drive Safely
Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On - MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On - MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting
156
Information Displays
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Check Front Park Aid
The system requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Check Rear Park Aid
The radar is blocked due to inclement weather, ice, mud or water in front of radar. You can
typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Rear Parking Aid (page 286).
Rear Park Aid Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The radar is blocked due to inclement weather, ice, mud or water in front of radar. You can
typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Front Parking Aid (page 288).
Front Park Aid Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The radar is blocked due to inclement weather, ice, mud or water in front of radar. You can
typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Principle of Operation (page 286).
Park Aid Not Available Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
157
Information Displays
Park Brake
ActionMessage
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your vehicle more than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted without the brake pedal
being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake and Switch
The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is attempted but cannot be
performed. Perform a manual release.
Park Brake Use Switch to Release
The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release
park brake before continued driving.
Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
The electric parking brake system has been put into a special mode to allow service of the
rear brakes. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Maintenance Mode
158
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Some function-
ality may still be available. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Limited Function Service Required
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Malfunction Service Now
Applying the electric parking brake numerous times has overheated the system. Wait two
minutes before attempting to apply again.
Park Brake System Overheated
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Steering Loss Stop Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or
passive entry or passive start system that requires service. Have the system checked as soon
as possible.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
The steering lock system has detected a condition that requires service. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now
159
Information Displays
Pre-Collision Assist
ActionMessage
You have a blocked sensor due to inclement weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar
sensor. In most cases, you can clean the sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor
Blocked
Displays when the system requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Pre-Collision Assist Not Available
Remote Start
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and push the gear shift button to drive the vehicle
after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake and Gear Shift Button
Seats
ActionMessage
Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the seat, if the
warning stays on or continues to come on have the system checked as soon as possible.
Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove Objects
Near Passenger Seat
Displays as a reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not Permitted While Driving
Displays to show where your memory setting has been saved.Memory {0} Saved
160
Information Displays
Starting System
ActionMessage
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the brake.To START Press Brake
Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start the vehicle.Cranking Time Exceeded
Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.Engine Start Pending Please Wait
Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.Pending Start Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 447).
Tire Pressure Low
The system may require service. If this message stays on or continues to come on, have the
system checked as soon as possible. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 447).
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
The system may require service, or your spare tire is in use. For more information on how the
system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 447).
If this message stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
161
Information Displays
Trailer
ActionMessage
A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given ignition cycle.Trailer Connected
A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or
unintentionally, and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
There is a concern with your vehicle wiring and trailer wiring or brake
system. See Towing a Trailer (page 354).
Trailer Wiring Fault
There is a concern with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a concern with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a concern with your trailer battery. See Towing a Trailer
(page 354).
Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual
There is a concern with your vehicle trailer lighting module. See
Towing a Trailer (page 354).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault See Manual
162
Information Displays
Transmission
ActionMessage
You switched the engine off and the gear selector is in any position other than park (P).Shift to Park
The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive.Transmission Warming Up Please Wait
Displays when you need to press the brake pedal.Press Brake Pedal
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s
possible.
Transmission Over Temperature Stop Safely
Have the system checked as soon as possible.Transmission Service Required
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it is
possible.
Transmission Too Hot Press Brake
The transmission has limited functionality. Have the system checked as soon as possible.Transmission Limited Function See Manual
A reminder to shift into park (P). In addition, this message is typical after reconnecting or
recharging the battery until you cycle the ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 410).
Transmission Not in Park
Displays when there is a concern and the park brake needs to be depressed before exiting
the vehicle. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Confirm Park Brake Apply
Before Exiting the Vehicle
Have the system checked as soon as possible.SHIFT SYS FAULT Service Required
Displays when there is a concern while the vehicle is shifting to park (P). Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Vehicle is Shifting to Park
163
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when there is a concern while the vehicle is shifting to reverse (R). Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Reverse Unavailable
Service Required
Have the system checked as soon as possible.SHIFT SYS FAULT Drive Unavailable Select
S for Drive Service Required
Have the system checked as soon as possible.SHIFT SYS FAULT Neutral Unavailable Service
Required
Have the system checked as soon as possible.SHIFT SYS FAULT Sport Unavailable Service
Required
Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.Invalid Gear Selection
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be pressed to enable the transmission to shift from
park.
Depress Brake to Shift from Park
164
Information Displays
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
E286903
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Note: You can control some of the climate
features through the touchscreen.
Note: For Hybrid vehicles, the air
conditioning compressor may run and airflow
may be felt when the climate control is off
to provide cooling to the battery.
Accessing the Air Distribution Controls
E265283
Press and release the button to
activate the selection screen.
From the screen you can direct air to the
windshield, instrument panel or footwell
vents. You can direct air through any
combination of these vents. See Climate
(page 533).
Accessing the Climate Control Menu
E265038
Press and release the button to
access additional controls for the
front climate system.
Accessing Rear Climate Controls
E270447
Press and release the button to
access additional controls for the
rear climate system.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
E2
265389
E2
265
389
265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle.
165
Climate Control
Setting the Temperature
E266187
E266186
Press the toggle button on the left-hand side
of the climate control upward or downward
to set the left-hand temperature.
Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Press the toggle button on the right-hand
side of the climate control upward or
downward to set the right-hand temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch on automatic operation.
Repeatedly press the button to
adjust auto mode.
The system adjusts the blower motor speed,
air distribution, air conditioning operation,
and outside or recirculated air to reach and
maintain the temperature you have set.
Under high humidity conditions, the system
adjusts the blower motor speed, air
distribution and air conditioning operation
to reduce window fogging.
Note: The system starts at the previous
setting when you switch on AUTO mode.
Note: You can also switch off dual zone
mode by pressing and holding the button for
more than two seconds.
166
Climate Control
Auto Mode Indicator Status
DescriptionAuto Mode Indicator Status
One indicator illuminated. • The blower motor speed is reduced.
• Use this setting to minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor.
• This setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
Two indicators illuminated. • The blower motor speed is moderate.
Three indicators illuminated. • The blower motor speed is increased.
• Use this setting to reduce the time taken to cool the interior.
• This setting increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air to
improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, such as
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Note: The A/C LED light may turn on and off
based on the temperature setting or the
current conditions.
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Note: Your vehicle may not have a physical
button. You can use the touchscreen to turn
the climate control on and off.
167
Climate Control
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning
On and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum cooling.
The driver and passenger temperatures are
set to LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off
Press and release the button for
maximum defrosting.
The driver and passenger temperatures are
set to HI, air flows through the windshield air
vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
Note: Depending on your region, air
conditioning turns on.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns on
when you select maximum defrost.
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may reduce
the time needed to cool the interior, when
used with A/C, and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off
automatically, or prevent you from switching
on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may
also turn on and off automatically in various
air distribution control combinations to
improve heating or cooling efficiency.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
168
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. Automatic mode is best
recommended to maintain set temperature.
Note: The system adjusts to heat or cool the
interior to the temperature you select as
quickly as possible.
Note: For the system to function efficiently,
the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs air flow to
the windshield and side window air vents. In
addition, the blower motor may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system uses recirculated air to
maximize interior cooling. Blower motor
speed may also reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Press and release MAX A/C.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather
1. Press and release defrost or maximum
defrost.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE
CONTROLS - VEHICLES WITH:
QUADRUPLE ZONE AUTOMATIC
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Use the rear passenger touchscreen to
select the following:
E283811
Press the climate button on the
feature bar to access the rear
passenger climate control screen.
Rear Passenger Climate Control Screen
E283809
169
Climate Control
Selecting a Row
Press 2nd Row to control the second row
climate.
Press 3rd Row to control the third row
climate.
Linking the Rows
E282078
Press the button to simultaneously
control the climate of the second
and third row.
Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed
Press the arrow buttons to adjust
the volume of air circulated in the
rear passenger compartment.
Setting the Rear Temperature
Press the arrow buttons to set the
temperature in the rear passenger
compartment.
Switching the Rear Climate Control On
and Off
Press the button to switch the
selected row controls on or off.
Note: When linked, touch the button to
switch both rows on or off.
Directing Air to the Overhead and Rear
Footwell Air Vents
Press the button to activate the
selection screen.
E244097
Press the button to direct airflow
to the overhead air vents.
Press the button to direct airflow
to the rear footwell air vents.
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off
Press AUTO switch on rear automatic
operation, then set the temperature.
Rear Climate Control Lock Message
A message displays when the controls are
locked through the front and you try to
operate them.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE
CONTROLS - VEHICLES WITH:
TRIPLE ZONE AUTOMATIC
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Use the rear passenger touchscreen to
select the following:
E283811
Press the climate button on the
feature bar to access the rear
passenger climate control screen.
170
Climate Control
Rear Passenger Climate Control Screen
E368025
E368025
Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed
Press the arrow buttons to adjust
the volume of air circulated in the
rear passenger compartment.
Setting the Rear Temperature
Press the arrow buttons to set the
temperature in the rear passenger
compartment.
Switching the Rear Climate Control On
and Off
Press the button to switch the
controls on or off.
Directing Air to the Overhead and Rear
Footwell Air Vents
Press the button to activate the
selection screen.
E244097
Press the button to direct airflow
to the overhead air vents.
Press the button to direct airflow
to the rear footwell air vents.
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off
Press AUTO switch on rear automatic
operation, then set the temperature.
Rear Climate Control Lock Message
A message displays when the controls are
locked through the front and you try to
operate them.
HEATED REAR WINDOW
E184884
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off after
a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window. The vehicle warranty may not
cover damage to the heated rear window
grid lines.
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused to the mirror housing or glass.
171
Climate Control
REMOTE START
The climate control system adjusts the
interior temperature during remote start.
You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the touchscreen.
See Settings (page 555).
You cannot adjust the climate control setting
during remote start operation. Switch the
ignition on to make adjustments.
Based on your remote start settings, the
following vehicle-dependent features may
or may not remain on after remote starting
your vehicle:
• Climate controlled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
• Windshield wiper de-icer.
Note: For dual zone climate controlled seats,
the passenger seat setting defaults to match
the driver seat during remote start.
Automatic Settings
If Auto is on, the system sets the interior
temperature to 72°F (22°C) and heats or
cools the vehicle interior as required to
achieve comfort.
Note: In cold weather, the heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.
Last Settings
If Last Settings is on, the system uses the
settings last selected before you turned off
the vehicle.
Heated and Cooled Features
In Auto mode, certain heated features may
switch on during cold weather, and cooled
features during hot weather.
172
Climate Control
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of air
in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen and
other particles.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 579).
The cabin air filter is behind the glove
compartment.
To remove the lower glove compartment and
access the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment.
E31
E31
E31
E
1296
1296
12
2. Press the tab on each side.
3. Fully lower the glove compartment.
4. Pull the glove compartment toward you.
WHAT IS AUTO AIR REFRESH (IF
EQUIPPED)
Auto Air Refresh helps improve or maintain
the quality of air within your vehicle cabin.
HOW DOES AUTO AIR REFRESH
WORK (IF EQUIPPED)
Auto Air Refresh uses an outside gases
sensor to automatically adjust the climate
control system to change from outside air to
recirculated air to help reduce the entry of
outside odors into the cabin. It uses a
particulate matter sensor in the cabin to
estimate and provide information about
particulate matter pollution in the cabin. It
also allows you to refresh the cabin air with
outside air on-demand or automatically.
CHECKING THE INTERIOR AIR
QUALITY
(IF EQUIPPED)
E283817
Press the button on touchscreen
feature bar to see current cabin
PM2.5 information.
Note: You can also press the menu button
on the climate control unit and then press
PM2.5 on the touchscreen.
Press Cabin Air History to see a recent
history of average PM2.5 in the cabin.
173
Interior Air Quality
Particulate Matter Pollution
Information
PM2.5 is particulate patter pollution smaller
than 2.5 microns in size in the air.
PM2.5 particles can include cigarette smoke,
road level pollution, industrial pollution, and
some allergens.
The numbers provided by the cabin PM2.5
sensor are estimates of the concentrations
of particles in the cabin air. The
measurement unit is μg/m3, representing
mass (micrograms of particulates) per unit of
air volume (cubic meter of air).
The colors around the PM2.5 numbers
provide visual cues about the concentration
levels.
Note: PM2.5 is only one pollution type
contributing to an Air Quality Index and by
itself does not represent the Air Quality
Index.
AUTO AIR REFRESH INDICATORS
(IF EQUIPPED)
The indicator area is on the touchscreen
feature bar and displays one of the following:
E324585
Indicates blower motor is on for
filtering and PM2.5 is low.
E283817
Indicates the blower motor is on
for filtering.
E324586
Indicates the blower motor is off.
E324587
Indicates the status is not available.
REFRESHING THE INTERIOR AIR
MANUALLY REFRESHING THE
INTERIOR AIR (If Equipped)
1. Press MENU on the climate control unit.
2. Press Cabin Refresh on the touchscreen.
Note: Climate control settings could change
for about 90 seconds to help flow outside
air into the cabin. You can change the
blower motor speed to the settings you
prefer.
AUTOMATICALLY REFRESHING THE
INTERIOR AIR (If Equipped)
If the cabin air recirculates continuously for
longer than 35 minutes, climate control
settings could change automatically for about
90 seconds to help flow outside air into the
cabin.
Refreshing the Interior Air Upon Start
If the cabin is above a certain high
temperature while parked for over 30
minutes, when you start the engine the
climate control system settings could change
for approximately 60 seconds to help flow
outside air into the cabin.
Note: The system is not designed to cool the
interior air temperature.
174
Interior Air Quality
AUTO AIR REFRESH HINTS (IF
EQUIPPED)
To further improve the quality of air in the
cabin:
• Adjust the windows and other cabin
openings such as the moonroof.
• Switch recirculated air on or off.
• Manually refresh the interior air.
• Adjust the blower motor speed.
• Replace the cabin air filter at regular
intervals.
INTERIOR AIR QUALITY –
TROUBLESHOOTING
INTERIOR AIR QUALITY –
INFORMATION MESSAGES
(If Equipped)
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
not all messages display or are available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
ActionMessage
Allow time for the cabin PM2.5 sensor to cool down, warm up, or dry
out.
Environmental Limit
Allow a few seconds for the cabin PM2.5 sensor to start up.Initializing
175
Interior Air Quality
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seatback reclined too
far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat
backrest too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in personal injury in the event of
a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death in the event of
a sudden stop or crash.
E
68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, seatbelt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30 degrees from
the upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt
over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
176
Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it should
be installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Adjusting the Head Restraints
Front Seat Head Restraints
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold the C button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold the C and D buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Tilting Head Restraints
The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort.
To tilt the head restraint, do the following:
177
Seats
E14472
7
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the position you prefer.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
Second Row Center Seat Head Restraint
(If Equipped)
E286400
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
buttons.
C
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold the C buttons.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Second Row Outermost Seat Head
Restraints
E33
33
3
2
2
253
E
33
33
3
2
2
2
2
253
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
253
2
2
2
253
2
253
3
2
253
2
3
253
3
2
253
3
3
2
253
53
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
178
Seats
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold the C buttons.
2. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Third Row Seat Head Restraints
E286397
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Fold strap.C
Folding the Head Restraint
Pull the fold strap (C). Pull the head restraint
back up to reset.
Power Front Head Restraints (If equipped)
E22228
0
To raise the head restraint, lift the switch up
until you reach a comfortable height.
To lower the head restraint, press the switch
down.
To move the head restraint forward, push
the switch forward until you reach the
desired position.
To move the head restraint rearward, push
the switch rearward.
POWER SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of
your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
10-Way and 12-Way Seat Controls
The power seat controls are on the door.
179
Seats
E285258
Recline.A
Lumbar control.B
Memory function.C
Seat adjust (forward, backward,
height and tilt).
D
E285278
Press this button to access the
lumbar menu on the touchscreen.
180
Seats
E285488
30-Way Seat Controls
The power seat controls are on the door.
181
Seats
E282855
Head restraint.A
Lumbar support.B
Memory function.C
Independent leg and thigh seat
extensions.
D
Seat adjust (forward, backward,
height and tilt).
E
Upper seat backrest.F
Recline.G
E285278
Press this button to access the
lumbar menu on the touchscreen.
182
Seats
E254489
183
Seats
Adjusting the Length of the Seat Cushion
E285685
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front
Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seat backrest and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.
You can adjust this feature through the
touchscreen. See SYNC™ 3 (page 507).
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
This feature recalls the position of the
following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power steering column.
The memory control is on the driver door.
E283882
Saving a Preset Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to the
positions you prefer.
3. Press and hold the preferred preset
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
184
Seats
Recalling a Preset Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your preferred driving
position. The memory features move to the
position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or when the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N) and
the vehicle is not moving if the ignition is on.
You can also recall a preset memory position
by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
remote control if it is linked to a preset
position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked remote control is
present.
• Recalling a personal profile in your SYNC
3 menu.
Note: Using a linked remote control to recall
your memory position when the ignition is
off moves the seat to the easy entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control, or any memory button
during a memory recall, cancels the
operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit feature,
it moves the driver seat position rearward up
to 2 in (5 cm) when you switch the ignition
off.
The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the touchscreen. See Settings
(page 555).
Personal Profiles
This feature allows you to create multiple
personal profiles enabling users to
personalize vehicle’s settings. You can
create one profile for each preset memory
seat button along with a guest profile. You
can recall a profile using SYNC 3 or the
preset button you selected when you created
your profile. You can also link a remote
control and a mobile device to your profile,
which are used to recall it.
Creating a Personal Profile
Use the SYNC display to create a personal
profile.
1. Switch the ignition on and leave the
vehicle in park (P).
2. Select the Personal Profiles button under
Settings.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
185
Seats
Linking a Personal Profile to Your Remote
Control or Mobile Device
You can save preset memory positions for
up to three remote controls, by assigning a
remote control to a personal profile in your
SYNC 3. You can assign three additional
remote controls set up as Phone as a Key.
See Keys and Remote Controls (page 68).
Use the SYNC display to link a remote
control, mobile device or both to a personal
profile.
1. Switch the ignition on and leave the
vehicle in park (P).
2. Select the Personal Profiles button under
Settings.
3. Touch the arrow for the profile you wish
to link to a remote control or mobile
device.
4. Select the correct button to link a remote
control, mobile device, or both.
5. Follow the instructions on the display.
Note: To successfully link a mobile device,
the mobile device must be present in your
vehicle, and must have previously been
setup as a remote control for your vehicle.
Note: If more than one linked remote control
is in range, the memory function moves to
the settings of the first key to initiate a
memory recall.
Note: The guest profile consists of existing
settings when there is no driver profile
created. After you create a driver profile, the
guest profile serves as an additional driver
profile.
Note: You cannot link a personalized name,
a memory seat button or a remote control
to a guest profile.
Personal Settings
Personal Profiles allow you to personalize
positional settings such as seats and mirrors,
as well as non-positional settings such as
radio, navigation, driver assist and system
settings. See SYNC™ 3 (page 507). You
cannot change the menu locations and
settings of those personalized features with
Personal Profiles.
Note: Non-positional settings are saved to
the active driver profile whenever you
change a setting.
Note: You can save positional settings if you
press and hold a memory seat button.
Recalling and Changing a Profile
You can recall a profile by:
• Using a remote control or mobile device
that has been linked to a driver profile to
access the remote start feature, press an
unlock button or open the door with the
exterior door handle.
• Pressing a memory seat button that has
been linked to a driver profile.
• Using the Personal Profiles menu on the
SYNC touchscreen.
Note: The recalled profile replaces the
previously active profile. If the active profile
is not your preferred profile, you can change
it using any of the three methods listed.
186
Seats
When you switch on the Personal Profiles
feature:
• Unlocking a door with a remote control
or mobile device that is not linked to a
driver profile does not change the active
profile, but remains the last known
profile. It will not change the positional
settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is
not linked to a driver profile or has not
been saved to a preset setting does not
change active profile, but remains in the
last known profile. It will not change the
positional settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is
not linked to a driver profile but has been
saved to a preset setting does not recall
any non-positional settings, but recalls
the positional settings that you saved to
that memory seat button.
See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting (page 557).
When you switch off a Personal Profiles
feature:
• Unlocking a door with a remote control
or mobile device does not recall any
non-positional settings, but still recalls
positional settings from the driver profile
which the remote control or mobile
device had been linked to.
• Pressing a memory seat button that has
not been linked to a driver profile or has
not been saved to a preset setting does
not recall any settings, positional or
non-positional.
• Pressing a memory seat button that has
been linked to a driver profile or has
saved to a preset setting does not recall
any non-positional settings, but recalls
the positional settings that you saved to
that memory seat button.
REAR SEATS
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat
backrest too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in personal injury in the event of
a crash.
Adjusting the Second Row Outermost
Seats Backrest
E281809
187
Seats
Lift the handle and adjust the seat backrest
rearward or forward.
Folding the Second Row Outermost
Seats Flat
E281813
Lift the handle and fold the seat backrest
forward until it is flat.
Adjusting the Second Row Seats for
Easy Entry
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
with a seat that is unlatched or in the
folded position. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or
release a seat floor latch when the vehicle
is moving. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death in
a sudden stop or crash.
Note: You may have to move the front row
seat forward to allow the second row seat
to be fully folded.
Note: You can move the second row
outermost seats forward to allow access to
the third row seats.
This feature allows for easier entry and exit
to and from the third row seat.
Folding the Second Row Center Seat
E281821
Pull the strap to fold the seat backrest flat.
To return the seat to the upright position,
rotate the seat backrest until it locks.
188
Seats
To recline the seat backrest, pull the strap
and adjust the seat backrest rearward or
forward.
Adjusting the Second Row Outermost Seats
E286395
Lift the handle to move the seat forward or
rearward.
Adjusting the Second Row Seats with
Power Easy Entry
WARNING: Do not fold a seat if it is
occupied. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
The easy entry seat allows for easier entry
and exit to and from the third row seat.
E281819
Press the button on top of the second row
seat backrest to move the seat forward. This
provides access to the third row.
E281818
1. Push the seat forward.
2. To return the seat to the seating position,
push the seat backrest rearward until it
latches.
189
Seats
Adjusting the Third Row Power Seats
WARNING: Do not fold a seat if it is
occupied. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
with a seat that is unlatched or in the
folded position. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
Note: The power rear seat functions disable
10 minutes after you switch the ignition off.
The transmission must be in park (P) and the
liftgate must be open to operate the seats.
The control buttons are inside the liftgate
area.
E251776
Press to fold the left-hand third row
seat.
A
Press to fold and unfold both third
row seats.
B
Press to fold the right-hand third
row seat.
C
To return the third-row seat backrest to the
original position, press the corresponding
control again.
If the seats are inoperable, do the following:
1. Make sure that the engine is running and
the tailgate is open.
2. Make sure that there are no objects on
the seats that would prevent them from
folding completely.
3. Press and hold button B for one minute
until both seats completely fold and
unfold.
4. Press button A and button C to confirm
each seat is operational.
Note: During this procedure, the seat may
appear to be fully unfolded. Continue holding
the switch for a few seconds.
If the power rear seat disables after 10
minutes, you can enable the seat by:
• Opening any door.
• Pressing the unlock button on the key
fob.
190
Seats
• Pressing any keyless entry keypad
button.
• Switching the ignition on.
HEATED SEATS
WARNING: Use caution when using
the heated seat if you are unable to feel
pain to your skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
or other physical conditions. The heated
seat could cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp
objects into the seat cushion or seat
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything on
the seat that blocks the heat, for example
a seat cover or a cushion. This could cause
the seat to overheat. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
Front Seats
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.
E146
3
2
2
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Note: The heated seats switch on during a
remote start if they are enabled.
Note: The heated seats may switch on when
you start your vehicle if they were on when
you previously switched your vehicle off.
Automatic Climate Controlled Seats (If
Equipped)
When you switch on the auto setting, the
seats switch between the heated seats and
ventilated seats to match your climate control
setting.
Second Row Heated Seats
The heated seat controls are on the rear of
the center console.
191
Seats
VENTILATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Do not do the following:
• Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
• Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.
The engine must be running to use this
feature.
E224
689
Press this symbol to cycle through the
various ventilation settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
Note: The ventilated seats switch on during
a remote start if they are enabled.
Note: The ventilated seats may switch on
when you start your vehicle if they were on
when you previously switched your vehicle
off.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM when the
ventilated seats are on, the system turns off.
You need to switch it back on.
Note: To improve comfort, use the ventilated
seats along with the vehicle’s air
conditioning system.
Automatic Climate Controlled Seats (If
Equipped)
When you switch on the auto setting, the
seats switch between the heated seats and
ventilated seats to match your climate control
setting.
192
Seats
WHAT IS THE REAR OCCUPANT
ALERT SYSTEM
The rear occupant alert system monitors
vehicle conditions and notifies you to check
for rear seat occupants when you switch the
ignition off.
HOW DOES THE REAR OCCUPANT
ALERT SYSTEM WORK
The system monitors when rear doors have
been opened and closed to indicate the
potential presence of an occupant in the rear
seat.
A message displays in the information and
entertainment display screen and an audible
warning sounds when you switch the ignition
off after any of the following conditions have
been met:
• A rear door is opened or closed while
the ignition is on.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of a rear door opening and
closing.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of the alert having displayed or
sounded.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or animals
to these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
The system does not detect the presence of
objects or passengers in the rear seat. It
monitors when rear doors are opened and
closed.
Note: It is possible to receive an alert when
there is no rear seat occupant, but alert
conditions are met.
Note: It is possible to receive no alert when
there is an occupant in the rear seat, if alert
conditions are not met. For example, if a rear
seat occupant does not enter the vehicle
through a rear door.
Note: The audible warning does not sound
when the front door is opened before you
switch the ignition off.
193
Rear Occupant Alert System
SWITCHING REAR OCCUPANT
ALERT SYSTEM ON AND OFF
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off.
Note: The default setting is on.
Note: Performing a master reset causes the
system to switch on again.
Semiannual Reminder (If Equipped)
When you switch the system off, a message
appears every six months as a reminder that
the system is off. You can switch the system
back on or leave it off.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
INDICATORS
E350472
E350472
Message
Check rear seats for occupants.
Displays when you switch your vehicle off
after the alert conditions are met.
The message displays for a short period of
time. Press Close to acknowledge and
remove the message.
Note: Depending on your SYNC version, the
graphic may look different from what you
see here.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Sounds when you switch your vehicle off
after the alert conditions are met.
The warning sounds for a short period of
time.
194
Rear Occupant Alert System
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
INTRODUCTION
HomeLink Wireless Control System
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common handheld garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter integrated
into the driver-side sun visor.
E18821
E18821
1
1
How Does The Garage Door Opener
Work
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
You can program garage doors as well as
entry gate operators, security systems, entry
door locks and home or office lighting.
Additional assistance can be found online at
www
.homelink.com/Ford or by calling the
toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515.
Garage Door Opener Limitations
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time out, or quit, after
several seconds – which may not be long
enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal.
U.S. gate operators time-out in the same
manner.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
PRECAUTIONS AND
FREQUENCIES
Garage Door Opener Precautions
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse feature
as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
195
Garage Door Opener
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. End Users must follow the
specific operating instructions for satisfying
RF exposure compliance. This transmitter
must be at least 8 in (20 cm) from the user
and must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER
To clear all stored codes in the garage door
opener in your vehicle, use the clear
function. To override one button, use the
reprogram function.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
Clearing the Garage Door Opener
E188213
E188213
To clear all stored codes in the garage door
opener in the vehicle:
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
10 seconds until the indicator above the
buttons flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator flashes, release the
buttons.
Note: This clears all stored codes. You
cannot erase individual buttons.
196
Garage Door Opener
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after they have been initially
programmed, you must either clear all codes,
or reprogram each individual button.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons.
Reprogramming the Garage Door
Opener
If a button on your garage door opener has
already been programmed, you can override
it. To program a device to a previously
trained button:
1. Press and hold the desired button for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator begins to flash.
2. Without releasing the button, proceed to
Step 3 of Programming the Garage Door
Opener to your Handheld Transmitter.
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to your Handheld Transmitter
Note: The programming steps below assume
you are programming a HomeLink that was
not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to clear or reprogram your
HomeLink buttons.
Note: Put a new battery in the handheld
transmitter. This allows for quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
E188213
E188213
To program your in-vehicle HomeLink
function button with your handheld
transmitter:
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your vehicle on, but do
not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release one of the three
HomeLink function buttons that you
would like to program.
Note: The indicator should begin to flash. If
the indicator does not flash, press and hold
the function button for 20 seconds until the
indicator begins to flash.
197
Garage Door Opener
3. Hold your handheld garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
4. Press and hold the handheld transmitter
button you want to program while
watching the indicator on HomeLink.
Continue to hold the handheld button
until the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator stays on, the
programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 5.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
you must program your garage door.
6. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1–4.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to your Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
E142
659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E188212
E188212
3. Press and hold one of the three
HomeLink function buttons you want to
program for two seconds, then release.
4. Repeat Step 3. Depending on your brand
of garage door opener, you may need to
repeat this sequence a third time.
Additional assistance can be found online at
www
.homelink.com/Ford or by calling the
toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515.
198
Garage Door Opener
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to your Gate Opener Motor
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised that you
unplug the device during the cycling process
to prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release your handheld
transmitter, every two seconds, until the
HomeLink indicator flashes rapidly or is
continuously on.
2. Release the handheld transmitter button.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink function
button you want to program for two
seconds, then release. You may need to
do this twice to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator stays on, the
programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 3.
4. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1–4.
Additional assistance can be found online at
www
.homelink.com/Ford or by calling the
toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515.
199
Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter
can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or
serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
Note: If the power supply does not work after
you switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory
plug into the power point. This damages the
power point and may blow the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
USB Port and Power Point Locations
USB Ports and Power Points may be in the
following locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the first row center console.
• Inside the second row center console.
• On the front of the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.
• On the passenger side floor panel.
• 3rd row on the quarter trim panels.
Note: Some of the USB ports may not have
data transfer capabilities.
Note: Incorrect use of the USB ports can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
110 Volt AC Power Point
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due to
powering multiple devices that can reach
beyond the 150 watt load limit and could
result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point turns off when you
switch off the ignition, when the vehicle is
not in accessory mode or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
200
Auxiliary Power Points
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on
the rear of the center console.
E247586
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is ON or the vehicle is in
accessory mode.
• Off: The power point is OFF, the ignition
is OFF or the vehicle is not in accessory
mode.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
Due to the different technologies used on
its construction, some devices may exceed
the capacity shown on its label when they
are initially plugged-in.
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on,
but do not plug your device back in. Let the
system cool off and switch the ignition off to
reset the fault mode. Switch the ignition back
on and make sure the indicator light remains
on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical equipment
or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
201
Auxiliary Power Points
WHAT IS THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
The wireless accessory charger allows you
to charge one compatible Qi wireless
charging device on the charging area.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Wireless charging
devices can affect the operation of
implanted medical devices, including
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we recommend
that you consult with your physician.
Keep the charging area clean and remove
foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip or
radio-frequency identification chip, for
example passports, parking tickets,
transportation passes or credit cards, near
the charging area when charging a device.
Damage could occur to the magnetic strip
or radio-frequency identification chip.
Do not place metal objects, for example
remote controls, coins and candy wrappers,
on or near the charging area when charging
a device. Metal objects may heat up and
degrade the charging performance, in
addition to causing interruptions in charging.
Charging could be interrupted, degraded, or
could stop if any of the following occur:
• The system detects a foreign object.
• The device is misaligned on the charging
area.
• The device moves on the active charging
area when the vehicle is in motion.
• The vehicle ambient temperature is too
high.
• You attempt to charge a non-Qi
compatible device on the wireless
charger.
Note: During charging, the device and the
charger could heat up, this is normal. If the
battery gets hotter than usual, the device
may stop charging.
LOCATING THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
E297549
The charging area is on the center
console or in the media bin below
the instrument panel.
CHARGING A WIRELESS DEVICE
Place the device on the center of the
charging surface with the charging side
down. The charging stops after your device
reaches a full charge.
You can use the charger when the vehicle
is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is
running, or when SYNC is on.
Displays on the status bar when
wireless charging is in progress.
202
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
Note: The charging performance may be
affected if your device is in a case. It may be
necessary to remove the case to wirelessly
charge your device.
Note: Software and firmware updates may
affect device compatibility, including the use
of unofficial software or firmware. You should
verify charging functionality with your
specific devices in-vehicle.
203
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E307323
E307323
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
204
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 6 mi (10 km)
after you reconnect it. This is because the
engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can disregard any
unusual driving characteristics during this
period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The system may not function if the
remote control is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a
cell phone.
Note: A valid remote control must be located
inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Ignition Modes
E144447
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
205
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when your
vehicle is running but is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational and
the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once.
Start: Starts your vehicle. The engine may
not start when your vehicle starts.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when the ignition is on and when your
vehicle starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears
in the information display alerting you that
you exceeded the cranking time. You
cannot attempt to start the engine for at
least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are
limited to a 15-second engine cranking time.
You need to wait 60 minutes before you can
crank the engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park (P).
• Switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the
following:
206
Starting and Stopping the Engine
E2
9
7
3
7
8
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. With the buttons facing upward and the
unlock button facing the front of your
vehicle, place the passive key into the
backup slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching
it off, even if it does not detect a valid
passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the push
button ignition switch. After 20 seconds, you
can no longer start your vehicle if it does not
detect a valid passive key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. You cannot start your
vehicle if the system does not detect a valid
passive key within 20 seconds.
Vehicles using Phone as a Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your Phone as a Key
in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The Bluetooth enabled phone
frequencies are jammed.
• The Phone as a Key battery is low or fully
discharged.
Phone as a Key Backup Starting
Passcode
Note: In order to use the Backup Start
Passcode feature, Phone as a Key must be
active and enabled on at least one phone.
207
Starting and Stopping the Engine
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the
following:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. SYNC displays the Backup Starting
Passcode entry screen.
3. Using the SYNC display enter the backup
password and select Enter within 30
seconds.
4. SYNC displays messages to start the
vehicle.
5. Fully depress the brake pedal and press
the start button within 20 seconds to start
the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
This feature shuts down the engine if it has
been idling for an extended period. The
ignition also turns off in order to save battery
power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a
message appears in the information display
showing a timer counting down from 30
seconds. If you do not intervene within 30
seconds, your vehicle shuts down. Another
message appears in the information display
to inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.
Note: Automatic Engine Shutdown may be
more frequent for hybrid vehicles.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the
automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on for the current ignition cycle only. Use
the vehicle settings on your touchscreen
to turn 30min Max Idle on or off.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the feature
off for the current ignition cycle only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
208
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine shut down.
Vehicles using Phone as a Key
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine shut down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the engine
when your vehicle is still moving results in
a significant decrease in braking
assistance. Higher effort is required to
apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle.
A significant decrease in steering
assistance could also occur. The steering
does not lock, but higher effort could be
required to steer your vehicle. When you
switch the ignition off, some electrical
circuits, for example airbags, also turn off.
If you unintentionally switch the ignition
off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the
engine.
1. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within two
seconds.
2. Put the transmission into neutral (N) and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
3. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P).
4. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles using Phone as a Key
1. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within two
seconds.
2. Put the transmission into neutral (N) and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
3. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P).
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
209
Starting and Stopping the Engine
STARTING A HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE SYSTEM
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants fasten their
seatbelt.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Put the transmission in park (P).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The green ready indicator illuminates
letting you know that your vehicle is ready
for driving. Since your vehicle comes with a
silent key start, the engine may not start
when your vehicle starts. See Hybrid
Vehicle Operation (page 217).
When the engine starts for the first time on
your drive, the idle speed increases, this
helps to warm up the engine. If the engine
idle speed does not slow down automatically,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the
following:
E2
9
7
3
7
8
210
Starting and Stopping the Engine
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. With the buttons facing upward and the
unlock button facing the front of your
vehicle, place the passive key into the
backup slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching
it off, even if it does not detect a valid
passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching your vehicle
off, press the brake pedal and press the push
button ignition switch. After 20 seconds, you
can no longer start your vehicle if it does not
detect a valid passive key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. You cannot start your
vehicle if the system does not detect a valid
passive key within 20 seconds.
Vehicles Using Phone as a Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your Phone as a Key
in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The bluetooth enabled phone
frequencies are jammed.
• The Phone as a Key battery is low or fully
discharged.
Phone as a Key Backup Starting
Passcode
Note: In order to use the Backup Start
Passcode feature, Phone as a Key must be
active and enabled on at least one phone.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the
following:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. SYNC displays the Backup Starting
Passcode entry screen.
3. Using the SYNC display enter the backup
password and select Enter within 30
seconds.
4. SYNC displays messages to start the
vehicle.
5. Fully depress the brake pedal and press
the start button within 20 seconds to start
the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the engine
if it has been idling for an extended period.
The ignition also turns off in order to save
battery power. Before your vehicle shuts
down, a message appears in the information
display showing a timer counting down from
211
Starting and Stopping the Engine
30 seconds. If you do not intervene within
30 seconds, your vehicle shuts down.
Another message appears in the information
display to inform you that your vehicle has
shut down to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
you normally do.
Note: Automatic Engine Shutdown may be
more frequent for hybrid vehicles.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 136). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the feature
off for the current ignition cycle only.
Switching Off Your Vehicle When It Is
Stationary
1. Put the transmission in park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch
once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, warning
lamps and indicators.
Vehicles Using Phone as a Key
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators turn off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
Switching Off Your Vehicle When It Is
Moving
WARNING: Switching off the engine
when your vehicle is still moving results in
a significant decrease in braking
assistance. Higher effort is required to
apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle.
A significant decrease in steering
assistance could also occur. The steering
does not lock, but higher effort could be
212
Starting and Stopping the Engine
required to steer your vehicle. When you
switch the ignition off, some electrical
circuits, for example airbags, also turn off.
If you unintentionally switch the ignition
off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the
engine.
1. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within two
seconds.
2. Put the transmission into neutral (N) and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
3. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P).
4. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles Using Phone as a Key
1. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within two
seconds.
2. Put the transmission into neutral (N) and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
3. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P).
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods of time, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block
heater. This could damage the power cable
and may cause an electrical short resulting
in fire, injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
213
Starting and Stopping the Engine
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
The engine block heater receptacle terminals
are located on the left side of the engine
compartment.
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
214
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP - EXCLUDING:
PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE (PHEV)
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically stopping and restarting the
engine when your vehicle has stopped. The
engine restarts automatically when you
release the brake pedal.
In some situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
• To maintain interior comfort.
• To recharge the battery.
Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine is off.
Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable,
Auto-Start-Stop will be inhibited for a short
time after a refuel event while the system is
verifying the fuel type being used.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P), switch the ignition off
and remove the key before you leave your
vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P), switch the ignition off
and remove the key before you open the
hood or have any service or repair work
completed. If you do not switch the ignition
off, the engine could restart at any time.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may require
the engine to automatically restart when
the auto-start-stop indicator illuminates
green or flashes amber. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
The Auto-Start-Stop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
136).
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop
The system automatically enables every time
you start your vehicle if:
• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed of
3 mph (5 km/h) after you have initially
started your vehicle.
• You have stopped your vehicle.
• Your foot is on the brake pedal.
• The driver door is closed.
• The interior compartment has cooled or
warmed to an acceptable level.
• The front windshield defroster is off.
• You have not turned the steering wheel
rapidly or you do not have it at a sharp
angle.
• The vehicle is not on a steep road grade.
• The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
• The engine coolant is near operating
temperature.
• Elevation is below about 12,000 ft
(3,650 m).
• Ambient temperature is moderate.
215
Unique Driving Characteristics
• The trailer is not connected.
• If you select Normal, Conserve, or
Slippery.
• You are not in 4H or 4L.
• You have not selected Manual shift
mode.
• Hill descent control is not active.
• You have not selected Tow haul, Excite,
Deep, or Slow Climb.
Note: When in Excite mode, Start/Stop can
be enabled by pressing the Auto-Start-Stop
button.
E121
3
7
7
The green Auto-Start-Stop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
E146361
If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light, it
illuminates when automatic engine stop is
not available due to one of the above noted
conditions not being met.
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result in
an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have removed your foot from the
brake pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
• You press the accelerator and the brake
pedal at the same time.
• The driver safety belt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
• Your vehicle is moving.
• The interior compartment does not meet
customer comfort when air conditioning
or heat is on.
• Fogging of the windows could occur and
the air conditioning is on.
• The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
• You have exceeded the maximum engine
off time.
• When you press the Auto-Start-Stop
button with the engine automatically
stopped.
• The front defroster is turned to the Max
setting.
• When you shift into park (P), the engine
will restart.
Any of the following conditions may result in
an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have increased the blower fan speed
or changed the climate control
temperature.
• You have an electrical accessory turned
on or plugged in.
Note: You may notice that the climate seat
fan fluctuates during an automatic restart.
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop
E287975
Press the button on the instrument
panel to access the
Auto-Start-Stop feature on the
touchscreen. Use the touchscreen to
deactivate the feature.
Deactivating the feature lasts only 1 key
cycle. Use the touchscreen to restore
Auto-Start-Stop function.
216
Unique Driving Characteristics
Note: If the Shift to park (P), Restart Engine
message appears and the amber
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light flashes in the
instrument cluster. This indicates automatic
restart is unavailable. You must restart the
vehicle manually. See Information Displays
(page 136).
If your vehicle is in an engine off
Auto-Start-Stop, shifting from drive (D) to
reverse (R) will not cause a restart if you do
not press the brake pedal. The message
Auto-Start-Stop Press Brake to Start Engine
appears. You must press the brake pedal
within 60 seconds or the system requires
you to shift into park (P) and manually restart
your vehicle.
HYBRID VEHICLE OPERATION
This hybrid vehicle combines electric and
gasoline propulsion to provide breakthrough
performance and improved efficiency.
Familiarizing yourself with these unique
characteristics provides an optimal driving
experience from your vehicle.
Starting
E293827
When you start your vehicle, a
green READY indicator light
appears in the instrument cluster
letting you know that your vehicle is ready
for driving.
The engine may not start because your
vehicle has a silent key start feature. This
fuel saving feature allows your vehicle to be
ready to drive without requiring the gas
engine to be running. The indicator remains
on when your vehicle is on, whether the
engine is running or not, to indicate your
vehicle is capable of movement using the
electric motor, gas engine or both. Typically,
the engine does not start unless the vehicle
is cold, a climate control change is requested
or you press the accelerator pedal.
Driving
The gas engine automatically starts and
stops to provide power when needed and
to save fuel when not needed. When
coasting at low speeds, coming to a stop, or
standing, the gas engine normally shuts
down and your vehicle operates in
electric-only mode.
Conditions that may cause the engine to start
up or remain running include:
• Considerable vehicle acceleration.
• Climbing a hill.
• Charge level of high voltage battery is
low.
• High or low outside temperatures in
order to provide system heating or
cooling.
• Engine not warm enough to provide
passenger requested cabin temperature.
• Towing a trailer.
217
Unique Driving Characteristics
• Selectable drive modes: Certain
selectable drive modes may cause the
engine to run. See What Is Drive Mode
Control (page 343).
• Live in Drive: Use of the paddle shifters
while in drive (D) may cause the engine
to run. See Automatic Transmission
(page 259).
Stopping
The gas engine may shut off to conserve fuel
as you come to a stop. Restarting your
vehicle is not required. Simply step on the
accelerator when you are ready to drive.
Transmission Operation
The engine and electric motor together
propel the vehicle through the automatic
transmission. This is normal hybrid operating
and helps deliver fuel efficiency and
performance.
Battery
Your hybrid is equipped with a high voltage
battery. A cool battery maintains battery life
and provides the best possible performance.
The high voltage battery is cooled by the
vehicle's air conditioning system. When the
air conditioning system is on, you may notice
a slight increase in air temperature coming
from the climate control vents while the
battery is cooling. You may also notice cool
air flowing from the vents when the air
conditioning or blower is off.
Braking
Your hybrid is equipped with standard
hydraulic braking and regenerative braking.
Regenerative braking is performed by your
transmission and it captures brake energy
and stores it in the high voltage battery.
You may also notice during extending
downhill driving that your engine continues
to run instead of shutting off. During this
engine braking, the engine stays on, but it is
not using any fuel. You may also hear a slight
whine or whistle when operating your
vehicle. This is the normal operation of the
electric motor in the hybrid system.
Driving to Optimize Fuel Economy
Note: Having your engine running is not
always an indication of inefficiency. In some
cases, it is actually more efficient than
driving in electric mode.
Your fuel economy should improve
throughout your hybrid's break-in period. As
with any vehicle, your driving habits and
accessory usage can significantly impact
your fuel economy. For best results, keep
these tips in mind:
218
Unique Driving Characteristics
• Keep the tires properly inflated and only
use the recommended size.
• Aggressive driving increases the amount
of energy required to move your vehicle.
In general, you can achieve better fuel
economy with mild to moderate
acceleration and deceleration. Moderate
braking is particularly important since it
allows you to maximize the energy
captured by the regenerative braking
system.
Additional Tips:
• Do not carry extra loads.
• Be mindful of adding external
accessories that may increase
aerodynamic drag.
• Observe posted speed limits.
• Perform all scheduled maintenance.
• There is no need to wait for your engine
to warm up. The vehicle is ready to drive
immediately after starting.
PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE
OPERATION
Regularly plug in your vehicle to get optimal
electric-only range capability from the high
voltage battery. Charging your vehicle adds
electrical energy. This energy propels the
vehicle.
Estimated electric-only driving range shows
in blue next to the gasoline range on the
information display.
The system maximizes the use of
electric-only operation in normal drive mode.
System conditions could require the engine
to operate, however, the system uses the
available electric range whenever possible.
In Pure EV drive mode, your vehicle only
uses electric power unless you enable the
engine, or system conditions require the
engine to operate.
Preserve EV drive mode saves the electric
range for later use. If you select this mode
and the battery is at full or near full charge,
it uses some electric-only range to discharge
the battery. This allows the regenerative
braking system to fully operate. If the battery
charge is low when selecting Preserve EV
mode, the engine charges the high voltage
battery to a minimum level. This provides
additional electric driving range. When the
battery charges to this level, Preserve EV
saves the electric range for later use.
Other drive modes appropriately make use
of electric power to help deliver the selected
drive mode experience. It could use available
electric-only range, if needed. See What Is
Drive Mode Control (page 343).
219
Unique Driving Characteristics
When the electric-only range reaches zero,
the powertrain system switches to hybrid
operation. This means the energy you gain
from plugging in and charging your vehicle
is now gone. Both the gasoline engine and
electric motor power your vehicle and
maximize fuel economy during hybrid
operation. Hybrid operation provides some
electric-only driving as the powertrain system
maintains the high voltage battery charge
level within functional limits.
Low Engine Use
The low engine use mode properly lubricates
the engine at sufficient temperature and
activates when you drive your vehicle with
limited engine operation. When in low engine
use mode, your vehicle runs the engine as
necessary. When low engine use mode
begins, a message appears in the information
display. If low engine use mode does not
complete before you switch your vehicle off,
it continues the next time you start your
vehicle and the message reappears. See
Information Messages (page 142).
Pure EV mode is not available during low
engine use mode.
Note: Cold temperatures affect the engine
warm up time and the low engine use mode
could operate more frequently.
Note: An oil change is not required but gives
you the option of not running a low engine
use cycle. Resetting the oil life monitoring
system suspends the low engine use mode.
220
Unique Driving Characteristics
HYBRID VEHICLE FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
AnswerQuestion
The high voltage battery is electrically isolated from the rest of the
vehicle when the ignition is off. When you switch the ignition on, the
high voltage contacts inside the battery are closed. This makes the
electricity available to the motor and generator and allows your vehicle
to proceed. The clicks are the sound of these contacts as they close
and open during start up and shut down.
What are the series of clicks from the cargo area when I switch the
ignition on?
The vehicle's computer determines if an engine start is required at
key-on. Silent key starts the engine if it is necessary for cabin heating,
windshield defrost, or if the outside temperature is low.
Why does the engine sometimes start at key-on?
There are several reasons the engine stays on for an extended amount
of time when you first start it. One common reason is to make sure
that the emission's components are warm enough to minimize tailpipe
emissions. As the climate gets cooler, this engine-on time is extended.
Why does it take a long time before the engine shuts down?
221
Unique Driving Characteristics
AnswerQuestion
In order to make sure that the climate control system can begin heating
the cabin or defrosting the windshield as soon as you request it, the
engine coolant temperature has to be kept sufficiently hot. Keeping
the engine on is required to maintain the correct coolant temperature.
Why does my engine stay on when it is extremely cold outside?
Your hybrid vehicle can use E15 fuel (15% ethanol, 85% gasoline), but
you could notice slightly reduced fuel economy because ethanol
contains less energy per gallon than gasoline. Your hybrid vehicle is
not designed to use E85 (85% ethanol).
Can I put E15 or E85 in my vehicle, and how will it affect my fuel
economy?
The high voltage battery system is designed to last the life of the
vehicle and requires no maintenance.
How long will my high voltage battery last? Does it need maintenance?
222
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent
injury. If fuel is swallowed immediately
call a physician, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects
of fuel may not be apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive
or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can
cause serious illness and permanent
injury.
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed through
the skin. If you splash fuel on your skin,
clothing or both, promptly remove
contaminated clothing and thoroughly
wash your skin with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact
causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for
the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
fuel vapors could cause an adverse
reaction, serious personal injury or
sickness. Immediately call a physician if
you experience any adverse reactions.
223
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in high
altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
below 87. The use of these fuels could result
in engine damage that is not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well as
other conditions, for example when towing
a trailer. See Towing (page 354).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle
and engine performance. For additional
information, refer to www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel; using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which
is a manganese-based fuel additives impair
engine performance and affect the emission
control system.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is in the spare wheel
storage tray.
224
Fuel and Refueling
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded
fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or
push open the capless fuel system with
foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in
the household refuse or the public sewage
system. Use an authorized waste disposal
facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 224).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
may not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
225
Fuel and Refueling
E1
5
7
452
452
452
52
52
2
2
2
2
2
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING - EXCLUDING: HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
Refueling System Overview
6
8
E2
6
724
8
B
C
A
Fuel filler door.A
Fuel tank filler valve.B
Fuel tank filler pipe.C
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
1
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
A
Right-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
B
226
Fuel and Refueling
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of the
fuel filler door to open it.
C
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of the
fuel filler door to open it.
D
Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel
tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted position
when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off
for the first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five seconds
before removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel
tank.
WARNING: Read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
39 0
E139202
E139
202
227
Fuel and Refueling
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch on the nozzle A. Keep the fuel
pump nozzle resting on the fuel tank filler
pipe.
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position B
when refueling. Holding the fuel pump
nozzle in position A can affect the flow
of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle
before the fuel tank is full.
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the
area shown.
E
1
908
1
9081
6. When the nozzle shuts off, wait at least
5 seconds, then slightly raise the fuel
pump nozzle and slowly remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you have
filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage that
the vehicle Warranty may not cover. See your
authorized dealer immediately.
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully close,
a message could appear in the information
display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
228
Fuel and Refueling
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel
filler funnel provided with your vehicle
into the fuel filler pipe. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 224). This action
should dislodge any debris that may be
preventing the fuel tank filler valve from
fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel filler
funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, see your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
REFUELING - PLUG-IN HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel
tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted position
when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off
for the first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five seconds
before removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel
tank.
WARNING: Read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
1. When you stop your vehicle, shift into
park (P) and switch the ignition off.
229
Fuel and Refueling
E293006
E293006
2. Press the button on the left side of the
instrument panel next to the headlamp
switch to open the fuel filler door. The
fuel filler door can take up to 15 seconds
to open before you can insert a fuel filler
nozzle.
39 0
E139202
E139
202
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting
on the cover of the fuel tank filler pipe
opening.
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position B
when refueling. Holding the fuel pump
nozzle in position A can affect the flow
of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle
before the fuel tank is full.
E
2
069
1
2
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the
area shown.
230
Fuel and Refueling
E
1
908
1
9081
6. When the pump shuts off, wait 5 seconds,
then slowly lift and remove the nozzle.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: To close the fuel filler door, press the
center rear edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
Complete the refueling process within 20
minutes. If 20 minutes elapses, press the
button on the left side of the instrument
panel again. Fuel pump nozzle automatic
shut off could occur if you do not press the
button on the left side instrument panel.
System Warnings
If the fuel filler door fails to open, an
information message appears in the
information display.
231
Fuel and Refueling
ActionMessage
Your vehicle has a sealed fuel
system that may be under
pressure. This information
message appears while the
fuel system is depressurizing
with the fuel filler door closed.
Wait for the fuel system to
depressurize and for the fuel
filler door to unlatch.
Please wait
for fuel
door to
open
This information message
appears when the fuel system
depressurizes and the fuel
filler door opens. Fully open
the fuel filler door to refuel
and fully close the fuel filler
door when refueling is
complete.
Fuel Door
Open
Your vehicle has a sealed fuel
system that requires the fuel
filler door to be fully closed
after refueling. This warning
message appears when the
fuel filler door is ajar. Please
Fuel door
ajar Close
fully to
avoid
""Check
Engine""
ActionMessage
light fully close the fuel filler door
to avoid a "Check Engine"
Light.
If you see this message and
a "Check Engine" lamp illumin-
ates, please fully close the
fuel filler door. The "Check
Engine" Light should clear
within five seconds. If the
"Check Engine" light persists,
please see your dealer.
A warning message appears
in the information display
when the fuel system fails to
depressurize or the fuel filler
door fails to open. You may
have to use the fuel filler door
manual override lever.
Refuel Error
See Manual
If the Refuel Error information message
appears, do the following:
1. Check the fuel filler door for anything that
may be obstructing its movement, for
example ice or snow.
2. Remove any obstruction from the fuel
filler door.
3. Press the button on the left side of the
instrument panel to open the fuel filler
door.
4. If the fuel filler door fails to open and the
Refuel Error message remains in the
information display, use the fuel filler
door manual override lever.
Fuel Filler Door Manual Override Lever
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
Note: The transmission must be in park (P)
or neutral (N).
When using the manual override lever do
the following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
232
Fuel and Refueling
E297793
E297793
Note: The manual override lever is in the
driver side rear wheel well area.
2. Pull the manual override lever.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Complete the refueling process within
20 minutes.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
465).
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an unspecified
amount of fuel that remains in the fuel tank
when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy figures
through the trip computer average fuel
function. See Information Displays (page
136).
The first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving is the
break-in period of the vehicle. Resetting
average fuel in your trip computer after
2,000–3,000 mi (3,200–4,800 km) provides
a more accurate measurement.
Conditions Influencing Fuel Efficiency
See Driving Economically (page 361).
233
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal floor.
Failure to follow these instructions may
result in fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components. Similar
federal or provincial laws may apply in
Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle
modification without first determining
applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions control
systems including related sensors
or the Diesel Exhaust Fluid system
can result in reduced engine power and the
illumination of the service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by any
person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive exhaust
smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
234
Engine Emission Control
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic
conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter
that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you correct
the concern, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
preceding statements concerning prohibited
tampering acts and maintenance, and the
noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide,
are applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue
to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 366).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
235
Engine Emission Control
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service of
components affecting emission control, such
non-Ford parts should be equivalent to
genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the environment
by making sure that your vehicle continues
to meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists a service
technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 229).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city and highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
236
Engine Emission Control
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to
inspect the emission control equipment on
your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
your vehicle may need service.
See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the
ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours with the ignition off. Then, start the
vehicle and complete the above driving
cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its
normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the vehicle until
the above driving cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing,
you need to repeat the above driving cycle.
237
Engine Emission Control
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: This battery pack should
only be serviced by an authorized electric
vehicle technician. Improper handling can
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P), switch the ignition off
and remove the key before you open the
hood or have any service or repair work
completed. If you do not switch the ignition
off, the engine could restart at any time.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not touch the
electronic ignition system parts after you
have switched the ignition on or when the
engine is running. The system operates at
high voltage. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in serious personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Keep your hands and
clothing clear of the engine cooling fan.
Your vehicle consists of various high-voltage
components and wiring. All of the
high-voltage power flows through specific
wiring assemblies labeled as such or covered
with a solid orange convolute, or orange
striped tape, or both. Do not come in contact
with these components.
The high-voltage battery system is a
high-voltage, lithium-ion battery system. The
pack is located underneath the vehicle. The
high voltage battery system uses an
advanced active liquid heating and cooling
system to regulate high voltage battery
temperature and help maximize the life of
the high voltage battery.
Note: The high-voltage battery does not
require regular service maintenance.
CHARGING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
BATTERY - PLUG-IN HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
There are two different style chargers that
could be used for charging your vehicle.
Refer to the illustrations below to identify the
charger, and the instructions for use with the
specific type charger.
Charging Solution One (If Equipped)
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the
dual-voltage charging cord in commercial
garages.
WARNING: This equipment has
arcing or sparking parts. Do not expose to
flammable vapors. Position this equipment
at least 18 in (450 mm) above the floor.
238
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
RISK OF FIRE or ELECTRIC SHOCK
WARNING: The AC wall plug must
fit firmly into the AC outlet. If the
connection feels loose, worn or the AC
outlet is damaged, please have a qualified
electrician replace the AC outlet. Using a
dual-voltage charging cord with a worn
outlet may cause burns, property damage
and increase the risk of electric shock or
fire.
WARNING: Do not use the
dual-voltage charging cord with an
extension cord, two-prong adapter, surge
protector, timer or other adapter. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
electric shock or fire.
WARNING: Do not allow charging
equipment to be immersed in water or
liquids. Failure to follow this warning could
result in fire, electric shock, or serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to open
the charging equipment. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury, fire, electric shock, death or property
damage.
WARNING: Do not use the charging
equipment if it is faulty or has been
damaged. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury, fire, electric
shock, death or property damage.
WARNING: You risk death, fire, or
serious injury to yourself and others if you
do not follow the instruction highlighted
by the warning symbol.
WARNING: Install charging
equipment in compliance with local
regulations. Failure to follow this warning
could result in fire, electric shock, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use an
ungrounded wall outlet. The wall outlet
must be in good condition and meet
up-to-date local codes. Have a qualified
electrician check the wall outlet, if you
suspect that it is not properly grounded.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in electric shock, personal injury, or death.
WARNING: Do not modify the
dual-voltage charging cord plug. If the
dual-voltage charging cord plug does not
properly fit into the wall outlet, have a
qualified electrician install the correct wall
outlet. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury, fire, electric
shock, or death.
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
• Read all the instructions before using this
product.
• Supervise this device when in use around
children.
• Do not put fingers into the electric vehicle
connector.
239
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
• Do not use this product if the flexible
power cord or electric vehicle cable has
broken insulation, or any other signs of
damage.
• Do not use this product if the enclosure
or the electric vehicle connector is
broken, cracked, open, or shows any
other indication of damage.
Note: Ground this product. If it malfunctions
or breaks down, grounding provides a path
of least resistance for electric current to
reduce the risk of electric shock. This product
comes with a cord having an equipment
grounding conductor and a grounding plug.
Make sure you plug it into an appropriate
outlet that is properly installed and grounded
in accordance with all local codes and
ordinances.
Charging Equipment
36655
E
36655
4
Wall Plug.A
Control Box.B
Coupler.C
Your vehicle has a dual-voltage charging
cord in the luggage compartment.
Note: You need to plug the dual-voltage
charging cord into a dedicated outlet.
Note: Firmly fit the AC wall plug into the AC
outlet. If the connection feels loose, worn or
the AC outlet is damaged, please have a
qualified electrician replace the AC outlet.
Using a dual-voltage charging cord with a
worn outlet could cause burns, property
damage and increase the risk of electric
shock.
Note: Do not use the dual-voltage charging
cord with an extension cord, two-prong
adapter, surge protector, timer or other
adapter.
Note: If charging for your plug-in vehicle fails,
please call the Customer Relationship
Center, or click on Call for support or Live
Chat at our website.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE-
Use a three-prong AC outlet that is properly
grounded, 15-20 amps or greater, and in
good condition. Use a dedicated line. You
cannot have other appliances connected to
the same circuit. If you do not use a
dedicated circuit, the circuit breaker could
trip or open. If you do not have a dedicated
circuit, contact a licensed professional
electrician for proper installation.
240
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Note: Make sure the electrical source meets
the requirements for the high-voltage
batteries to charge.
Make sure that the dual-voltage charging
cord is completely unwrapped before
charging. Always plug the cord into the AC
outlet before connecting the charged coupler
into the charge port on your vehicle.
Note: If the power indicator light is off after
plugging in the dual-voltage charging cord
and you cannot determine a charge status,
use a different outlet.
Note: Store the dual-voltage charging cord
in a clean dry place between the
temperature of -40–158°F (-40–70°C)
Note: For further information on the
dual-voltage charging cord, please refer to
the user manual provided with the
dual-voltage charging cord.
Charge Port
The charge port is between the front
left-hand side door and the front left-hand
wheel well. To open, press the center right
edge of the charge port door, and then
release.
E295258
Note: Do not force the charge port door
open or closed. Forcing the door open or
closed damages the charge port.
The charge status indicator around the
charge port indicates the charge status of
the high voltage battery in your vehicle.
Divided into five zones, the charge status
indicator displays the state of charge in 20
percent increments.
We use the color white as a courtesy light to
help with plugging in and to acknowledge
actions such as plugging in, unplugging or
pressing the charge times button.
Blue is used when you plug the vehicle in
and are either charging or waiting to charge.
Orange indicates charge faults.
Charge Times Button
Use the charge times button to either turn
off or turn on your charge times settings for
this location. Select charge settings on the
home page of your touchscreen or under the
vehicle settings menu to access charge
preferences. See SYNC™ 3 (page 507).
241
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
E30
301
0
E301
E301
E301
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Charging
E306676
To charge the high-voltage battery:
1. Put the vehicle in park (P).
2. Press the center right edge of the charge
port door and then release to open the
door.
3. Plug the charging coupler into the charge
port receptacle on your vehicle. Make
sure the button clicks confirming that you
have completely engaged the coupler.
Note: Put your vehicle in park (P) to charge,
and for the charge status indicator to
illuminate.
Note: Pump and fan noise could be present
when charging the high voltage battery. The
pump and fan noise is normal as it circulates
liquid and keeps your high voltage battery
cool while charging.
E295257
E295257
E295
2
2
295
295
9
295
295
29
295
295
295
295
95
5
295
95
295
9
95
95
295
295
295
95
295
5
2
2
2
2
2
2
257
257
25
257
25
257
257
7
257
2
57
7
257
25
2
257
4. Verify that the cord acknowledgment
feature activates. This indicates the
beginning of a normal charge cycle. The
charge status indicator lights up each
zone alternately from bottom to top and
from bottom to top again.
5. If using a charging station, follow the
instructions on the charge station to
begin the charging process.
The charge status indicator displays how far
along the charge is:
• When the bottom zone is pulsing, the
charge is between 0-20 percent.
• When the bottom zone illuminates and
the next is pulsing, the charge is between
20-40 percent.
• When two zones illuminate and the next
is pulsing, the charge is between 40-60
percent.
• When three zones illuminate and the next
is pulsing, the charge is between 60-80
percent.
• When four zones illuminate and the top
zone is pulsing, the charge is between
80-100 percent.
• When all zones illuminate, the charge is
100 percent.
242
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
E3
E301
E301
3
301
0
197
197
197
197
197
197
197
9
197
80%-100% state of charge.A.
60%-80% state of charge.B.
40%-60% state of charge.C.
20%-40% state of charge.D.
0%-20% state of charge.E.
Note: When charging stops, the charge
status indicator shows all the completed
zones solidly lit up in a blue color for 30
seconds before turning off. For example, if
charging stops at 70 percent, then the
bottom three zones light up solidly to
indicate a battery charge level of at least 60
percent but less than 80 percent. Charging
stops when complete or when paused due
to preferred charge settings or charge
station actions.
Note: If the charge status indicator does not
light up or pulse after plugging in, please
verify that the charge port light setting is On.
If you do not wish to have the charge status
indicator light up at all while charging, then
you can switch it Off. See charge port light
under vehicle settings on your touchscreen.
See SYNC™ 3 (page 507).
E306677
Note: You can identify charging faults by the
color orange on the charge status indicator.
Faults can occur within the vehicle charging
system or outside the vehicle, such as with
the charge cord, charge station or electrical
supply.
Note: If the system detects a fault in the
vehicle charging system at any point in a
charge cycle, the entire charge status
indicator lights up solidly in an orange color
for 30 seconds and then turns off. If this
happens, unplug the charging coupler and
then plug it back into the charge port
receptacle. If the problem persists, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: If the system detects a fault outside
the vehicle, such as with the charge station
or charge cord, the entire charge status
indicator flashes continuously for 30 seconds
and then turns off. If this happens, check the
charge cord and the charge station or
electrical supply.
243
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Locking the Charging Coupler
E295451
E295451
E295
451
Note: You need a padlock or a combination
lock with a shackle diameter of 0.2 in (5 mm)
or less, and the straight portion of the
shackle of 1.0 in (25.4 mm) of length or more.
1. Insert the lock through the hole in the
charging coupler button.
2. Lock the padlock or combination lock.
Waiting to Charge
E306678
Note: Select charge settings on the home
page of the touchscreen or under the vehicle
settings menu to access charge preferences.
See SYNC™ 3 (page 507).
Charging may not begin upon plugging in if
you have set up preferred charge times for
this vehicle location. Your vehicle could delay
charging to take advantage of off-peak
electricity rates. Your vehicle optimizes the
charge schedule to be complete by your next
departure time.
When waiting to charge, plugged in and not
currently charging, the charge status
indicator shows the present state of charge
of the high voltage battery by lighting up all
completed zones for 30 seconds before
turning off. For example, if the battery is at
70 percent charge then the bottom three
zones solidly light up to indicate a battery
charge level of at least 60 percent but less
than 80 percent. When the current state of
charge is less than 20 percent, none of the
zones light up.
Note: When your vehicle is waiting to
charge, the charge status indicator turns off
30 seconds after displaying the present state
of charge. When your vehicle begins
charging, the charge status indicator turns
on and displays the status of the charge, as
described above.
Disconnecting the Charging Coupler
1. If you have installed a padlock or
combination lock, then remove it.
2. Press the button on the charging coupler.
3. While holding the button, remove the
charging coupler from the charge port
receptacle.
E295444
E295444
E295444
244
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
4. Press the center right edge of the charge
port door to close.
Note: Do not pull the wall plug from the wall
when your vehicle is charging. Doing so
could damage the outlet and the cord.
MOVING AND STORAGE
INSTRUCTIONS
Make sure that you completely wrap the
dual-voltage charging cord after charging.
When complete, replace the dual-voltage
charging cord in the luggage compartment.
Note: Do not hold the dual-voltage charging
cord by the flexible power cable.
Note: Store the dual-voltage charging cord
in a clean, dry place between the
temperature of -40–158°F (-40–70°C).
Charging Solution Two (If Equipped)
There are two different style chargers that
could be used for charging your vehicle.
Refer to the illustration below to identify the
charger and the instructions for use with the
specific type charger.
WARNING: Do not allow charging
equipment to be immersed in water or
liquids. Failure to follow this warning could
result in fire, electric shock, or serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to open
the charging equipment. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury, fire, electric shock, death or property
damage.
WARNING: Do not use the charging
equipment if it is faulty or has been
damaged. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury, fire, electric
shock, death or property damage.
WARNING: Install charging
equipment in compliance with local
regulations. Failure to follow this warning
could result in fire, electric shock, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use an
ungrounded wall outlet. The wall outlet
must be in good condition and meet
up-to-date local codes. Have a qualified
electrician check the wall outlet, if you
suspect that it is not properly grounded.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in electric shock, personal injury, or death.
WARNING: It is recommended that
electrical outlets for use with your charging
equipment be installed by a licensed,
qualified electrician. Installations must
comply with the provisions of all local
codes. Failure to follow this warning could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do NOT DROP the
control box or coupler.
WARNING: Do NOT use if stored
outside temperature range specified.
WARNING: Do not attempt to repair
the charging equipment. Contact your local
dealer for assistance.
245
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
WARNING: Read all warnings on the
charging equipment before using for the
first time.
WARNING: Read all instructions in
this publication before using the charging
equipment.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire,
connect only to a circuit provided with 40
amps maximum branch circuit overcurrent
protection installed in accordance with
NEC and local electrical code.
WARNING: Do not use the charging
equipment with an extension cord, surge
protector, timer or other adapter. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
electric shock or fire.
WARNING: The wall plug must fit
firmly into the outlet. If the connection feels
loose, worn or the outlet is damaged, have
a qualified electrician replace the outlet.
Using charging equipment with a worn
outlet may cause burns, property damage
and increase the risk of electric shock.
WARNING: Fully insert the plug into
the wall outlet. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in electric shock.
WARNING: Children should be
supervised when in the vicinity of the
charging equipment while plugged in.
WARNING: Do not put fingers into
the electric charge coupler. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
electric shock.
WARNING: This equipment has
arcing or sparking parts. Do not expose to
flammable vapors. Position this equipment
at least 18 in (450 mm) above the floor.
WARNING: Do not connect or
disconnect any pluggable components of
the charging equipment when in use or
charging. Failure to follow this instruct can
cause damage to the charging equipment.
WARNING: Do not use the charging
equipment in temperatures outside of the
operation range of -22°F (-30°C) to 122°F
(50°C).
WARNING: Store the charging
equipment in a clean dry place between
the temperatures of -22°F (-30°C) to 185°F
(85°C).
WARNING: Do not plug the charging
equipment into an electrical outlet that is
submerged in water or covered in snow.
WARNING: Do not use charging
equipment in severe rain, snow or
electrical storm.
246
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
WARNING: Do not allow charging
equipment to be immersed in water or
liquids. Failure to follow this warning could
result in fire, electric shock, or serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: When using the charging
equipment avoid moisture, water, snow
and foreign objects at all times.
WARNING: Do not replace the plug
on the connector. There are critical safety
devices in the plug, and the charging
equipment will not operate, if the plug is
replaced. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in electric shock, personal
injury, death, or fire.
WARNING: Charging equipment
contains no user modifiable or repairable
parts. If the charging equipment plug does
not properly fit into the wall outlet, have a
qualified electrician install the correct wall
outlet. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: High voltage is present
in your electric meter housing and power
distribution service panel. Contact with
high voltage can cause death or serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Visually inspect the
charging equipment before each use. Do
not use the charging equipment if it is
damaged.
WARNING: Keep charging equipment
inside when not in use. Stow the control
box on the hanger or all the charging
equipment in the bag after use to prevent
damage to the charging equipment and
personal injury.
WARNING: Use the charger only to
supply power to electric vehicles equipped
with an SAE J1772 or IEC 62196-2
compliant vehicle receptacle.
Your vehicle comes with a mobile power
cord that has a low power connector to use
with a 120V plug NEMA 5-15 and a high
power connector to use with a 240V plug
NEMA 14-50.
Specification ValueSpecification Type
SAECharger Model
120-240 VACVoltage
32 amps max
continuous
Maximum Current
60HzFrequency
< 2 WattsPower draw when
idle
< 4 WattsPower draw when
charging
Approximately 20 ft
(6.1 m)
Cable length
8.6 lb (3.9 kg)Weight
-22°F (-30°C) to 122°F
(50°C)
Operating temper-
ature
247
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Specification ValueSpecification Type
-22°F (-30°C) to 185°F
(85°C)
Storage temperature
IP67CCID Environmental
Not requiredVentilation
E3569
86
E3569
86
Connector.A
Coupler.B
Control Box.C
The mobile power cord is in the rear luggage
compartment, and allows you to charge the
vehicle's battery using a standard household
outlet.
You must plug the connector into the control
box first. Then plug the connector into the
household outlet, and then plug the coupler
into the vehicle charge port.
The power indicator illuminates blue when
the connector is properly inserted into the
control box and dedicated wall outlet.
Note: To insert the connector, firmly grasp
the connector by the cable or plug and push
into the control box until and audible click is
heard. Make sure the connector is fully
inserted and flush with the control box
before inserting it into the outlet. Improper
insertion will cause a longer charge session.
Note: Follow the installation instructions
provided with the mobile power cord.
Note: We recommend using the supplied
plugs and connectors.
Note: If you do not use a dedicated circuit,
the circuit breaker could trip or open. If a
dedicated circuit is not available, contact a
licensed professional electrician regarding
the installation of a dedicated outlet.
Note: Plug the connector for the mobile
power cord directly into the wall plug
receptacle. Do not plug the mobile power
cord into any form of extension cord.
248
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Mobile Power Cord Indicator Lights
E336515
E336515
Amber Fault Indicator Light.A
Blue Status Indicator Light.B
Red Trouble Indicator Light.C
Indicator DescriptionMobile Power Cord
Fault Indicator Type
The amber fault
indicator illuminates
to communicate that
the charger is
rebooting after an
error.
AMBER
When plugged into
the wall outlet, the
blue indicator illumin-
ates to communicate
that the charger is
ready to use.
BLUE
The red indicator
illuminates when the
charger has
detected an error. If
the red indicator is
illuminated, the
RED
Indicator DescriptionMobile Power Cord
Fault Indicator Type
charger will not
deliver power to the
vehicle. The error
must be corrected
before a charging
cycle can begin or
continue.
Note: When first plugged into a wall outlet
the amber, blue and red indicators will blink
once. Then the blue indicator turns on,
followed by a blink of the red indicator. After,
the blue indicator turns off then back on. This
cycle will happen twice if a different
connector is used from a previous charge.
249
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
ACTIONMODEREDBLUEAMBER
Make sure the outlet is
operational, and the circuit
breaker is in the ON posi-
tion or try using another
outlet. Ensure the
connector is fully inserted
into mobile power cord.
Ensure the plug is not
severely degraded. If the
error persists, contact us.
UNPOWERED;
The mobile power cord is
not powered.
OFFOFFOFF
No action required.CHARGING;OFFPULSINGOFF
The mobile power cord is
charging.
If you expect the mobile
power cord to be charging
the vehicle, make sure the
vehicle coupler is properly
inserted into the vehicle.
Check and adjust your
charging time preferences
in the on screen display. If
your vehicle is still not
charging, contact us.
STANDBY;
The mobile power cord is
powered and ready to
charge. At the current time
the mobile power cord is
not charging the vehicle.
OFFONOFF
250
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
ACTIONMODEREDBLUEAMBER
Wait for the mobile power
cord to return to standby.
If the mobile power cord
cycles for more than 2-3
minutes, unplug the vehicle
coupler. Unplug and replug
in the connector. If the
issue persists, contact us.
REBOOTING;
The mobile power cord is
recovering after encoun-
tering an error.
ONONON
Make sure the connector
and the control box are
properly connected.
Unplug and replug in the
connector. If the mobile
power cord is warm or in a
CHARGING REDUCED;
The mobile power cord is
charging at a reduced rate
due to overheating.
OFFPULSINGON
hot environment, try char-
ging in a cooler area. Try a
different outlet. Try a
different connector if you
have one available. If the
error persists, contact us.
251
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
ACTIONMODEREDBLUEAMBER
Make sure the connector
and control box are prop-
erly connected. Unplug
and replug in the
connector. If the mobile
power cord is warm or in a
CHARGING REDUCED, AC
PLUG OR WALL OUTLET;
The mobile power cord is
charging at a reduced rate
due to overheating of the
connector or the wall
outlet.
OFFPULSING1 FLASH
hot environment, try char-
ging in a cooler area. Try a
different outlet. Try a
different connector if you
have one available. If the
error persists, contact us.
Make sure the connector
and control box are prop-
erly connected. Unplug
and replug in the
connector. If the mobile
power cord is warm or in a
USER
TROUBLESHOOTING;
The mobile power cord has
encountered a fault that
requires troubleshooting.
OFFOFFON
hot environment, try char-
ging in a cooler area. Try a
different outlet. Try a
different connector if you
have one available. If the
error persists, contact us.
252
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
ACTIONMODEREDBLUEAMBER
Try a different connector if
you have one available. If
error persists, contact us.
NON - RECOVERABLE
FAULT;
There is an internal fault in
the mobile power cord that
cannot be recovered.
ONOFFOFF
Try using another
connector if you have one
available. If not, contact us
about obtaining a replace-
ment. If your warranty has
expired, you can order a
replacement from your ford
dealer.
NON - RECOVERABLE
FAULT;
There is an internal fault in
the connector that cannot
be recovered.
1 FLASHOFFOFF
Potential shock hazard -
immediately turn off circuit
breaker for the outlet
within home. Discontinue
use. Contact us about
obtaining a replacement.
GROUND LEAKAGE
FAULT;
Electrical current is leaking
through a potentially
unsafe path.
PULSINGOFFOFF
253
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Note: When plugging into an unfamiliar wall
outlet, let the vehicle charge for several
minutes before leaving it unattended. The
red indicator will illuminate if not charging.
The unit will turn off if breaker or
infrastructure ground fault circuit interrupter
(GFCI) is tripped. You can view vehicle
charging status remotely via the Lincoln Way
App.
Mobile Power Cord Auto-Restart
Auto-restart helps to make sure that your
vehicle will be charged and ready for use
when needed. A charge could be interrupted
if errors are detected. Charging resumes
once the error is no longer detected. The
red indicator illuminates during an error
condition.
The exception to the immediate auto-restart
is when the interruption is due to a charger
ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) event.
The charger attempts to restart 15 minutes
after a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)
event. After the fourth attempt to restart, the
charger shuts down and the red indicator
stays on.
If the fault persists, do not continue to try to
charge your vehicle. Contact your authorized
dealer.
CARE INSTRUCTIONS
Do not use cleaners or solvents as this could
damage your mobile power cord. Do not
place stress on the charger cables. If unit
overheats, remove the mobile power cord
from direct sunlight.
SAFETY FEATURES
The charger includes the following safety
features to protect against the risk of electric
shock:
• Service Ground Check: The charger
constantly checks for the presence of a
service ground connection. If the service
ground ever fails, the charger red
indicator turns ON and shuts down power
to the vehicle.
• Thermal Event Sensor: Charger module
senses out-of-ordinary thermal events
and decreases the charging current or
shuts the unit down if required.
• Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)
Protection: The charger has a ground
fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) reaction
system to protect against electric shock.
If the charger module detects an output
ground fault, it shuts down power to the
output cable and illuminates the red
indicator.
• Insulation: The charger module,
connector, cable assembly, and charge
coupler are completely insulated. There
are no exposed live parts, to protect
against electric shock.
• Unintentional Disconnection: The charge
coupler is designed to minimize
unintentional disconnection. A pilot signal
wire in the cable and charge coupler
eliminates the possibility of electric shock
when not connected to a vehicle or if an
unintended disconnect occurs during a
charge. Disconnection during charging
is safe.
254
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Charge Port
The charge port is between the front
left-hand side door and the front left-hand
wheel well. To open, press the center right
edge of the charge port door, and then
release.
E295258
Note: Do not force the charge port door
open or closed. Forcing the door open or
closed damages the charge port.
The charge status indicator around the
charge port indicates the charge status of
the high voltage battery in your vehicle.
Divided into five zones, the charge status
indicator displays the state of charge in 20
percent increments.
We use the color white as a courtesy light to
help with plugging in and to acknowledge
actions such as plugging in, unplugging or
pressing the charge times button.
Blue is used when you plug the vehicle in
and are either charging or waiting to charge.
Orange indicates charge faults.
Charge Times Button
Use the charge times button to either turn
off or turn on your charge times settings for
this location. Select charge settings on the
home page of your touchscreen or under the
vehicle settings menu to access charge
preferences.
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
E30
301
3
0
0
E301
E301
301
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Charging
E306676
To charge the high-voltage battery:
1. Put the vehicle in park (P).
2. Press the center right edge of the charge
port door and then release to open the
door.
3. Plug the charging coupler into the charge
port receptacle on your vehicle. Make
sure the button clicks confirming that you
have completely engaged the coupler.
255
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Note: Put your vehicle in park (P) to charge,
and for the charge status indicator to
illuminate.
Note: Pump and fan noise could be present
when charging the high voltage battery. The
pump and fan noise is normal as it circulates
liquid and keeps your high voltage battery
cool while charging.
E295257
E295257
E295
2
295
2
2
29
9
295
29
295
295
295
2
29
95
295
95
295
295
9
95
95
295
295
95
295
295
5
2
2
257
2
257
2
2
25
257
257
257
7
25
257
57
7
25
257
7
2
257
4. Verify that the cord acknowledgment
feature activates. This indicates the
beginning of a normal charge cycle. The
charge status indicator lights up each
zone alternately from bottom to top and
from bottom to top again.
5. If using a charging station, follow the
instructions on the charge station to
begin the charging process.
Charge Port Indicators
The charge status indicator displays how far
along the charge is:
• When the bottom zone is pulsing, the
charge is between 0-20 percent.
• When the bottom zone illuminates and
the next is pulsing, the charge is between
20-40 percent.
• When two zones illuminate and the next
is pulsing, the charge is between 40-60
percent.
• When three zones illuminate and the next
is pulsing, the charge is between 60-80
percent.
• When four zones illuminate and the top
zone is pulsing, the charge is between
80-100 percent.
• When all zones illuminate, the charge is
100 percent.
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
301
3
301
0
197
197
197
197
197
197
197
9
197
80%-100% state of charge.A.
60%-80% state of charge.B.
40%-60% state of charge.C.
20%-40% state of charge.D.
0%-20% state of charge.E.
256
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Note: When charging stops, the charge
status indicator shows all the completed
zones solidly lit up in a blue color for 30
seconds before turning off. For example, if
charging stops at 70 percent, then the
bottom three zones light up solidly to
indicate a battery charge level of at least 60
percent but less than 80 percent. Charging
stops when complete or when paused due
to preferred charge settings or charge
station actions.
Note: If the charge status indicator does not
light up or pulse after plugging in, please
verify that the charge port light setting is On.
If you do not wish to have the charge status
indicator light up at all while charging, then
you can switch it Off. See charge port light
under vehicle settings on your touchscreen.
E306677
Note: You can identify charging faults by the
color orange on the charge status indicator.
Faults can occur within the vehicle charging
system or outside the vehicle, such as with
the charge cord, charge station or electrical
supply.
Note: If the system detects a fault in the
vehicle charging system at any point in a
charge cycle, the entire charge status
indicator lights up solidly in an orange color
for 30 seconds and then turns off. If this
happens, unplug the charging coupler and
then plug it back into the charge port
receptacle. If the problem persists, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: If the system detects a fault outside
the vehicle, such as with the charge station
or charge cord, the entire charge status
indicator flashes continuously for 30 seconds
and then turns off. If this happens, check the
charge cord and the charge station or
electrical supply.
Waiting to Charge
E306678
Note: Select charge settings on the home
page of the touchscreen or under the vehicle
settings menu to access charge preferences.
Charging may not begin upon plugging in if
you have set up preferred charge times for
this vehicle location. Your vehicle could delay
charging to take advantage of off-peak
electricity rates. Your vehicle optimizes the
charge schedule to be complete by your next
departure time.
When waiting to charge, plugged in and not
currently charging, the charge status
indicator shows the present state of charge
of the high voltage battery by lighting up all
completed zones for 30 seconds before
turning off. For example, if the battery is at
70 percent charge then the bottom three
zones solidly light up to indicate a battery
charge level of at least 60 percent but less
than 80 percent. When the current state of
charge is less than 20 percent, none of the
zones light up.
Note: When your vehicle is waiting to
charge, the charge status indicator turns off
30 seconds after displaying the present state
of charge. When your vehicle begins
charging, the charge status indicator turns
on and displays the status of the charge, as
described above.
257
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Disconnecting the Charging Coupler
1. If you have installed a padlock or
combination lock, then remove it.
2. Press the button on the charging coupler.
3. While holding the button, remove the
charging coupler from the charge port
receptacle.
E295444
E295444
E295
444
4. Press the center right edge of the charge
port door to close.
Note: Do not pull the wall plug from the wall
when your vehicle is charging. Doing so
could damage the outlet and the cord.
MOVING AND STORAGE
INSTRUCTIONS
Make sure you wrap the mobile power cord
after charging. Store the mobile power cord
in the storage bag supplied with the mobile
power cord.
When charging is complete, replace the
mobile power cord in the rear luggage
compartment.
Note: Do not hold the mobile power cord by
the power cable. Hold the complete unit and
carefully place back in the storage bag.
Note: To remove the connector, firmly grasp
the connector by the cable or plug and pull
away from the control box.
258
High Voltage Battery - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Apply the parking brake
and make sure your vehicle is in park (P).
Power the vehicle off and remove the keys
or remote control whenever you leave your
vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds will limit engine performance,
which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
Note: You cannot shift out of park (P) unless
the intelligent access key is inside your
vehicle.
Understanding Your Transmission
Selector Positions
Your vehicle has an electronic transmission
shifter. The transmission selector is on the
center stack below the touchscreen.
E247
220
E247
E247
E24
E247
E247
E247
E24
E24
E2
2
E2
E2
2
E2
E2
E24
24
E247
E247
E247
E24
4
47
247
247
E247
2
E247
E247
E247
E24
E2
247
E247
E247
E247
E
2
22
22
22
220
220
2
220
220
220
2
2
220
20
22
220
220
220
Park.P
Reverse.R
Neutral.N
Drive.D
The instrument cluster displays the current
position.
Note: The position could illuminate on the
transmission selector.
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your vehicle
locks the transmission and prevents the
wheels from turning. Always come to a
complete stop before putting your vehicle
into and out of park (P). An audible tone
sounds once you select park (P).
When you switch the ignition off, your vehicle
shifts into park (P). If you switch the ignition
off while your vehicle is moving, the
transmission first shifts into neutral (N) until
it reaches a speed less than 3 mph (5 km/h)
and then shifts into park (P).
The electric parking brake could apply when
you shift to park (P) without the brake pedal
fully pressed. The electric parking brake
applies when you shift to park (P) on large
slopes. The electric parking brake releases
with the drive away release function, or
manually as described in the Releasing the
Electric Parking Brake section. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 272).
259
Transmission
Note: A warning tone sounds if you open the
driver door and you have not shifted the
transmission selector to park (P).
Reverse (R)
With the transmission selector in reverse (R),
your vehicle moves backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the transmission selector in neutral (N),
you can start your vehicle and it is free to
roll. Hold the brake pedal down when in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy and smoothness. Shift
the transmission selector to drive (D) to allow
your vehicle to move forward and shift
through the forward gears.
The transmission shifts to the appropriate
gear for optimum performance based on
ambient temperature, road slope, vehicle
load and your input.
Automatic Return to Park
Your vehicle shifts into park (P) when your
vehicle is stationary and any of the following
occur:
• You switch the vehicle off.
• You open the driver door with your
seatbelt unlatched.
• You unlatch the driver seatbelt when the
driver door is open.
Note: Do not use automatic return to park
(P) when your vehicle is moving, except in
an emergency.
Automatic return to park (P) may not work if
the door ajar switch is malfunctioning.
See an authorized dealer if any of the
following occur:
• Door ajar indicator does not illuminate
with the driver door open.
• Door ajar indicator illuminates with the
driver door closed.
• Transmission not in park message
appears with the driver door closed, after
you shift out of park (P). You unlatch the
driver seatbelt when the driver door is
open.
Stay in Neutral Mode
This mode keeps your vehicle in neutral (N)
when you switch your vehicle off. Use this
mode at an automatic car wash if you exit
your vehicle, or switch your vehicle off.
Note: Automatic return to park (P) is delayed
when your vehicle is in this mode.
Your vehicle could shift to park (P) after 30
minutes, or when the vehicle battery charge
level is low. Prolonged use of this mode can
cause the vehicle battery to run out of
charge.
260
Transmission
Do not tow your vehicle in this mode. Failure
to follow these instructions could result in
vehicle damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Entering Temporary Neutral Mode
1. Power your vehicle on.
2. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift into neutral (N).
Note: An instructional message appears.
5. Press the neutral (N) button.
Note: A confirmation message appears
when your vehicle enters the mode.
6. Release the brake pedal.
Note: Your vehicle is free to roll.
7. Switch your vehicle off.
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: The neutral (N) indicator on the
transmission selector may flash in this mode.
Exiting Temporary Neutral Mode
1. Press the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P), or power your vehicle
on and shift into drive (D) or reverse (R).
Manually Shifting Gears
The instrument cluster displays the current
gear. The current gear flashes when your
vehicle cannot shift into the requested gear.
Your vehicle will not shift if the requested
gear raises or lowers the engine speed
beyond the limit.
Your vehicle could shift when you fully press
the accelerator or brake pedal.
Note: Prolonged driving with high engine
speed could cause vehicle damage not
covered by vehicle warranty.
Note: Drive modes could affect when the
vehicle shifts into the requested gear.
E144
8
2
1
Manually Shifting Gears in Drive (D)
Use this feature to temporarily change gear.
Note: We recommend using this feature for
engine braking or driving on hilly or
mountainous roads.
• Pull any paddle to switch the feature on.
• Pull the right (+) paddle to upshift.
• Pull the left (-) paddle to downshift.
• Hold the + paddle for a few seconds to
switch the feature off.
Note: The feature switches off after a short
period of time if neither paddle is pulled.
Manual Park Release
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which means
your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, apply the
parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheel chocks if
appropriate.
261
Transmission
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
until you verify that the stoplamps are
working.
Use the manual park release to move your
transmission from the park (P) position in the
event of an electrical malfunction or
emergency.
Activating the Manual Park Release Cable
E294326
1. Apply the parking brake. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 272).
Note: If the vehicle battery is dead, for
example, no electrical power is available,
you could require an external power source
to apply the parking brake.
2. Using a flat head screwdriver 4.7 in
(120 mm), carefully open the access cover
under the arm rest console.
3. Turn the vehicle ignition on without
starting the vehicle. Press the push to
start button without pressing the brake.
4. Once in the driver seat, fully apply the
brake pedal and hold. Do not release.
5. Insert a screwdriver fully into the Manual
Park Release lever slot, pull the Manual
Park Release lever toward the rear until
the detent in the slot pops up against the
screwdriver. Allow 0.3 in (7 mm) of full
upward travel of the detent, which locks
in the park override mode, and you can
remove the screwdriver. If done correctly,
a message on the instrument cluster
displays Park Not Available, Transmission
Not in Park or Shift System Fault.
E297
270
E297
E297
E297
E297
E297
297
297
297
97
97
7
97
7
7
7
E297
E297
E29
297
7
297
E297
97
297
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
27
27
270
2
270
270
270
2
270
27
270
270
2
270
270
270
262
Transmission
Note: A screwdriver tool longer than 4.7 in
(120 mm) could hit the underside of the
armrest console before you achieve full
travel of the detent.
6. With your foot still fully applied on the
brake pedal, disengage the parking
brake. See Electric Parking Brake (page
272).
7. Your vehicle remains in neutral (N) for
emergency towing purposes.
8. Switch off the ignition.
9. Once it is safe to do so, and there is no
risk of your vehicle rolling, disconnect
the negative, black, battery cable from
the battery.
Returning Your Vehicle to Normal Mode
1. Once it is safe to do so, reconnect the
negative, black, battery cable to the
battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 272).
Note: If the vehicle battery is dead, you
could require an external power source to
apply the parking brake.
3. Fully apply the brake pedal and hold, do
not release.
4. Insert the screwdriver fully into the
Manual Park Release lever slot. Push the
tool downwards. The system detent
releases and the Manual Park Release
lever moves forward, allowing the vehicle
to go back into the park (P) position.
Remove the screwdriver.
5. Install the access cover.
6. With your foot fully applied on the brake
pedal, start your vehicle. Confirm that
your vehicle is in the park (P) position and
that the instrument cluster indicates park
(P).
7. If the instrument cluster does not display
the park (P) position or there is a
message stating Park Not Available,
Transmission Not In Park or Shift System
Fault, apply the parking brake before
exiting your vehicle. Contact an
authorized dealer.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or
Snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in the mud or snow,
you can rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission could occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires could occur, or the engine could
overheat.
263
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of all-wheel
drive vehicles. Although an all-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.
The intelligent AWD system continuously
monitors vehicle conditions and adjusts the
power distribution between the front and
rear wheels. It combines transparent
all-surface operation with highly capable
all-wheel drive.
The AWD system is always active and
requires no driver input. It is capable of
handling all road conditions including street
and highway driving as well as off-road and
winter driving. You can optimize more AWD
control by selecting different drive modes.
See Selecting a Drive Mode (page 343).
Note: A warning message displays in the
information display when an AWD system
fault is present. See Information Messages
(page 142). A AWD system fault causes the
AWD system to default to rear-wheel drive
only mode. When this warning message
displays, have your vehicle serviced.
Note: A warning message displays in the
information display if the AWD system
overheats. See Information Messages
(page 142). This condition could occur if you
operate your vehicle in extreme conditions
with excessive wheel slip, such as deep
sand. To resume normal AWD function as
soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and stop the engine for at least 10
minutes. After you restart the engine and the
AWD system adequately cools, the warning
message turns off and normal AWD function
returns.
Operating All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Vehicles With Spare Tires
Do not use a different size spare tire other
than the tire provided. If the mini-spare tire
is installed, the AWD system will disable and
enter rear-wheel drive only mode to protect
driveline components. Some limited AWD
traction could be provided if the mini-spare
is installed on one of the front wheels. If you
are in driving conditions where limited AWD
traction is needed while the mini-spare is
installed, it is recommended the mini-spare
be installed on the front axle.
264
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If the mini-spare is installed, this condition is
indicated by a warning in the information
display.
The slip response system could activate if
the mini spare is installed on the front
wheels. If the mini spare was installed on the
rear wheels the slip response system will
fully disable. In situations where there is a
wintery mix or an off road situation, and you
need to use a mini spare, you must install
the mini spare in the front tire position and
move a full size tire to the rear tire position
for the slip response system to function.
Operating ALL-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Vehicles with Mismatched Tires
WARNING: Only use replacement
tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating, and type as those
originally provided for your vehicle. The
recommended tire and wheel sizes can be
found on the Tire Label on the driver side
door frame or the edge of the driver door.
If this information is not found in those
locations, or for additional options, contact
your authorized dealer. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended, could affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch high
profile tires on the rear axle) could cause the
AWD system to stop functioning and default
to rear-wheel drive or damage the AWD
system.
For optimum AWD Performance, it is
recommended to follow the tire rotation
maintenance schedule. To avoid potential
AWD malfunction or AWD system damage,
it is recommended to replace all four tires
rather than mixing significantly worn tires
with new tires. For example, using 3 worn
tread tires and 1 new tread tire all of the same
original tire size/brand, can be tolerated by
the AWD system as long as the worn tires
still have usable tread depth.
How Your Vehicle Differs from Other
Vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle could be
higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or damaging
underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times,
especially in rough terrain. Since sudden
changes in terrain can result in abrupt
steering wheel motion, make sure you grip
the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
265
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the area.
To maintain steering and braking control of
your vehicle, you must have all four wheels
on the ground and they must be rolling, not
sliding or spinning.
Driving in Special Conditions With All-
Wheel Drive (AWD)
Note: Use of the AWD system in slippery,
deep snow and sand drive modes on dry
surfaces could produce some vibration and
driveline bind up and, or excessive tire wear,
as the intent of these drive modes are for
slippery and loose surfaces.
Note: You can use AWD vehicles for driving
on sand, snow, mud and rough roads and
have operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional
vehicles, both on and off the highway.
Basic Operating Principles in Special
Conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle back
onto the pavement only after reducing
your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the
road surface.
• It could be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You could lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
• It often could be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors, with
minor damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the pavement
which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover.
Remember, your safety and the safety of
others should be your primary concern.
266
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNING: Apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P), switch the ignition off
and remove the key before you leave your
vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
could be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
It could be beneficial to disengage Traction
Control while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission could occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the transmission
and tires could occur or the engine could
overheat.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid "over-driving"
your vehicle (i.e., turn the steering wheel
only as rapidly and as far as required to
avoid the emergency). Excessive steering
can result in less vehicle control, not
more. Additionally, smooth variations of
the accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes in
vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt
steering, acceleration or braking which
could result in an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or
personal injury. Use all available road
surface to return the vehicle to a safe
direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e., from concrete to
gravel) there is a change in the way the
vehicle responds to a maneuver
(steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning the wheels.
267
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and cause
the vehicle to become stuck to the point that
assistance could be required from another
vehicle. Remember, you could be able to
back out the way you came if you proceed
with caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability could be
limited.
Note: Driving through deep water could
damage your vehicle.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly.
If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle
could stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities in
our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles could make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will use.
Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side.
Do not drive in reverse over a hill without
the aid of an observer.
268
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turn around
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power can cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral; instead, disengage
overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden
hard braking as you could lose control. The
front wheels have to be turning in order to
steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire chains
or cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end
of your vehicle slides while cornering, steer
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle could accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
will not stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
269
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Since your vehicle is equipped with a four
wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 272).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and tested
to provide predictable performance whether
loaded or empty and durable load carrying
capability. For this reason, we strongly
recommend that you do not make
modifications such as adding or removing
parts (such as lowering kits or stabilizer bars)
or by using replacement parts not equivalent
to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the
center of gravity can make it more likely the
vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of
control. We strongly recommend that caution
be used with any vehicle equipped with a
high load or device (such as ladder or
luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
could void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely affect
driver and passenger safety. Frequent
inspection of vehicle chassis components is
recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
off-highway usage.
270
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn. Have your
vehicle checked. If your vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the
steering wheel when braking, have your
vehicle checked.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. Wet brakes result in reduced
braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car
wash or standing water to dry the brakes.
See Cleaning the Wheels (page 427).
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle
checked. If your vehicle has to be towed,
we recommend that you contact a
professional towing service.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at which
you press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal. Emergency brake assist
can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp illuminates momentarily
when you switch the ignition on to
confirm the lamp is functional.
If the warning lamp does not illuminate
during start up, remains on or flashes, the
system may be disabled. Have the system
checked. If the anti-lock brake system is
disabled, normal braking is still operational.
See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page
131).
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
271
Brakes
E270480
This lamp illuminates momentarily
when you switch the ignition on to
confirm the lamp is functional. If it
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or if it begins
to flash at any time except the time
during applying or releasing the parking
brake, have the system checked.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock brake system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal could pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Apply the parking brake
and shift into park (P) before leaving your
vehicle.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
WARNING: The electric parking
brake does not operate if the vehicle
battery has run out of charge.
Your vehicle has an electric parking brake.
You operate it with a switch instead of a
lever. The switch is on the center console or
to the left-hand side of the steering wheel,
on the lower part of the instrument panel.
Note: The electric parking brake makes
noises during operation. This is normal.
Applying the Electric Parking Brake
E267156
Pull the switch up.
E270480
The red warning lamp flashes
during operation and illuminates
when the parking brake is applied.
Note: It remains illuminated for a short
period of time after you switch the ignition
off.
If it continues to flash or does not illuminate,
the system has malfunctioned. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
Note: If you shift your vehicle into park (P)
on a slope and the transmission cannot
securely hold the vehicle, the electric parking
brake automatically applies. See
Transmission (page 259).
272
Brakes
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Emergency
Note: Do not apply the electric parking brake
when your vehicle is moving, except in an
emergency. If you repeatedly use the electric
parking brake to slow or stop your vehicle,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
E267156
Pull the switch up and hold it.
E270480
The red warning lamp illuminates,
a tone sounds and the stoplamps
turn on.
The electric parking brake continues to slow
your vehicle down unless you release the
switch.
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Push the switch down.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the system
has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Pull the switch up and hold it.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal until the engine
has developed sufficient torque to prevent
your vehicle from rolling down the hill.
E267156
Release the switch and pull away
in a normal manner.
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake
Close the driver door.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal and pull away in
a normal manner.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the electric
parking brake has not released. Manually
release the parking brake.
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if
the Vehicle Battery is Running Out of
Charge
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
battery to release the electric parking brake
if the vehicle battery is running out of charge.
See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 366).
273
Brakes
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake.
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will turn off
if a malfunction is apparent or if you rev
the engine excessively. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The
system releases the brakes automatically
once the engine has developed sufficient
torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling
down the slope. This is an advantage when
pulling away on a slope, for example from a
car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing
uphill into a parking space.
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the
brake pedal pressed and shift into first
gear when facing uphill or reverse (R)
when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is
on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on the
slope without rolling away for about two
to three seconds. This hold time
automatically extends if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system remembers
the last setting when you start your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off. When
you switch the ignition on, the system
automatically turns on.
274
Brakes
AUTO HOLD
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake.
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system turns off if
there is a malfunction or if you excessively
rev the engine.
The system is designed to apply the brakes
to hold your vehicle at a standstill after you
stop your vehicle and release the brake
pedal. This could be beneficial in certain
situations, for example when waiting on a hill
or in traffic.
Switching Auto Hold On and Off
E287975
Press the button in the instrument
panel to access the Auto Hold
feature on the touchscreen.
Note: You can only switch the system on
after you close the driver door and start the
engine.
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
Make sure you switch the system off before
towing with your vehicle or before using an
automatic car wash.
Using Auto Hold
1. Use the brakes to bring your vehicle to
a complete stop. The auto hold active
indicator illuminates in the information
display.
2. Release the brake pedal. The system
holds your vehicle at a standstill. The
auto hold active indicator remains
illuminated in the information display.
Note: The system only activates if you apply
enough brake pressure. If your vehicle is on
a steep slope, you need to press the brake
pedal harder before the system activates.
Note: Under certain conditions, the system
could apply the electric parking brake. The
brake system warning lamp illuminates. The
electric parking brake releases when you
press the accelerator pedal. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 272).
Note: If auto-start-stop turns off the engine,
auto hold remains active.
Note: The system turns off if you shift into
reverse (R) and press the brake pedal.
3. Pull away in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes and the auto
hold active indicator turns off.
Auto Hold Indicator
E197933
The auto hold indicator illuminates
in the information display when the
system is on and is either active or
unavailable.
275
Brakes
E197934
Illuminates when the system is
active. Your vehicle remains
stationary after you release the
brake pedal.
Illuminates when the system is on but
unavailable to hold your vehicle at a
standstill.
The system could be unavailable when any
of the following occur:
• During an active park assist maneuver.
• Your vehicle is in stay in neutral mode.
• The driver door is open.
• You shift into reverse (R) before the
system is active.
276
Brakes
WHAT IS REVERSE BRAKING
ASSIST
E205199
E205199
Reverse braking assist is designed to reduce
impact damage or assist in avoiding a
collision while in reverse (R). Using sensors
on the rear of the vehicle, it can detect a
possible collision and apply the brakes. If full
braking occurs, the system attempts to stop
the vehicle a safe distance from the obstacle.
HOW DOES REVERSE BRAKING
ASSIST WORK
Reverse braking assist functions when in
reverse (R) and traveling at a speed of
1–7 mph (2–12 km/h).
If the system detects an obstacle behind your
vehicle, it provides a warning through the
rear parking aid or cross traffic alert system.
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, air
brakes, external motors and fans may
affect the correct operation of the sensing
system. This may cause reduced
performance or false alerts.
WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
weather, unconventional vehicle types, and
pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
277
Reverse Braking Assist (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use the system
with accessories that extend beyond the
front or rear of your vehicle, for example a
trailer hitch or bike rack. The system is not
able to make corrections for the additional
length of the accessories.
The system only applies the brakes for a
short period of time when an event occurs.
Act as soon as you notice the brakes apply
to remain in control of the vehicle. If you do
not intervene the vehicle may start to move
again.
Note: Certain add-on devices around the
bumper or fascia may create false alerts. For
example, large trailer hitches, bicycle or
surfboard racks, license plate brackets,
bumper covers or any other device that may
block the normal detection zone of the
system. Remove the add-on device to
prevent false alerts.
Note: The system does not react to small or
moving objects, particularly those close to
the ground.
Note: The system does not operate during
hard acceleration or steering.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia leaving it misaligned or
bent, it could alter the sensing zone causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or
false alerts.
Note: Vehicle loading and suspension
changes can impact the angle of the sensors
and may change the normal detection zone
of the system resulting in inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alerts.
Note: When you connect a trailer, the system
may detect the trailer and provide an alert,
or the system turns off. If the system does
not turn off, manually switch the system off
after you connect the trailer.
Note: You may experience reduced system
performance on road surfaces that limit
deceleration. For example, roads with ice,
loose gravel, mud or sand.
SWITCHING REVERSE BRAKING
ASSIST ON AND OFF
You can switch the system on or off through
the touchscreen. See Settings (page 555).
Note: The system is unavailable when rear
parking aid or cross traffic alert is off.
OVERRIDING REVERSE BRAKING
ASSIST
There could be instances when unexpected
or unwanted braking occurs. Firmly pressing
the accelerator pedal or switching the feature
off overrides the system.
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST
INDICATORS
If the system determines that a collision with
an obstacle may occur, full braking may
apply.
E293490
A message and warning indicator
appear when the system applies
the brakes.
278
Reverse Braking Assist (If Equipped)
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
Make sure that all doors, liftgate or tailgate and hood are closed. Drive
the vehicle on a straight road for a short period. Make sure the parking
aids and cross traffic alert systems are on. If the message remains on,
have the system checked as soon as possible.
Reverse Brake Assist Not Available See Manual
Displays when a system error has occurred. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Reverse Brake Assist Fault
Displays when reverse brake assist is off.Reverse Brake Assist Off
279
Reverse Braking Assist (If Equipped)
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why is reverse braking assist unavailable?
• Make sure you switch the system on.
See Switching Reverse Braking Assist
On and Off (page 278).
• Make sure that the liftgate, hood and all
doors are closed.
• Make sure the cross traffic alert system
is on. See Cross Traffic Alert (page 330).
• Make sure the rear parking aid system is
on. See Rear Parking Aid (page 286).
• Make sure traction control is on. See
Using Traction Control (page 281).
• The vehicle has sustained a rear end
impact. Have the sensors checked for
proper coverage and operation.
• An ABS, traction control or stability
control event may have occurred. The
system resumes operation when the
event is complete.
• Make sure the rear view camera and 360
degree camera are not dirty or
obstructed. If it is dirty, clean the camera.
See Rear View Camera (page 297). See
360 Degree Camera (page 300). If the
message still appears after cleaning the
camera, wait a short time and the
message should clear. If the message
does not clear, have the system checked.
• Make sure the sensors are not blocked
or faulted. See Cross Traffic Alert (page
330). See Rear Parking Aid (page 286).
• You recently had your vehicle serviced,
or the battery disconnected. Drive your
vehicle a short distance to resume
system operation.
• The system does not function when you
connect a trailer. Operation resumes
when you disconnect the trailer.
Note: If the answers to why the system is
unavailable do not assist in returning reverse
braking assist to available, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
280
Reverse Braking Assist (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: Operating your vehicle
with the traction control disabled could
lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
The system turns on each time you switch
on the ignition.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information display
showing system status.
You can switch the system off by accessing
the traction control settings through the
touchscreen. See Settings (page 555).
Note: If your vehicle detects a loss of traction
due to excessive wheel spin or deceleration,
a display message appears on the
touchscreen prompting you to disable
traction control if needed.
Using the Information Display Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 136).
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on when
you switch the traction control system off.
281
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the laws
of physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the
road; this could reduce the operator’s
ability to control the vehicle potentially
resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death. If your
electronic stability control system activates,
SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the systems applies higher
brake forces.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing
engine power.
282
Stability Control
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it
changes by applying the brakes to one or
more wheels individually.
Curve Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to follow the road when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. Curve
Control operates by reducing engine power
and, if necessary, applying brakes to one or
more of the wheels individually.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 281).
E72
903
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems turn
off.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control (page
281).
283
Stability Control
WHAT IS HILL DESCENT CONTROL
WARNING: Hill descent control
cannot control descent in all surface
conditions and circumstances, such as ice
or extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of
vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake.
Note: The system does not function below
3 mph (5 km/h).
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep slopes in various surface
conditions.
The system can maintain vehicle speeds on
downhill slopes between 3–20 mph
(5–32 km/h). Above 20 mph (32 km/h), the
system remains on but the descent speed
cannot be set or maintained.
The system requires a cool down interval
after a period of sustained use. The amount
of time that the system can remain active
before cooling varies with conditions. The
system provides a warning in the message
center and a tone sounds when the system
is about to disengage for cooling. At this
time, manually apply the brakes as needed
to maintain descent speed.
SWITCHING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL ON AND OFF
You can switch the hill descent control on
and off through the touchscreen.
SETTING THE HILL DESCENT
SPEED
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake.
WARNING: The system does not
control speed in low traction conditions or
extremely steep slopes. The system is
designed to be an aid and does not relieve
you of your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
To increase the descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the speed
you prefer.
To decrease the descent speed, press the
brake pedal until you reach the speed you
prefer.
284
Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
When you reach the speed you prefer, either
by accelerating or decelerating, remove your
feet from the pedals. The system maintains
the chosen vehicle speed.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL
INDICATOR
Illuminates when you switch hill
descent control on.
285
Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system. This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Note: If your vehicle has MyKey™, the sensing
system cannot be switched off when a
MyKey™ is present. See Principle of
Operation (page 78).
Note: Keep the sensors on the bumper or
fascia free from snow, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are
covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device to
prevent false alerts.
Note: When you connect a trailer to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
the rear parking aid when you connect a
trailer to prevent the alert.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
You can switch the system off through the
touchscreen, information display or from the
pop-up message that appears once you shift
the transmission into reverse (R). If your
vehicle has a parking aid button, you can
switch the system off by pressing the button.
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 142).
REAR PARKING AID
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
286
Parking Aids
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects when
your vehicle is moving at parking speeds.
To help avoid personal injury you must
take care when using the parking aid
system.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
Note: Some accessories, for example large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks, can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
The sensors are on the rear bumper.
The sensors are active when the
transmission is in reverse (R) and the vehicle
speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). When the
parking aid system sounds a tone, the audio
system may reduce the set volume.
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the center of the rear
bumper.
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
E1
30
17
8
The sensor coverage area is up to 70 in
(180 cm) from the rear bumper.
If the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the information display.
287
Parking Aids
The system detects large objects when you
shift into reverse (R) and any of the following
occur:
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
speed.
• Your vehicle is stationary, but an object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at low speed.
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
speed and an object is moving toward
your vehicle, for example another vehicle,
at low speed.
If your vehicle remains stationary for two
seconds, the audible warning turns off. If your
vehicle moves backward, the tone sounds
again.
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
or less from the rear bumper, the audible
warning does not turn off.
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E1
90
4
59
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon.
• If the system does not detect an object,
the distance indicator blocks are gray.
When you shift into reverse (R), the system
provides audible warnings and visual
indication when your vehicle is moving, and
the detected object is moving toward your
vehicle. When you stop your vehicle, the
audible warnings stop after two seconds.
Visual indication remains on when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
FRONT PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
288
Parking Aids
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects when
your vehicle is moving at parking speeds.
To help avoid personal injury you must
take care when using the parking aid
system.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
Note: Some accessories, for example large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
The sensors are on the front bumper.
The sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P). When the parking aid system
sounds a tone, the audio system may reduce
the set volume.
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
The system turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches 5 mph (8 km/h).
E1
8
7
330
The sensor coverage area is up to 28 in
(70 cm) from the center of the bumper.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
system detects objects when your vehicle is
moving at low speed or an object is moving
toward your vehicle, for example another
vehicle at low speed. When you stop your
vehicle, the audible warning turns off after
two seconds.
If the transmission is in any forward gear, the
system provides audible warnings when your
vehicle is moving and an object is within the
detection area. When you stop your vehicle,
the audible warning turns off after two
seconds and the visual warning turns off after
four seconds.
If the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the information display.
289
Parking Aids
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E1
90
4
59
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicator blocks are gray.
When you shift into any forward gear, the
system provides audible warnings and visual
indication when your vehicle is moving at a
speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or
below and the system detects an object
within the detection zone. When you stop
your vehicle, the audible warnings stop after
two seconds and visual indication stops after
four seconds.
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
or less from your vehicle, visual indication
remains on.
When you shift into neutral (N), the system
only provides visual indication if your vehicle
is moving at a speed of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or below, for example, your vehicle
is moving on a slope, and the system detects
an object moving toward your vehicle. When
you stop your vehicle, visual indication stops
after four seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects when
your vehicle is moving at parking speeds.
To help avoid personal injury you must
take care when using the parking aid
system.
290
Parking Aids
The system uses the front and rear
outermost parking aid sensors to detect
objects that are near to the sides of your
vehicle. The system displays them on a
virtual map in the information display as your
vehicle moves past them.
The sensors are on the front and rear
bumpers.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
The system may not function if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on within a few seconds.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system activates.
• The traction control system activates.
Note: If you switch traction control off, the
side sensing system also turns off.
Note: Some accessories, for example large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
To reinitialize the system, you may have to
drive your vehicle approximately 10 ft (3 m).
E1
90
4
58
The sensor coverage area is up to 24 in
(60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object within
the coverage area and the driving path of
your vehicle, an audible warning sounds. As
your vehicle moves closer to the object, the
rate of the tone increases.
Note: The system does not detect an object
that is moving toward the side of your
vehicle, for example another vehicle moving
at low speed, if it does not pass a front or
rear sensor.
291
Parking Aids
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E1
90
4
59
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicator blocks are gray.
When you shift into reverse (R), the system
provides audible warnings and a visual
indication when detected objects are within
24 in (60 cm) and are inside the driving path
of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle,
the audible warnings turn off after two
seconds.
When you shift into any forward gear, the
system provides audible warnings and a
visual indication when your vehicle is moving
at a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
or below and the system detects an object
within the detection zone. When you stop
your vehicle, the audible warnings turn off
after two seconds and the visual indication
turns off after four seconds.
When you shift into neutral (N), the system
only provides a visual indication if your
vehicle is moving at a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or below. For
example, your vehicle is moving on a slope,
and the system detects an object moving
toward your vehicle. When you stop your
vehicle, the visual indication turns off after
four seconds.
If the system is not available, the side
distance indicator blocks do not display.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The sensors may not
detect objects in heavy rain or other
conditions that cause interference.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
292
Parking Aids
WARNING: Do not use the system
with accessories that extend beyond the
front or rear of your vehicle, for example a
trailer hitch, bike rack or side mirror
extensions such as telescoping mirrors or
towing mirrors. The system is not able to
make corrections for the additional length
of the accessories.
The system assists parking into and out of
parking spaces. Sensors are used to detect
parking spaces. The system then steers,
accelerates, brakes and shifts gear as
required to maneuver into or out of a parking
space.
Using Active Park Assist
E301
E301
1
1
12
12
The parking aid button is above the
transmission selector, just below the display
screen.
Press the parking aid button then touch the
active park assist icon on the display screen
to bring up full screen notifications. Touch
the soft keys on the display screen to switch
between parallel park in, perpendicular park
in or parallel park out parking modes.
Driving into a Parking Space
Note: The system detects other vehicles and
curbs to find a parking space.
Note: The system does not recognize
parking space lines and centers your vehicle
between objects.
Note: When parking perpendicularly, the
system backs your vehicle into parking
spaces.
1. Press the parking aid button.
2. Touch the active park assist icon on the
touchscreen.
Note: The system searches for parallel
parking spaces on the passenger side.
Touch the perpendicular park in icon on the
touchscreen to make the system search for
perpendicular spaces.
3. Use the direction indicator lever to
search for a parking space on the driver
or passenger side of your vehicle.
4. Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
away from and parallel to the other
parked vehicles when searching for a
parking space.
Note: A tone sounds and a message
appears in the information display when
active park assist finds a suitable parking
space.
293
Parking Aids
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Release the steering wheel and shift into
neutral (N).
7. Press and hold the active park assist
button.
8. Release the brake pedal to allow the
vehicle to park.
Note: When parallel parking between
objects, the system parks closer to the object
in front of your vehicle to allow easier access
to your trunk.
Note: When perpendicular parking, the
system aligns the front end of your vehicle
with the lane side of the object next to it.
Note: When perpendicular parking, if the
system detects only one object, it allows
enough distance to open the door on either
side.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at
any time by pressing the brake pedal.
Note: When parking is complete the vehicle
shifts into park (P).
Leaving a Parking Space
The system assists leaving only parallel
parking spaces.
1. Press the parking aid button.
2. Use the direction indicator lever to
choose the direction to leave.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Release the steering wheel and shift into
neutral (N).
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Press and hold the active park assist
button.
7. Release the brake pedal to allow the
vehicle to move.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at
any time by pressing the brake pedal.
Note: After the system drives your vehicle
to a position where you can exit the parking
space in a forward movement, a message
appears instructing you to take full control
of your vehicle.
Canceling Active Park Assist
To cancel parking assistance at any time,
shift out of neutral (N).
Note: If you turn the steering wheel or open
the driver door, the parking assistance also
cancels.
Pausing Active Park Assist
To pause parking assistance at any time,
release the parking aid button.
The vehicle stops moving until you press and
hold the parking aid button again.
Note: If you open the passenger or rear
doors, the parking assistance also pauses.
294
Parking Aids
Active Park Assist Information Messages
ActionMessage
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Active Park Fault
Active Park Assist Troubleshooting
Possible CauseSymptom
The system is unable to detect a vehicle, curb or object to park next to or in-between.The system does not correctly operate.
You may have switched traction control off.The system does not search for a parking space.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, ice or large accumulations of dirt.
Blocked sensors can affect how the system functions.
The system does not offer a parking space.
The sensors in the front or rear bumper could be damaged.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than 2 ft (0.5 m) away.
295
Parking Aids
Possible CauseSymptom
The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel parking or greater than
19 mph (30 km/h) for perpendicular parking.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After you reconnect the battery you
must drive your vehicle on a straight road for a short period of time.
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from correctly aligning
your vehicle.
The system does not correctly position your vehicle
in a parking space.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be correctly parked.
Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained. For example, not inflated correctly,
improper size, or of different sizes.
A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving
truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects changes after your vehicle passes
the space.
You are using a spare tire or a tire that is significantly worn more than the other tires.
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes. For example, driving from a
heated garage into cold outside temperature, or after leaving a car wash.
296
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement device
that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image could be
incorrect. All guide lines disappear when
the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Use caution when turning
camera features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make sure
your vehicle is not moving.
Note: Some vehicles may not come
equipped with guidelines.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display
which represent your vehicle’s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
E288858
The camera is on the luggage compartment
door.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
297
Parking Aids
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show the
intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of your
vehicle with an object (for example, a
trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and
the luggage compartment door is open, no
rear view camera features display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
You can also use the rear washer to
clean the camera. See Rear Window
Wiper and Washers (page 109).
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to become
misaligned.
Camera System Settings
Depending on your vehicle options, the rear
view camera system settings may be in the
following:
• Information display. See General
Information (page 136).
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 555).
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelines (If equipped)A
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
298
Parking Aids
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change the
steering wheel position while reversing, your
vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not display
when the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E1
90
4
59
The system provides an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
highlight green, yellow and red when the
parking aid sensors detect an object in the
coverage area.
Rear Camera On Demand (If Equipped)
Press the camera button while in park (P),
neutral (N) or drive (D) and under a speed of
6 mph (10 km/h) to bring up the rear camera
view in the display screen. The guidelines
appear as white and you are able to use the
manual zoom feature by pressing the zoom
button on the display screen.
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom
in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in
the camera screen to change the view. The
default setting is Zoom OFF.
299
Parking Aids
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R).
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera delay
is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
360 DEGREE CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The 360 degree camera
system still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of the
windows, and checking the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Use caution when turning
camera features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make sure
your vehicle is not moving.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Note: Use caution using the 360 view when
any of the doors are ajar. If a door is ajar,
the camera will be out of position and the
video image may be incorrect.
The 360 degree camera system consists of
front, side and rear cameras. The system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in front
or behind your vehicle.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
300
Parking Aids
• Allows you to see a top-down view of the
area outside your vehicle, including the
blind spots.
• Provides visibility around your vehicle to
you in parking maneuvers such as:
• Centering in a parking space.
• Obstacles near vehicle.
• Parallel parking.
E205884
The front camera enable button is
located near the display screen
and turns on the front camera
when your vehicle is not in reverse (R). This
camera is only available at slow parking
speeds.
Using the System
Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
off when your vehicle is in motion at low
speed, except when in reverse (R).
The front and rear cameras have multiple
screens which consist of: normal view with
360, normal view, and split view. When in
park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only the front
images display when you press the button.
When in reverse (R), only the rear images
display.
E224483
Press to access the different
camera views.
E224783
Normal + 360 view: Contains the
normal camera view next to a 360
degree camera view.
E224784
Normal view: Provides an image
of what is directly in front or behind
your vehicle.
E224785
Split view: Provides an extended
view of what is in front or behind
your vehicle.
E224485
Zooms in on the image.
Keep Out Zone
E225016
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle. It is designed to give you the
indication on the ground of the fully
extended outside mirror position.
Front Camera
WARNING: The front camera system
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.
301
Parking Aids
Note: The system turns off the front video
image when your vehicle is in motion at low
speed, except when in reverse (R).
E288873
The front video camera is on the grille. It
provides a video image of the area in front
of your vehicle. It adds assistance to the
driver while driving forward at low speeds.
To use the front video camera system, place
the transmission in any gear except reverse
(R). An image displays once you press the
front camera enable button. The image on
the screen may vary according to your
vehicle's orientation or road condition.
Side Camera
E250816
The side view camera, located in the outside
mirror, provides a video image of the area
on the sides of your vehicle as part of the
front 360 + normal view and rear 360 +
normal view. It aids you while parking your
vehicle either forward or backwards.
302
Parking Aids
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
Requirements
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed
is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h).
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL ON
AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when
the road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
E71340
Press the button to put the system
in standby mode.
Switching Cruise Control Off
E71340
Press the button when in standby
mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: When you switch cruise control off the
set speed clears.
SETTING THE CRUISE CONTROL
SPEED
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The system
does not apply the brakes.
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press either button to set the
current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color in the
information display.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release the button to
increase the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the button to accelerate.
Release the button when you reach your
preferred speed.
Press and release the button to
decrease the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the button to decelerate.
Release the button when you reach your
preferred speed.
303
Cruise Control
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E281471
Press the button, or tap the brake
pedal to cancel the set speed.
Note: The system remembers the set speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
E281472
Press the button.
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATORS
E71340
Illuminates when you switch the
system on.
304
Cruise Control
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO
WORK
Adaptive cruise control with stop and go
uses radar and camera sensors to adjust the
speed of your vehicle to maintain a set gap
from the vehicle in front of you in the same
lane while following it to a complete stop.
You can also engage the system to follow a
vehicle in front of you and adjust set speed
while stopped.
WHAT IS ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH LANE CENTERING
Adaptive cruise control with lane centering
uses radar and camera sensors to help keep
your vehicle in the lane by applying
continuous assistance steering torque input
toward the lane center on highways.
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap setting
operates normally.
WHAT IS INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL
Intelligent adaptive cruise control combines
speed sign recognition with adaptive cruise
control to adjust the cruise set speed to the
speed limit detected by the speed sign
recognition system. For example, if the speed
sign recognition system detects a 50 mph
(80 km/h) speed limit, the cruise set speed
is updated to 50 mph (80 km/h) +/- the
driver's selected speed offset.
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap setting
operates normally.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS - VEHICLES WITH:
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
WITH LANE CENTERING
Adaptive cruise control precautions apply to
lane centering unless stated otherwise or
contradicted by a lane centering precaution.
See Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions
(page 306).
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not use the system if
any changes or modifications to the
steering wheel have been made. Any
changes or modifications to the steering
wheel could affect the functionality or
performance of the system. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
305
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS - VEHICLES WITH:
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
WITH STOP AND GO
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions such as entering
or leaving a highway, on roads with
intersections or roundabouts, roads
without visible lanes of travel, roads that
are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
slopes.
WARNING: The system does not
control speed in low traction conditions or
extremely steep slopes. The system is
designed to be an aid and does not relieve
you of your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: The system is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has aftermarket
electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with a snow plow blade installed.
WARNING: Do not use the system in
poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
When Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a vehicle
that is braking, your vehicle does not
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid
a crash without driver intervention. Apply
the brakes when necessary. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
306
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep grades,
for example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent it
from overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for an
extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS - VEHICLES WITH:
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
WITH LANE CENTERING
Adaptive cruise control limitations apply to
lane centering unless stated otherwise or
contradicted by a lane centering limitation.
See Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations
(page 307).
The system may not correctly operate in any
of the following conditions:
• The lane is too narrow or wide.
• The system does not detect at least one
lane marking or when lanes merge or
split.
• Limited steering torque input is applied.
• Areas under construction or new
infrastructure.
• When modifications to the steering
system have been made.
• When using a spare tire.
Note: The driving assistance torque is limited
and may not be sufficient for all driving
situations such as driving through tight
curves or driving through curves at high
speeds.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
may deviate from the center line.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS - VEHICLES WITH:
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
WITH STOP AND GO
Sensor Limitations
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
WARNING: Large contrasts in outside
lighting can limit sensor performance.
307
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
WARNING: The system only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning
or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: The system may not
detect stationary or slow moving vehicles
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: The system does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
WARNING: The system does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in a
false or missed warning.
E307893
E307893
The camera is mounted on the windshield
behind the interior mirror.
E307892
E307892
The radar sensor is in the lower grille.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is behind
a fascia panel.
Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of
dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors, aftermarket lights, additional
paint or plastic coatings could also degrade
sensor performance.
A message displays if something obstructs
the camera or the sensor. When something
blocks the sensor, the system cannot detect
a vehicle ahead and does not function. See
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work (page 305).
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle image does not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.
308
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Detection issues can occur:
E71621
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
B With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a
bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detection.
Optimal system performance requires a clear
view of the road by the windshield-mounted
camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL ON AND OFF
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 104).
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
E144529
Press the button to set the system
in standby mode.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off
E144529
Press the button when the system
is in standby mode, or switch the
ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Automatic Cancellation or Deactivation
The system may cancel if:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
309
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The system may cancel and set the parking
brake if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open the
driver door after you stop your vehicle.
• Your vehicle is at a stop continuously for
more than three minutes.
The system may turn off or prevent activating
when requested if:
• The vehicle has a blocked sensor.
• The brake temperature is too high.
• There is a failure in the system or a
related system.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL SPEED
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press either button to set the
current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E2556
686
E2556
686
6
A vehicle image illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information
display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
from a Complete Stop
Press and release either button
while keeping the brake pedal fully
pressed.
The set speed adjusts to 20 mph (30 km/h).
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Note: The system activates from a complete
stop only when it detects a lead vehicle in
close proximity.
Manually Changing the Set Speed
Press and release to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and release to decrease the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold either button to change the
set speed in large increments. Release the
button when the set speed shown is equal
to the speed you prefer.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the speed you prefer. Press either
button to select the current speed as the set
speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
310
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL GAP
Press the button to cycle through
the four gap settings.
E2556
686
E2556
686
6
The selected gap appears in the instrument
cluster display as shown by the bars in the
image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent and
therefore, the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
Behavior
Gap DistanceGraphic
Display,
Bars Indic-
ated
Between
Vehicles
Sport.Closest.1
Normal.Close.2
Normal.Medium.3
Comfort.Far.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Following a Vehicle
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the
same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to
maintain the gap setting.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a turn signal lamp, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small,
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from
the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of
the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow down
your vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front of you. The system
only applies limited braking. You can
override the system by applying the brakes.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
instrument cluster display and an indicator
flashes when the system continues to brake.
Take immediate action.
311
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E281471
Press the button or tap the brake
pedal.
The set speed does not erase.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
E281472
Press the button.
Your vehicle speed returns to the previously
set speed and gap setting. The set speed
displays continuously in the information
display when the system is active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Resuming the Set Speed from a
Complete Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete
stop and remains stationary for less than
three seconds, your vehicle accelerates from
a stationary position to follow the vehicle
ahead.
E281472
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to
a complete stop and remains
stationary for more than three
seconds, press and release the button or
press the accelerator pedal to follow the
vehicle ahead.
OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED
WARNING: If you override the system
by pressing the accelerator pedal, it does
not automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
Use the accelerator pedal to intentionally
exceed the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the green
indicator illuminates and the vehicle icon
does not appear in the instrument cluster
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower
speed if following a slower vehicle.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS - VEHICLES WITH:
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
WITH LANE CENTERING
E262175
Illuminates when you switch lane
centering on. The color of the
indicator changes to indicate the
system status.
Gray indicates the system is on but inactive.
Green indicates the system is active and
applying assistance steering torque input to
keep your vehicle in the center of the lane.
Amber with an audible tone and then gray
indicates a system auto-cancellation.
312
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS - VEHICLES WITH:
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
WITH STOP AND GO
E144529
Illuminates when you switch
adaptive cruise control on. The
color of the indicator changes to
indicate the system status.
White indicates the system is on but inactive.
Green indicates that you set the speed and
the system is active.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS - VEHICLES WITH:
INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL
E292490
A bracket appears around the set speed and
the detected speed limit sign in the
information display.
System Warnings
If the set speed is increased beyond the
speed limit or speed limit plus a positive
tolerance value, the set speed indicator
flashes.
The warning does not occur if:
• You override the set speed using the
accelerator pedal.
• The vehicle speed exceeds the set speed
due to being on a downhill slope.
SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNING: Normal cruise control will
not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Driver Assist.
3. Select Cruise Control.
4. Select Normal.
313
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
The cruise control indicator
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, and the system does not respond
to lead vehicles. Automatic braking remains
active to maintain set speed. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
SWITCHING LANE CENTERING ON
AND OFF
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 104).
E297977
Press the button.
The indicator appears in the information
display. When the system is on, the color of
the indicator changes to indicate the system
status. See Adaptive Cruise Control
Indicators (page 312).
Note: Adaptive cruise control must be on
before you can switch lane centering on.
Activating Lane Centering
The system only activates when all of the
following occur:
• You have adaptive cruise control with
stop-and-go on.
• The vehicle is centered in the lane.
• Your hands are on the steering wheel at
all times.
• The system detects both lane markings.
Note: If it does not detect valid lane
markings, the system stays inactive until
valid markings are available.
You can override the system at any time by
steering your vehicle.
When lane centering is active and the
direction indicator is switched on, the system
immediately cancels. The system remains in
standby mode as long as the direction
indicator is engaged. The system re-activates
automatically once the vehicle is centered
in a lane and the direction indicator is
switched off.
System Alerts and Automatic
Cancellation
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
When the system is active and detects no
steering activity for a certain period of time,
the system alerts you to put your hands on
the steering wheel. If you do not react to the
warnings the system cancels and slows your
vehicle down to idle speeds while
maintaining steering control.
The system also alerts you if your vehicle
crosses lane markings without detected
steering activity.
Note: The system may detect a light grip or
touch on the steering wheel as hands-off
driving.
When the system is cancelled due to an
external condition, for example, no lane
markings are available and your hands are
not on the steering wheel, the system
immediately alerts you to take control of the
vehicle. If this alert is ignored, the system
slows the vehicle while maintaining steering
control.
314
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Note: There are instances where the system
can cancel without displaying a message in
the information display.
E281472
If your vehicle starts to slow down,
you must provide steering input to
the wheel and press and release
the button to regain full system performance.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
• The lane becomes too wide or too
narrow.
• The system cannot detect valid lane
markings.
• Lane markings are crossed.
Note: The system disables until the next key
cycle if your vehicle slows down due to driver
inactivity twice within a key cycle.
SWITCHING INTELLIGENT MODE
ON AND OFF
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Cruise Control.
4. Press Intelligent.
Changing the Set Speed with
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
When intelligent mode is on, the system
adjusts the set speed to the speed limit
detected by the camera and the speed limit
information provided by the navigation
system.
Note: The set speed adjusts when the
system detects a different maximum speed
limit.
Note: The speed limit information provided
by the navigation map data may be
inaccurate or out of date. See Navigation
(page 538).
Note: The system alerts you if the set speed
increases beyond the speed limit. See
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators (page
312).
If the system does not detect a speed limit,
the vehicle speed remains at the current set
speed.
You can override the set speed at any time.
You may need to override or cancel the
system in certain situations such as inclement
weather or if an incorrect speed is set.
Note: The system may not detect and read
speed limit signs with conditional
information, for example, when a sign is
flashing, during specific time ranges, or when
children are present.
315
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Note: Under certain conditions, the system
may not adjust the vehicle speed until after
your vehicle passes the speed limit sign.
ADJUSTING THE SET SPEED
TOLERANCE
You can set a permanent speed tolerance
that is above or below the detected speed
limit.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Cruise Control.
4. Press Intelligent.
5. Press Tolerance.
6. Use + and - to set the tolerance.
Note: You cannot set the tolerance more
than 20 mph (30 km/h) above or below the
recognized speed.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL –
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL –
INFORMATION MESSAGES - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
WITH LANE CENTERING
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all messages
display or are available.
Note: The system could abbreviate or
shorten certain messages depending upon
which cluster type you have.
ActionMessage
Return your hands to the steering wheel and provide steering input to cancel the message.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
To reset the feature when the vehicle is stationary, return the gear selector to park and turn the
vehicle off. Restart the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal.
Lane Centering Assist Not Available
You must immediately take full control of the vehicle.Resume Control
Resume adaptive cruise control with lane centering by applying foot pressure on the accelerator
pedal. You can also resume the feature by pressing the resume button on the steering wheel.
Press Accelerator Pedal to Resume
316
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL –
INFORMATION MESSAGES - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
WITH STOP AND GO
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all messages
display or are available.
Note: The system could abbreviate or
shorten certain messages depending upon
which cluster type you have.
ActionMessage
A malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation.
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.Adaptive Cruise Not Available
You have a blocked radar because of poor radar visibility due to inclement weather or ice, mud,
or water in front of the radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve this.
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual
block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments. A false
blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle.
You have selected normal cruise control. The system does not brake or react to traffic.Normal Cruise Active Adaptive Braking Off
Displays when the adaptive cruise control is going to cancel and you must take control.Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise control and there is
no lead vehicle in range.
Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to
Activate
317
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL –
INFORMATION MESSAGES - VEHICLES
WITH: INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all messages
display or are available.
Note: Certain messages may be abbreviated
or shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
ActionMessage
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.Intelligent Cruise Control Speed Sign
Recognition Not Available
318
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
DRIVER ALERT
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks
if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system
to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles may
result in the system warning you even if
you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system remembers the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
When below the activation speed, the
information display informs the driver that
the system is unavailable.
E249505
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your reduced
driving alertness is below a certain threshold,
the system alerts you using a tone and a
message in the cluster display.
319
Driving Aids
USING DRIVER ALERT
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 136).
When active, the system monitors your
alertness level based upon your driving
behavior in relation to the lane markings, and
other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
Note: If you receive a warning you should
consider resting, even if the current
assessment is within the typical range.
The warning system has two stages. At first,
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message only
appears for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
it may issue another warning that remains in
the information display for a longer time. You
can press OK on the steering wheel control
to clear the warning.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on your
vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: Large contrasts in outside
lighting can limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in a
false or missed warning.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
320
Driving Aids
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: When you select Aid or Alert and Aid
mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
The system may detect a light grip or touch
on the steering wheel as hands off driving.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
E249505
When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your lane
is likely to occur, the system notifies or
assists you to stay in your lane through the
steering system and information display. In
Alert mode, the system provides a warning
by vibrating the steering wheel. In Aid mode,
the system provides steering assistance by
gently counter steering your vehicle back
into the lane.
When the system is functioning in the
combined Alert and Aid mode, the system
first provides steering assistance by gently
counter steering your vehicle back into the
lane, followed by a warning that vibrates the
steering wheel if the vehicle is still out of the
lane markings.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The on or off setting is stored until it
is manually changed, unless a MyKey is
detected. If the system detects a MyKey, it
defaults to on and the mode sets to Alert.
E288067
Press the button on the direction indicator
stalk to switch the system on or off.
321
Driving Aids
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. The system stores the last known
selection for each of these settings. You do
not need to readjust your settings each time
you switch the system on.
Mode: This setting allows you to select which
of the system features you can enable.
E165515
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
E165516
E165516
Aid only – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center when the system
detects an unintended lane departure.
E165517
Alert.A
Aid.B
Alert and Aid – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the
lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the
vehicle, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
If your vehicle stays to one side of the lane
after the lane keeping aid corrects your
vehicle and then subsequently drifts out of
the lane again, the system only provides an
Alert at the steering wheel.
322
Driving Aids
Note: The Alert and Aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of
the steering wheel vibration used for the
Alert and Alert and Aid modes. This setting
does not affect the Aid mode.
• Low.
• Normal.
• High.
System Display
E272890
When you switch the system on, a graphic
of lane markings appears in the information
display.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
While the system is on, the color of the lane
markings change to indicate the system
status. These colors represent the following:
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side. This may be because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The direction indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or fog,
following a large vehicle that is blocking
or shadowing the lane or poor headlamp
illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side.
Animated graphic: Indicates that the system
is providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
323
Driving Aids
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using the direction indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
• Driving too close to the lane markings.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last Alert warning or Aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
324
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid or Aid and Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
325
Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not use the blind spot
information system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. The blind spot information
system is not a replacement for careful
driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
55695
E2
55695
The design of the system is to detect
vehicles that could have entered the blind
spot zone. The detection area is on both
sides of your vehicle, extending rearward
from the exterior mirrors to approximately
13 ft (4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The
detection area extends to approximately
59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when
the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h) to alert you of faster approaching
vehicles.
Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It does not detect parked
vehicles, pedestrians, animals or other
infrastructures.
Using the Blind Spot Information
System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the following
occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
System Lights and Messages
326
Driving Aids
When the system detects a vehicle, an alert
indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on
the side the approaching vehicle is coming
from. If you turn the direction indicator on for
that side of your vehicle, the alert indicator
flashes.
Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.
Blocked Sensors
E205199
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause
false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor.
We recommend switching the feature off
when using a bike or cargo rack.
If the sensors become blocked, a message
could appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 142). The alert
indicators remain illuminated but the system
does not alert you.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning lamp
illuminates and a message displays. See
Information Messages (page 142).
Switching the System On and Off
To switch the system on or off, adjust the
setting. Depending on your vehicle options,
the setting could be in the following:
• Information display. See General
Information (page 136).
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 555).
When you switch the system off, a warning
lamp illuminates and the alert indicators flash
twice.
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow (If Equipped)
E293525
327
Driving Aids
The design of the system is to aid you in
detecting vehicles that could have entered
the detection area zone (A). The detection
area is on both sides of your vehicle and
trailer, extending rearward from the exterior
mirrors to the end of your trailer. When you
attach and have setup a trailer, the blind spot
information system with trailer tow becomes
active when driving forward above 6 mph
(10 km/h).
You can switch the system off in the
information display. See General Information
(page 136). If you switch the blind spot
information system off, blind spot information
system with trailer tow turns off.
Setting up a Trailer
You can setup a trailer through the
information display. See General Information
(page 136).
E293526
Trailer length.A
Trailer width.B
Trailer hitch ball.C
Note: Measure the width of the trailer at the
front of the trailer, not the widest point. The
maximum width that the system can support
is 8.2 ft (2.5 m)(B).
Note: The trailer length is the distance
between the trailer hitch ball and the rear of
the trailer. The maximum length that the
system can support is 33 ft (10 m)(A).
When setting up a trailer, a sequence of
screens appear asking for trailer information:
• Select trailer screen: None, Trailer A,
Trailer B or Trailer C.
Note: You can select only one trailer on
small information displays.
Select one of the trailers and press OK. The
menu goes to the next screen.
• Width less than 8.2 ft (2.5 m) and length
less than 33 ft (10 m)?
Note: You do not need to enter an exact
trailer width measurement. You only need
to confirm that the width of the trailer is 8.2 ft
(2.5 m) or less.
If no, the system turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
• Enter length of trailer:
Toggling up or down using the menu buttons
increases or decreases the measurement by
3 ft (1 m). Select a length that is equal to or
within 3 ft (1 m) of the actual measured
length. For example, if the actual measured
length is 25 ft (7.6 m), toggle the length in
the menu to 8 m or 27 ft. When you enter the
length of the trailer, this saves the system
setup.
328
Driving Aids
Note: When you connect a trailer, but do not
setup a trailer in the blind spot information
system, the system turns off and a warning
appears in the information display.
Note: If the trailer is a bike rack or cargo
rack with electrical lighting, enter a length
of 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert remains on
for trailers with a length of 3 ft (1 m) or less.
Note: The system requires proper
measurement and measurement entry to
function as designed.
System Operation
If you select a trailer in the information
display prior to connecting a trailer, the
system loads that configuration and the
information display shows a message when
you connect the trailer. A second message
appears stating cross traffic alert is off, unless
a trailer is set up with a length of 3 ft (1 m).
The blind spot information system with trailer
tow still functions normally when driving
forward.
If you connect a trailer, a message appears
indicating that you attached a trailer. If you
have not selected a trailer previously,
another message appears requesting you to
select one of the trailers in the list or add a
new trailer. The blind spot information system
with trailer tow does not function without a
trailer selected. If you do not select a trailer,
a message appears in the information display
stating it has turned off the system. This
message might not appear until your vehicle
speed reaches 22 mph (35 km/h).
The blind spot information system with trailer
tow activates when driving forward for that
particular trailer set up. If you cycle the
ignition, the blind spot information system
with trailer tow continues to function using
the last trailer you selected.
Trailer Considerations
The system works with a trailer with a front
width of 8.2 ft (2.5 m) or less, and a total
length from the trailer hitch ball to the rear
of the trailer of 33 ft (10 m) or less.
Some trailers could cause a slight change in
system performance:
• Wide box trailers, especially those wider
than the towing vehicle, could cause false
alerts to occur when driving next to
infrastructure or near parked cars. A false
alert could also occur while making a
90-degree turn or driving through a
roundabout.
• Wide trailers that have a total length
greater than 20 ft (6 m) could cause
delayed alerts when a vehicle is passing
at high speeds.
• Box trailers that have a width greater than
8.2 ft (2.5 m) could cause early alerts
when you pass a vehicle.
• Clam shell or V-Nose box trailers with a
width greater than 8.2 ft (2.5 m) could
cause delayed alerts when a vehicle
traveling the same speed as your vehicle
merges lanes.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning lamp
illuminates and a message displays. See
Information Messages (page 142).
329
Driving Aids
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch the blind spot information
system with trailer tow off by not selecting a
trailer in the information display. See General
Information (page 136). In this case, the
system turns off as long as a trailer is
attached to your vehicle. As soon as you
disconnect the trailer, the blind spot
information system becomes active.
When you switch the system off, a warning
lamp illuminates and the alert indicators flash
twice.
Note: The system remembers the last trailer
setting when you start your vehicle.
You cannot switch off the blind spot
information system with trailer tow when
using MyKey, but you can still change the
trailer settings. See MyKey™ (page 78).
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
reversing out of a parking space. The cross
traffic alert system is not a replacement for
careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
The system alerts you of vehicles
approaching from the sides behind your
vehicle when you shift into reverse (R).
Using Cross Traffic Alert
The system detects vehicles that approach
at a speed between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when
the sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.
The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of reverse
(R).
330
Driving Aids
E14244
0
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
331
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at narrow angles. The sensor on the left-hand
side is mostly obstructed and zone coverage
on that side is severely reduced.
332
Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors
E205199
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause
false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor.
We recommend switching the feature off
when using a bike or cargo rack.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when you
shift into reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert System Limitations
The system may not correctly operate when
any of the following occur:
• The sensors are blocked.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects are
obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When
Trailer is Attached
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an
approved trailer tow module and tow bar,
the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
Cross traffic alert remains on when you
attach a trailer in vehicles that come with
blind spot information system with trailer tow
under the following conditions:
• You connect a trailer.
• The trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack
with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m).
• You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m) in
the information display.
See Blind Spot Information System (page
326).
Switching the System On and Off
To switch the system on or off, adjust the
setting. Depending on your vehicle options,
the setting could be in the following:
• Information display. See General
Information (page 136).
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 555).
Note: The system turns on every time you
switch the ignition on. To permanently switch
the system off, contact an authorized dealer.
333
Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert Indicator
E268294
When the system detects an
approaching vehicle, a tone
sounds, a warning lamp illuminates
in the relevant exterior mirror and arrows
appear in the information display to show
which side the approaching vehicle is coming
from.
Note: If arrows do not display, a message
appears in the information display.
If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp
illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
message appears in the information display.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you, even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing further away from your vehicle.
Cross Traffic Alert Information Messages
ActionMessage
Displays instead of indication arrows when the system detects a vehicle. Check for approaching
traffic.
Cross Traffic Alert
Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Clean the sensors. If the message continues
to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.Cross Traffic System Fault
Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.Cross Traffic Alert Deactivated Trailer
Attached
334
Driving Aids
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION (IF
EQUIPPED)
Principle of Operation
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
The system is designed to detect speed limit
signs to inform you of the current speed limit.
Detected speed signs appear in the
information display. The sensor is behind the
interior mirror.
Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs in
the immediate area surrounding the sensor.
Note: Speed sign data provided by the
navigation system contains information
integrated to the data carrier release.
Note: The system may not detect or correctly
read all speed signs.
Note: If your vehicle has a suspension kit
not approved by us, the system may not
correctly function.
Note: Always replace headlamp bulbs with
those specifically designed for your vehicle.
Other bulbs could reduce system
performance.
The system turns on when you switch the
ignition on, and you cannot switch the system
off.
Using Speed Sign Recognition
Setting the System Speed Warning
You can set the system speed warning to
alert you when the vehicle speed exceeds
the speed limit recognized by the system by
a certain speed tolerance.
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
System Display
E317824
E317824
When the system detects a speed limit sign,
the speed limit appears in the information
display.
335
Driving Aids
Note: If your vehicle has a navigation
system, stored speed sign data could
influence the indicated speed limit value.
To switch the system off or to adjust the
settings, use the touchscreen:
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Speed Sign Recognition.
4. Press Speed Warning.
5. Press Tolerance.
6. Use + and - to set the tolerance.
Information Messages
ActionMessage
The traffic sign data provided by the navigation system is unavailable
due to a weak signal, or no signal. Wait for a short period of time for
the signal to improve. If the message continues to appear, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Traffic Sign Reduced Performance See Manual
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If a fault
is detected, a message displays in the
information display. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the system detects an
error, you may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition may
exist. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible. Failure to do so may result in
loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir and
therefore requires no maintenance.
336
Driving Aids
If your vehicle loses electrical power when
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can manually steer your
vehicle. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering could increase
the effort you need to steer your vehicle. This
increased effort prevents overheating and
permanent damage to the steering system.
You do not lose the ability to manually steer
your vehicle. Typical steering and driving
maneuvers allow the system to cool and
operate as normal.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds could also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning improves overall handling
and steering on roads with irregularities. It
communicates with the brake system to help
operate advanced stability control and
accident avoidance systems. When you
install a new battery or disconnect the
battery, you need to drive your vehicle a
short distance so it can relearn and reactivate
all systems.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
different direction, cyclists or animals.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead to
a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during cold
and severe weather conditions. Snow, ice,
rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the
system. Keep the front camera and radar
free of snow and ice. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
337
Driving Aids
WARNING: In situations where the
vehicle camera has limited detection
capability, this may reduce system
performance. These situations include but
are not limited to direct or low sunlight,
vehicles at night without tail lights,
unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians
with complex backgrounds, running
pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians,
or pedestrians that the system cannot
distinguish from a group. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system cannot help
prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain a safe distance and
speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist System
The system is active at speeds above
approximately3 mph (5 km/h)and pedestrian
detection is active at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h).
E1
56
1
30
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching another
stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the
same direction as yours, or a pedestrian
within your driving path, the system is
designed to provide three levels of
functionality:
1. Alert.
2. Brake Support.
3. Active Braking.
E255268
E255268
Alert: When active, a flashing visual warning
appears and an audible warning tone
sounds.
Brake Support: The system is designed to
help reduce the impact speed by preparing
the brakes for rapid braking. Brake support
does not automatically apply the brakes. If
you press the brake pedal, the system could
apply additional braking up to maximum
braking force, even if you lightly press the
brake pedal.
Active Braking: Active braking may activate
if the system determines that a collision is
imminent. The system may help the driver
reduce impact damage or avoid the crash
completely.
Note: Brake support and active braking are
active at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h). If
your vehicle has a radar sensor included
with adaptive cruise control, then brake
support and active braking are active up to
the maximum speed of the vehicle.
338
Driving Aids
Note: If you perceive the pre-collision assist
alert as being too frequent or disturbing, you
can reduce the alert sensitivity. The low
sensitivity causes fewer and later warnings
of a potential forward collision. The
manufacturer recommends using the high
sensitivity setting where possible.
Note: The sensitivity setting does not affect
the performance of the automatic
emergency braking.
Note: The system turns off when you select
deep conditions or deep sand mode.
Distance Indication and Alert (If Equipped)
This is a function that provides the driver with
a graphical indication of the time gap to other
preceding vehicles traveling in the same
direction. The system shows one of the
graphics that follow in the information
display.
E254797
If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is
small, a red visual indication displays to the
driver.
Note: The system turns off and the graphics
do not display when adaptive cruise control
is active.
Time
Gap
Distance
Gap
GraphicsSensit-
ivity
Speed
>0.9sec>82 ft
(25 m)
GreyNormal62 mph
(100 km/h)
0.6sec
—
0.9sec
56–82 ft
(17–25 m)
YellowNormal62 mph
(100 km/h)
<0.6sec
<56 ft
(17 m)
RedNormal62 mph
(100 km/h)
Evasive Steering Assist (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a road
user, this helps you steer around the road
user.
After you turn the steering wheel in an
attempt to avoid a crash with the road user,
the system applies additional steering torque
to help you steer around the road user. After
you pass the road user, the system applies
steering torque when you turn the steering
wheel to steer back into the lane. The system
turns off after you fully pass the road user.
339
Driving Aids
Note: Road users are defined as another
stationary vehicle in the same lane or a
vehicle traveling in the same lane in the
same direction as you.
Evasive steering assist only activates when
all the following occur:
• Automatic emergency braking and
evasive steering assist are on.
• The system detects a road user ahead
and starts to apply the brakes.
• You significantly turn the steering wheel
to steer around a road user.
Note: The system does not automatically
steer around a road user. If you do not turn
the steering wheel, the system does not
activate.
Note: The system does not activate if the
distance to the road user ahead is too small
and the system cannot avoid a crash.
Note: The system does not activate with
cyclists or pedestrians.
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the following settings by
using the touchscreen. See General
Information (page 136).
• You can change alert and distance alert
sensitivity to one of three possible
settings.
• You can switch distance indication and
alert on or off.
• If required, you can switch active braking
on or off.
• If required, you can switch evasive
steering assist on or off.
Note: Active braking and evasive steering
assist automatically turn on every time you
switch the ignition on.
Note: If you switch active braking off, evasive
steering assist turns off.
Blocked Sensors
E288869
E288869
Camera.1
Radar sensor (if equipped).2
If a message regarding a blocked sensor or
camera appears in the information display,
the radar signals or camera images are
obstructed. If your vehicle has a radar sensor,
it is behind the fascia cover in the center of
the lower grille. With a blocked sensor or
camera, the system may not function, or
performance may reduce. The following table
lists possible causes and actions for when
this message displays.
340
Driving Aids
Camera Troubleshooting
ActionCause
Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to detect
that there is no obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is clean but the message remains
in the display screen.
Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that there is no obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display screen.
The system is temporarily disabled. Pre-collision assist reactivates a
short time after the weather conditions improve.
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog is interfering with the radar signals.
The system is temporarily disabled. Pre-collision assist reactivates a
short time after the weather conditions improve.
Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front-end impact.
341
Driving Aids
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front-end of your
vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle
has a radar sensor, the radar sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false detections. Contact an authorized
dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
342
Driving Aids
WHAT IS DRIVE MODE CONTROL
The system delivers a driving experience
through a suite of sophisticated electronic
vehicle systems. These systems optimize
steering, handling and powertrain response.
This provides a single location to control
multiple systems performance settings.
Changing the drive mode automatically
changes the functionality of the following
systems:
• Electronically power-assisted steering
system adjusts steering effort and feel
based on the mode you select. See
Steering (page 336).
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintains your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving. See Stability Control (page 282).
• Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your driving
inputs.
• Transmission controls optimize with shift
schedules tuned to each mode.
• AWD settings become optimized and
tuned to each mode.
The system automatically tailors your vehicle
configuration for each mode you select.
Note: Not all settings, or modes, may be
available.
Note: The system has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system for proper
operation. If a mode is unavailable due to a
system fault, the mode defaults to Normal.
SELECTING A DRIVE MODE
Note: Drive mode changes may not be
available when the ignition is off.
E297680
E297680
Rotate the drive mode dial on the center
console to change the drive mode.
DRIVE MODES
CONSERVE
Enables efficient driving. It helps to deliver
maximum fuel efficiency and helps to
increase driving range.
DEEP CONDITIONS (If Equipped)
For crossing terrain that has deformable
deep, rutted surfaces such as mud, deep
sand or deep snow. Do not use on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
If your vehicle has air suspension, it raises
approximately 1.2 in (30 mm) at low speeds
for improved ground clearance.
Note: Using deep conditions mode on dry
hard surfaces could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, and potential excessive
tire wear. This mode is for slippery and loose
surfaces.
343
Drive Mode Control
DEEP SAND (If Equipped)
For crossing deep soft and dry sand.
Note: Using deep sand mode on dry hard
surfaces could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, and potential excessive
tire wear. This mode is for slippery and loose
surfaces.
EXCITE
For sporty on-road driving. This mode
increases throttle response, provides a more
dynamic powertrain sound and steering feel,
along with a more sporty shifting experience.
If your vehicle has continuously controlled
damping suspension it adjusts to a stiffer
suspension setting, with an emphasis on
handling and control. The transmission also
holds gears longer, helping your vehicle
accelerate faster when shifting gears.
If your vehicle has air suspension, it lowers
approximately 0.6 in (15 mm) to improve
aerodynamics.
NORMAL
For everyday driving. This mode is a perfect
balance of excitement, comfort and
convenience. This is the default mode after
each ignition cycle.
PRESERVE EV
Your vehicle runs the engine as needed to
save electric driving range for later use in
another drive mode. For example, you first
drive at high speeds on open roads where
engine operation is appropriate. Later, you
drive at low speeds in an urban area where
electric only is most efficient.
If the battery charge is low when you select
this mode, the engine begins to charge the
high voltage battery to provide some electric
range for later. See Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle
Operation (page 219).
PURE EV
This mode can provide an electric only
driving experience. Your vehicle could
accelerate slower, and the top speed could
be reduced. For more power, fully press the
accelerator pedal to temporarily engage the
engine.
Your vehicle could enable the engine if
system conditions require it. An engine
enabled message displays if this occurs.
The engine could enable if the climate
control is in a defrost mode and the outside
temperature is cold. If the vehicle does not
need defrost, select a different climate
control mode to permit pure EV.
Your vehicle changes from pure EV mode to
normal mode when the vehicle electric range
is zero.
Note: When in pure EV mode, your vehicle
stays in this mode if there is all electric
driving range available and the system does
not fault.
344
Drive Mode Control
SLIPPERY
For less than ideal road conditions, such as
snow or ice covered roads. Slippery mode
inspires confidence without taking away from
driving pleasure. Slippery mode lowers
throttle response and optimizes shifting for
slippery surfaces.
Note: Using slippery mode on dry hard
surfaces could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, and potential excessive
tire wear as the intent of this mode is for
slippery and loose surfaces.
345
Drive Mode Control
REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE
Cargo Management System
E201720
The system is located in the floor of the
cargo area. Lift the handle to open. There is
an additional cover that can be removed to
access the spare tire.
LUGGAGE COVERS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the posts
are properly latched in mounting features.
The cover may cause injury in a sudden
stop or accident if it is not securely
installed.
WARNING: Do not place any objects
on the cargo area shade. They may
obstruct your vision or strike occupants of
your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash.
Use the cargo shade to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
E14
2
2
447
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the
mounting features located behind the rear
seat on the rear trim panels to install the
cargo shade.
To operate the cargo shade:
1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade
rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support rod into
the retention slots located on the rear
quarter trim panels.
346
Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly distribute
the load, as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher
centers of gravity, may handle differently
than unloaded vehicles. Take extra
precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when driving
a heavily loaded vehicle.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars affixed
to the roof rack side rails. When using the
roof rack system, we recommend you use
Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed
specifically for your vehicle.
E291748
Make sure that you securely fasten the load.
Check the tightness of the load before
driving and at each fuel stop.
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
Maximum Recommended Load
Amounts
(If Equipped)
Note: The maximum recommended load is
based on the load being evenly distributed
on the crossbars.
Maximum Recommended LoadDescription
82 lb (37 kg)Vehicles with Moonroof
165 lb (75 kg)Vehicles without Moonroof
347
Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section guides you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both.
Keep your loaded vehicle weight within
its design rating capability, with or
without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before you
load your vehicle, become familiar with
the following terms for determining your
vehicle’s weight rating, with or without
a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
E198719
Payload
Payload is the combined weight of cargo
and passengers that your vehicle is
carrying. The maximum payload for your
vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading
label. The label is either on the B-pillar
or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and Canada
may not have a tire and loading label.
Look for “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb” for
maximum payload. The payload listed
on the Tire and Loading Information
label is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If
you install any additional equipment on
your vehicle, you must determine the
new payload. Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire and Loading label. When towing,
trailer tongue weight or king pin weight
is also part of payload.
348
Load Carrying
WARNING: The appropriate
loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity
(how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight
the vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum payload
of your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space available.
Overloading or improperly loading
your vehicle can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable weight
that a single axle (front or rear) can carry.
These numbers are on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes
all options, equipment, passengers and
cargo. It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E19882
8
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification label vehicle
weight limits can adversely affect the
performance and handling of your
vehicle, cause vehicle damage and
can result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is the
highest possible weight of a fully loaded
trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer
Towing Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed information.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the vehicle and the loaded trailer,
including all cargo and passengers, that
the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated for
349
Load Carrying
operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original
tires because they may lower your
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Replacement tires with a higher limit
than the original tires do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating can adversely
affect the performance and handling
of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage
and can result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury
or death.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
350
Load Carrying
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 -
495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 -
198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
front or the rear gross axle weight rating
specified for your vehicle on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
351
Load Carrying
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-
type Vehicles
WARNING: When loading the
roof racks, we recommend you evenly
distribute the load, as well as maintain
a low center of gravity. Loaded
vehicles, with higher centers of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a
heavily loaded vehicle.
AIR SUSPENSION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: If your vehicle has
self-leveling air suspension, you must
switch the system off before carrying out
any maintenance or repair. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
The air suspension system automatically
adjusts to maintain a constant frame height,
allows for ease of vehicle loading, provides
improved vehicle ride, and increased driver
comfort.
You can adjust different ride settings through
the selectable drive modes. See Selecting
a Drive Mode (page 343).
Note: The air suspension system may not
operate properly if you exceed the load limit.
See Load Limit (page 348).
Note: When your vehicle is off, the air
compressor may run for a short time. This is
normal.
Switching the systems on or off
You can access the air suspension, liftgate
and easy entry features through the
information display menu settings. See
General Information (page 136).
Using the Service Mode
When the service mode is active, the air
suspension does not make any adjustments
while your vehicle is stationary.
Note: Always switch the air suspension
service mode to on before servicing your
vehicle.
Using Cargo Loading
The air suspension cargo loading feature
lowers your vehicle for easier access when
the system detects the liftgate is opening.
When the liftgate is closed your vehicle
returns to its normal height after a short time.
Note: To preserve your vehicle battery, your
vehicle may only lower for cargo mode one
to two times per ignition cycle.
Using Easy Entry
The air suspension can lower your vehicle
to an easier access entry height when the
system detects the intelligent access key,
you press the unlock button, use the remote
start, or use Phone as a Key.
The leveling process stops when you open
a door or the target level is achieved.
Note: To stop the leveling process, press the
lock button on the intelligent access key.
352
Load Carrying
Note: To preserve your vehicle battery, your
vehicle may only lower for easy entry one to
two times per ignition cycle.
353
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit
of your vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Note: See Recommended Towing
Weights (page 356).
Your vehicle may have electrical items,
such as fuses or relays, related to
towing. See Fuses (page 382).
Your vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you
cannot necessarily use all available
space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect
these components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered
between the left and right side trailer
tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the correct
rise or drop and load capacity. When
both the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly angled
down toward your vehicle, when
viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in
another chapter of this manual. See
Load Limit (page 348).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
354
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine torque
to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer begins
to sway, the stability control warning lamp
flashes and a message appears in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 142). Slow your vehicle
down, pull safely to the side of the road and
check for correct load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 346).
When you switch the ignition on, the system
automatically turns on. You can switch this
feature off in the touchscreen.
355
Towing
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
WebsiteMarket
https://www
.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/United States of America
https://www.fleet.ford.ca/towing-guides/Canada
356
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 579).
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 348).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
A weight distributing hitch is not required for
your vehicle.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's
hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may
not have enough braking power and your
chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined weight
rating.
Safe control of towed vehicles requires
separate functioning brake systems for
vehicles and trailers weighing more than
1,500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
357
Towing
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer
lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring;
this may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Most towed vehicles require trailer lamps.
Make sure all running lights, brake lights,
direction indicators and hazard flashers are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in park
(P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included
with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
358
Towing
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the
rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear axle
lubricant, which is not normally checked or
changed unless a leak is suspected or other
axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the ignition
is in the accessory or on position when
being towed.
If your vehicle becomes inoperable without
access to wheel dollies or a vehicle transport
trailer, it can be flat-towed with all wheels on
the ground, regardless of the powertrain and
transmission configuration, under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing
in a forward direction.
• Refer to the Manual Park Release
procedure. See Automatic Transmission
(page 259). Failing to do so could result
in damage to the transmission.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Note: If you are unsure of the vehicle’s
configuration, contact an authorized dealer.
Recreational Towing - Front-Wheel
Drive Vehicles
(If Equipped)
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could occur.
Place the front wheels on a two-wheel tow
dolly. If you are using a tow dolly, follow the
instructions specified by the equipment
provider.
Recreational Towing - Rear-Wheel
Drive Vehicles (If Equipped)
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could occur.
We recommend towing your vehicle with all
four wheels off the ground, such as when
using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, you
cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
359
Towing
Recreational Towing - All-Wheel and
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles (If Equipped)
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could occur.
We recommend towing your vehicle with all
four wheels off the ground, such as when
using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, you
cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
360
Towing
REDUCED ENGINE PERFORMANCE
WARNING: If you continue to drive
your vehicle when the engine is
overheating, the engine could stop without
warning. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position, the
engine is overheating. See Gauges (page
128).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain. The
engine continues to operate with limited
power for a short period of time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine reduces. The
air conditioning switches off and the engine
cooling fan operates continually.
1. Gradually reduce your speed and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Immediately switch the engine off to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 404).
5. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
The functional operation of some
components and systems can be affected at
temperatures below approximately -13°F
(-25°C).
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During this
time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics.
DRIVING ECONOMICALLY
The following helps to improve fuel
consumption:
• Drive smoothly, accelerate gently and
anticipate the road ahead to avoid heavy
braking.
• Regularly check your tire pressures and
make sure that they are inflated to the
correct pressure.
• Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule and carry out the
recommended checks.
• Plan your journey and check the traffic
before you set off. It is more efficient to
combine errands into a single trip
whenever possible.
• Avoid idling the engine in cold weather
or for extended periods. Start the engine
only when you are ready to set off.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight in your
vehicle as extra weight wastes fuel.
361
Driving Hints
• Do not add unnecessary accessories to
the exterior of your vehicle, for example
running boards. If you use a roof rack,
remember to fold it down or remove it
when not in use.
• Do not shift into neutral when you are
braking or when your vehicle is slowing
down.
• Shut all windows when driving at high
speeds.
• Switch off all electric systems when not
in use, for example air conditioning. Make
sure that you unplug any accessories
from the auxiliary power points when not
in use.
DRIVING THROUGH SHALLOW
WATER
WARNING: Do not attempt to cross
a deep or flowing body of water. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the front rocker
area of your vehicle.
66
E2
66
44
7
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction could
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
Check the function of the following:
• Horn
• Exterior lights
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat designed
to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does
not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot move
freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
362
Driving Hints
WARNING: Secure the floor mat to
both retention devices so that it cannot slip
out of position and interfere with the
pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top of
the original floor mats. This could result in
the floor mat interfering with the operation
of the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects that
are loose can become trapped under the
pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
2
666
66
66
To install floor mats that have eyelets,
position the floor mat eyelet over the
retention post and press down to lock in
position. Repeat for all eyelets on the floor
mat.
To remove the floor mats, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make
sure they are secure.
363
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000 mi (110,000 km)
(whichever comes first) for subsequent
owners.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2 gal (8 L) of gasoline fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft (30 m)
of a paved or county maintained road,
no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (160 km)
of the disablement location or to the
nearest Lincoln dealer. If a client requests
a tow to a selling or preferred dealer that
is more than 100 mi (160 km) from the
disablement location, the client is
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (160 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle
is operational but the trailer is not, then
the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States clients who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-521-4140 or contact
Roadside Assistance using the Lincoln Way
mobile app.
364
Roadside Emergencies
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Lincoln reimburses a reasonable
amount for towing to the nearest Lincoln
dealership within 100 mi (160 km). To obtain
reimbursement information, United States
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Clients need to
submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, beginning from
the original warranty start date and lasts the
life of the vehicle for the original owner.
Subsequent owners receive coverage that
is concurrent with the 6 years or 70,000 mi
(110,000 km) (whichever occurs first)
powertrain warranty coverage period.
Note: Canadian roadside coverage and
benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details,
review your warranty guide, contact your
dealer, call us in Canada at 1-800-387-9333,
or visit our website at
www.lincolncanada.com.
If you purchased your vehicle in Canada and
require roadside assistance, please call
1-800-387-9333 or contact Roadside
Assistance using the Lincoln Way mobile
app.
Note: For quick reference, complete the
roadside assistance identification card found
in the glove compartment of your vehicle
and place it in your wallet.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when the
ignition is in any position, or if the key is not
in the ignition. If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery loses charge. As a result,
there may be insufficient power to restart
your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your hazard
flashers when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front and
rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the button again to switch them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not
restart after your third attempt, contact a
qualified technician.
365
Roadside Emergencies
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of fuel
to the engine in the event of a moderate to
severe crash. Not every impact causes a
shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat steps
1 through 4.
If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and START/STOP
to switch on your vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle by
pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat steps
1 through 4.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately
with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is
swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic
transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with
an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
366
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch.
Locating the Jump Starting Connection
Points
E288229
1. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 398).
2. Remove the access cover.
3. Remove the red protective cover from
the positive lead jump connection point.
4. Locate the negative jump connection
point on the rear mounting bolt for the
cross brace, as shown.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: If the engine is running
while the hood is open, stay clear of
moving engine components. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not connect the
negative jumper cable to any other part of
your vehicle. Use the ground point.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
E2
8
1
3
4
5
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
367
Roadside Emergencies
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
Note: If you are using a hybrid vehicle as the
booster vehicle, you do not need to rev the
engine.
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle
battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
COLLISION, DAMAGE OR FIRE
EVENT
Guidance for Ford Motor Company
Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicles
Equipped With High Voltage Batteries
(Vehicle Owner/Operator/General Public)
Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicle
Considerations
In the event of damage or fire involving an
electric vehicle or hybrid-electric vehicle:
• Always assume the high-voltage battery
and associated components are
energized and fully charged.
• Exposed electrical components, wires,
and high-voltage batteries present
potential high-voltage shock hazards.
• Venting high-voltage battery vapors are
potentially toxic and flammable.
• Physical damage to the vehicle or
high-voltage battery may result in
immediate or delayed release of toxic,
flammable gases and fire.
368
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicle information and general safety
practices:
• Know the make and model of your
vehicle.
• Review the owner’s manual and become
familiar with your vehicle’s safety
information and recommended safety
practices.
• Do not attempt to repair damaged
electric and hybrid-electric vehicles
yourself.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Crashes
A crash or impact significant enough to
require an emergency response for
conventional vehicles would also require the
same response for an electric or
hybrid-electric vehicle.
If possible:
• Move your vehicle to a safe, nearby
location and remain on the scene.
• Roll down the windows before switching
your vehicle off.
• Place your vehicle in park (P), set the
parking brake, switch off the vehicle,
activate the hazard warning flashers and
move your key(s) at least 15 ft (5 m) away
from the vehicle.
Always:
• Call emergency assistance if needed and
advise that an electric or hybrid-electric
vehicle is involved.
• Exposed electrical components, wires,
and high-voltage batteries present
potential high-voltage shock hazards.
• Avoid contact with leaking fluids and
gases, and remain out of the way of
oncoming traffic until emergency
responders arrive.
• When emergency responders arrive, tell
them that the vehicle involved is an
electric vehicle or hybrid-electric vehicle.
Fires
As with any vehicle, call emergency
assistance immediately if you see sparks,
smoke or flames coming from the vehicle.
Remain a safe distance from the vehicle and
try to stay clear of the smoke.
• Exit the vehicle immediately.
• Advise emergency assistance that an
electric or hybrid-electric vehicle is
involved.
• As with any vehicle fire, do not inhale
smoke, vapors or gas from the vehicle,
as they may be hazardous.
• Stay out of the roadway and stay out of
the way of any oncoming traffic while
awaiting the arrival of emergency
responders.
369
Roadside Emergencies
Post-Incident
• Do not store a severely damaged vehicle
with a lithium-ion battery inside a
structure or within 49 ft (15 m) of any
structure or vehicle.
• Make sure that passenger and luggage
compartments remain ventilated.
• Call emergency assistance if you observe
leaking fluids, sparks, smoke or flames,
or hear gurgling or bubbling from the
high-voltage battery.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the remote
entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled in
specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E14
3886
370
Roadside Emergencies
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure. If
you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by any
other means, vehicle damage may occur.
We produce a towing manual for all
authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment.
We recommend towing a rear-wheel drive
vehicle with the rear wheels on a tow dolly
when towing your vehicle from the front
using wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
We recommend towing a rear-wheel drive
vehicle with the front wheels on a tow dolly
when towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage
to the front fascia.
371
Roadside Emergencies
POST IMPACT BRAKING
HOW DOES POST IMPACT BRAKING
WORK
In the event of a moderate to severe crash,
the braking system reduces the vehicle’s
speed in order to prevent or reduce the
impact of a potential secondary crash.
POST IMPACT BRAKING LIMITATIONS
Post impact braking does not activate if any
of the following occur:
• The anti-lock braking system is damaged
during the collision.
• Electronic stability control is disabled.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (10 km/h).
OVERRIDING POST IMPACT BRAKING
You can override post impact braking by
pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
POST IMPACT BRAKING INDICATORS
E138639
It flashes when a post impact
braking event is occurring.
372
Crash and Breakdown Information
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line provides warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs are made
using Lincoln or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Lincoln.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Lincoln
Client Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
TDD for the hearing impaired:
7-1-1 (where offered by your telephone
service provider)
Web Address
www.LincolnOwner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• United States dealer locator by Dealer
Name, City, State or ZIP Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Lincoln Extended Service Plans.
• Lincoln Original Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Client Relationship Centre
Lincoln of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8
Telephone
373
Customer Assistance
1-800-387-9333
TDD for the hearing impaired:
7-1-1 (where offered by your telephone
service provider)
Web Address
www.LincolnCanada.com
Online Resources
Twitter
@LincolnClientCA
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnClientCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Lincoln policies, please contact the
Lincoln Client Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Client Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Lincoln in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Lincoln is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
374
Customer Assistance
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first
18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator considers the testimony provided
and makes a decision after the hearing.
375
Customer Assistance
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within 40 days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information that follows, please call or write
to request a program application. You will
be asked for your name and address, general
information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that needs to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
reviews the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB National
Programs, Inc.
1676 International Drive, Suite 550
McLean, VA 22102
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
For additional information, refer to the Better
Business Bureau website.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
376
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel
or petrol/gas engines or the proper sulfur
fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact our
Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using improper fuels may also result in
difficulty importing your vehicle back into the
United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands and/or
Puerto Rico, Central America, the Caribbean,
and Israel and the Middle East, contact the
nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact the
corresponding Ford Customer Assistance
Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
377
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhoneCustomer Relationship Center
[email protected]N/AN/AAsia Pacific
[email protected]N/A+1-800-841-3673Caribbean and Central America
[email protected]971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell phone users
in Saudi
800850078
Kuwait
22280384
[email protected]N/AN/ANorth Africa
378
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhoneCustomer Relationship Center
[email protected]N/A+1-800-841-3673Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands
[email protected]N/AN/ASub-Saharan Africa
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Global
Trade Services by emailing,
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S
LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, LLC at:
HELM, LLC
47911 Halyard Drive, Suite 200
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, LLC can also be reached by their
website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, LLC using the contact information
listed previously in this section.
379
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to www
.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
www
.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-vehicles.html (English)Website
http://tc.canada.ca/recalls (English) http://tc.canada.ca/rappels (French)Website
1-800-333-0510Phone
380
Customer Assistance
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1-800-565-3673Phone
381
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the cover
to the power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The engine compartment fuse box is under
the driver side leaf screen in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect the vehicle's main electrical systems
from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the battery,
you need to reset some features. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 410).
Note: Replace fuses with the same type and
rating. See Changing a Fuse (page 395).
382
Fuses
E288347
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Body control module - battery power in feed 1.40A1
Not used (spare).20A2
Body control module - battery power in feed 2.40A3
383
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Fuel pump.30A4
Powertrain control module keep alive power.5A5
Powertrain control module power.20A6
Canister vent solenoid.20A7
Evaporative leak control module.
Exhaust gas heat recovery.
Tank pressure control valve.
Refueling valve.
Vapor blocking valve.
Universal exhaust gas oxygen 11.
Universal exhaust gas oxygen 21.
Catalyst monitor sensor 12.
Catalyst monitor sensor 22.
Canister purge valve.
Cooling fan relay coil.20A8
Battery interrupt box.
Transmission oil pump.
Auxiliary coolant pump.
Fuel flap door.
Engine coolant bypass valve.
Active grille shutters.
Ignition coils.20A9
384
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Front blower motor relay.40A13
Transmission oil pump.15A14
A/C compressor variable clutch.
Engine mounts.
Auxiliary pumps.
Windshield and rear window washer pump relay power.15A16
Charge status indicator.5A17
Starter motor.30A18
Headlamp leveling motors.10A21
Adaptive headlamps.
Electric power assisted steering module.10A22
Anti-lock brake system module with integrated park brake.10A23
Powertrain control module.10A24
Hybrid powertrain control module.
Air quality sensor.10A25
Particulate matter sensor.
360 degree camera with park aid.
Rear view camera.
Blind spot information system.
Adaptive cruise control module.
385
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Transmission control module.15A26
Anti-lock brake system valves with integrated park brake.40A28
Anti-lock brake system pump with integrated park brake.60A29
Driver seat module.30A30
Passenger seat module.30A31
Not used (spare).20A32
Rear cargo area power point.20A33
Main console bin power point.20A34
Not used (spare).20A35
Power inverter.40A36
Climate controlled seat module.30A38
Power liftgate module.30A41
Trailer brake control module.30A42
Body control module.60A43
Brake on and off switch.10A44
Battery charger control module.15A46
386
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Heated backlite.40A50
Heated steering wheel.20A54
Trailer tow park lamps.20A55
Trailer tow battery charge.30A57
Trailer tow backup lamps.10A58
Multi-contour seat module.15A61
Headlamp washer pump.15A62
Four-wheel drive module.40A64
Front window wiper motor.30A69
Rear window wiper motor.15A71
Air suspension module.20A72
Driver door module.30A73
Not used.—78
Not used.—79
Left-hand front electronic door.20A80
Right-hand front electronic door.20A82
387
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Rear blower motor.20A88
Trailer tow lighting module.20A91
Integrated spark control.15A95
Not used (spare).15A96
Electric A/C.10A97
High voltage positive temperature coefficient heater.
Traction battery coolant proportional valve.10A98
Not used (spare).50A103
Not used (spare).50A104
Not used (spare).40A105
Not used (spare).40A106
Not used (spare).40A107
Not used (spare).20A108
Passenger door module.30A109
Body control module voltage quality monitor feed.30A111
Left-hand rear electronic door.20A112
388
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Air suspension compressor.50A114
Amplifier.20A115
Not used (spare).5A116
Second row heated seats.30A118
Port fuel injectors.15A120
Rain sensor.5A124
USB smart charger 1.5A125
Amplifier.20A127
Illuminated badge.15A128
Power folding seat module.40A131
Left-hand heated wiper blade.15A133
Right-hand heated wiper blade.
Family entertainment system.10A134
Right-hand rear electronic door.20A136
USB smart charger 2.5A139
Traffic cam.5A142
389
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Battery electronic control module.15A146
Left-hand headlamp module.30A148
Right-hand headlamp module.30A149
Not used (spare).40A150
Transmission control module.25A155
DC/DC converter.15A159
Not used (spare).10A160
Low voltage service disconnect.20A168
Coolant pump.10A169
Traction battery coolant pump.10A170
Pedestrian sounder.
Center console blower.10A177
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument panel
to the left of the steering column.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse
panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
390
Fuses
598
E14
598
4
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Not used.—1
Moonroof.10A2
eCall.
Telematics control unit module.
Inverter.
391
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Driver door switch pack.
Memory seat switch.7.5A3
Wireless accessory charger module.
Seat switches.
Not used (spare).20A4
Not used.—5
Not used (spare).10A6
Smart data link connector power.10A7
Telematics control unit module.5A8
Hands-free liftgate actuation module.
Power liftgate module.
Combined sensor module.5A9
Keypad switch.
Rear climate control.
Not used.—10
Not used.—11
Remote climate control module.7.5A12
Gear shift module.
Steering column control module.7.5A13
392
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Switch interface module A.
Smart datalink connector.
Instrument cluster.
Not used (spare).15A14
SYNC.15A15
Electronic finish panel.
Not used.—16
Headlamp control module.7.5A17
Not used (spare).7.5A18
Headlamp switch.5A19
Push button ignition switch.
Telematics control unit module.5A20
eCall.
Bluetooth low energy module.
Not used (spare).5A21
Not used (spare).5A22
Not used (spare).30A23
Moonroof.30A24
393
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Not used (spare).20A25
Not used (spare).30A26
Not used (spare).30A27
Not used (spare).30A28
Head up display.15A29
Trailer brake connector.5A30
Terrain management switch.10A31
Transceiver module.
Audio control module.20A32
Not used.—33
Run/Start relay.30A34
Not used (spare).5A35
Park assist module.15A36
Electrochromic mirror.
Suspension module.
Image processing module A.
394
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Not used (spare).20A37
Not used.—38
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher
amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
395
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Fuse TypeCallout
Micro 2A
Micro 3B
MaxiC
396
Fuses
Fuse TypeCallout
MiniD
M CaseE
J CaseF
J Case Low ProfileG
397
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E263274
1. Open the left-hand front door.
2. Fully pull the hood release lever and let
it completely retract.
398
Maintenance
Note: This action releases the hood latch.
3. Fully pull the hood release lever for a
second time.
Note: This action fully releases the hood.
4. Open the hood.
Note: There is no secondary lever under the
hood.
Closing the Hood
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
latch the hood before driving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
1. For vehicles with a prop rod, fully stow
the prop rod prior to lowering the hood.
2. Lower the hood and make sure it fully
latches.
399
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
E288092
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 410).A
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 401).B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 401).C
400
Maintenance
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 409).D
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 382).E
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 404).F
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 402).G
Washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 417).H
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E250320
E250320
Minimum.A
Nominal.B
Maximum.C
ENGINE OIL CHECK
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Check the oil before starting the engine
or switch the engine off and wait 10
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth.
4. Reinstall the dipstick and make sure it is
fully seated. Remove it again to check
the oil level.
5. If the oil level is between the maximum
and minimum marks, the oil level is
acceptable. Do not add oil.
6. If the oil level is at the minimum mark,
immediately add oil.
7. Reinstall the dipstick. Make sure it is fully
seated.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
WARNING: Do not add engine oil
when the engine is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
401
Maintenance
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives. They could cause engine damage
that the vehicle warranty may not cover.
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
3. Add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 465).
4. Reinstall the engine oil filler cap. Turn it
clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
displays the following
message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
Action and descriptionMessage
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
When changing the engine air filter, do not
allow debris or foreign material to enter the
air induction system. Engine components
are susceptible to damage not covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
402
Maintenance
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
579).
Incorrect component use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 464).
To replace the air filter element do the
following:
E2
9
477
8
1. Remove the clips that secure the air filter
housing cover.
2. Using a screwdriver, loosen two clamps
on either side of the air filter housing
cover.
3. Gently pull the two boots back away from
the air filter housing cover.
4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
5. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
6. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
7. Install a new air filter element. Be careful
not to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover.
This could cause filter damage and allow
unfiltered air to enter the engine if it is
not properly seated.
8. Install the air filter housing cover.
9. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
10. Reconnect the two boots on the air filter
housing cover and torque to 3.69 lb.ft
(5 Nm).
403
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with
a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
the windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system is
under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can
come out forcefully when you loosen the
cap slightly.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at the
intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance
information. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 579).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F (-37°C).
Coolant concentration should be checked
using a refractometer. We do not recommend
the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips
for measuring coolant concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
WARNING: Do not add coolant when
the vehicle is on or the cooling system is
hot. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with
a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
the windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
404
Maintenance
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable.
It is very important to use prediluted coolant
approved to the correct specification in order
to avoid plugging the small passageways in
the engine cooling system. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 460). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine or
cooling system components and may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 460).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to the
correct specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 460).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach
the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. Operating an
engine with a low level of coolant can result
in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
coolant.
405
Maintenance
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process is
not yet available.
Note: Dispose of used coolant in the
appropriate manner.
Follow your community's regulations and
standards for recycling and disposing of
automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% provides
improved freeze point protection.
• Coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the coolant and may
cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% provides
improved overheat protection.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the overheat and corrosion
protection characteristics of the coolant
and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in the
scheduled maintenance information, the
coolant should be changed. Add prediluted
coolant approved to the correct specification.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
460).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient temperature,
vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and a
message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still operates,
however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
406
Maintenance
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use
during emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in
a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with
a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power when
in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle does not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine may
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend that
you contact your roadside assistance
service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait for a short
period of time for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management
(If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle
may not be able to accelerate with full
power until the coolant temperature
reduces.
407
Maintenance
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long or
steep grade in high ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed
caused by reduced engine power in order
to manage the engine coolant temperature.
Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain
high-temperature and high-load conditions
take place. The amount of speed reduction
depends on vehicle loading, grade and
ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is
no need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
The air conditioning may automatically turn
on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant temperature
decreases to the normal operating
temperature, the air conditioning turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully
into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine soon
messages appear in your information display,
do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so. Fully apply the parking brake, shift
into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. If the
temperature does not drop after several
minutes, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart the
engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
If required, have an authorized dealer check
and change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 579).
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission does
not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
408
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other
than the recommended brake fluid as this
will reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid from
a sealed container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
touch your skin or eyes. If this happens,
rinse the affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
WARNING: The brake system could
be affected if the brake fluid level is below
the MIN mark or above the MAX mark on
the brake fluid reservoir.
E17
068
4
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface.
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see
where the brake fluid level is relative to
the MIN and the MAX marks on the
reservoir.
Note: If the brake fluid level is between the
MIN and the MAX marks on the reservoir, it
is acceptable.
Note: If the brake fluid level is below the MIN
mark or above the MAX mark, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully
tight, unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets our specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
460).
Brake Fluid Service Interval
Brake fluid absorbs water over time which
degrades the effectiveness of the brake fluid.
Change the brake fluid at the specified
intervals to prevent degraded braking
performance.
For detailed interval information, see
Scheduled Maintenance in your Owner's
Manual or your local maintenance guide.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
409
Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY -
GASOLINE
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in personal
injury and damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately
with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is
swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands after
handling.
WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery does
not disconnect your vehicle electrical
system. Make sure you disconnect the
battery cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.
WARNING: For vehicles with
Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement is
different. You must replace the battery with
one of exactly the same specification.
The battery is in the engine compartment.
See Under Hood Overview (page 400).
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free battery.
It does not require additional water during
service.
If the vehicle battery has a cover and vent
hose, make sure you correctly install it after
cleaning or replacing the battery.
410
Maintenance
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry and the
battery cables tightly fastened to the battery
terminals. If any corrosion is present on the
battery or terminals, remove the cables from
the terminals and clean with a wire brush.
You can neutralize the acid with a solution
of baking soda and water.
We recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable terminal from the
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
an extended period.
Note: If you only disconnect the negative
battery cable terminal, make sure it is
isolated or placed away from the battery
terminal to avoid unintended connection or
arcing.
If you replace the battery make sure it
matches the electrical requirements of your
vehicle.
If you disconnect or replace the battery and
your vehicle has an automatic transmission,
it must relearn its adaptive strategy. Because
of this, the transmission may shift firmly when
first driven. This is normal operation while
the transmission fully updates its operation
to optimum shift feel.
Battery Sensor Reset
When you install a new battery, reset the
battery sensor by doing the following:
1. Switch the ignition on, and leave the
engine off.
Note: Complete Steps 2 and 3 within 10
seconds.
2. Flash the high beam headlamps five
times, ending with the high beams off.
3. Press and release the brake pedal three
times.
The battery warning lamp flashes three times
to confirm that the reset is successful.
Battery Management System (If Equipped)
The system monitors battery conditions and
takes actions to extend battery life. If
excessive battery drain is detected, the
system temporarily disables some electrical
systems to protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
display to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. This message is only for
notification that an action is taking place, and
not intended to indicate an electrical problem
or that the battery requires replacement.
411
Maintenance
After battery replacement, or in some cases
after charging the battery with an external
charger, the battery management system
requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to
relearn the battery state of charge. During
this time, your vehicle must remain fully
locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state of
charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
Remove and Reinstall the Battery
Install a battery approved for use by our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 460).
To disconnect or remove the battery, do the
following:
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
example lights and radio.
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
disconnecting the battery.
Note: The engine management system has
a power hold function and remains powered
for a period of time after you switch the
ignition off. This is to allow the system to
store diagnostic and adaptive tables.
Disconnecting the battery without waiting
can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable
terminal.
5. Disconnect the positive battery cable
terminal.
6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
7. Remove the battery.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Note: Before reconnecting the battery, make
sure the ignition remains switched off.
Note: Make sure to fully tighten the battery
cables.
If you disconnect or replace the vehicle
battery, you must reset the following
features:
• Window bounce-back. See Power
Windows (page 121).
• Clock Settings.
• Pre-set radio stations.
Battery Disposal
E107998
Make sure that you dispose of old
batteries in an environmentally
friendly way. Seek advice from
your local authority about recycling old
batteries.
412
Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY -
PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE (PHEV)
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in personal
injury and damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately
with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is
swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands after
handling.
WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery does
not disconnect your vehicle electrical
system. Make sure you disconnect the
battery cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.
WARNING: For vehicles with
Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement is
different. You must replace the battery with
one of exactly the same specification.
The primary battery is in the engine
compartment. See Under Hood Overview
(page 400).
The secondary battery is located behind the
trim panel in the luggage compartment.
413
Maintenance
39
E
3
717
9
4
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free battery.
It does not require additional water during
service.
If the vehicle battery has a cover and vent
hose, make sure you correctly install it after
cleaning or replacing the battery.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry and the
battery cables tightly fastened to the battery
terminals. If any corrosion is present on the
battery or terminals, remove the cables from
the terminals and clean with a wire brush.
You can neutralize the acid with a solution
of baking soda and water.
We recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable terminal from the
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
an extended period.
Note: If you only disconnect the negative
battery cable terminal, make sure it is
isolated or placed away from the battery
terminal to avoid unintended connection or
arcing.
If you replace the battery make sure it
matches the electrical requirements of your
vehicle.
If you disconnect or replace the battery and
your vehicle has an automatic transmission,
it must relearn its adaptive strategy. Because
of this, the transmission may shift firmly when
first driven. This is normal operation while
the transmission fully updates its operation
to optimum shift feel.
Battery Sensor Reset
When you install a new battery, reset the
battery sensor by doing the following:
1. Switch the ignition on, and leave the
engine off.
Note: Complete Steps 2 and 3 within 10
seconds.
2. Flash the high beam headlamps five
times, ending with the high beams off.
3. Press and release the brake pedal three
times.
The battery warning lamp flashes three times
to confirm that the reset is successful.
414
Maintenance
Battery Management System (If Equipped)
The system monitors battery conditions and
takes actions to extend battery life. If
excessive battery drain is detected, the
system temporarily disables some electrical
systems to protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
display to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. This message is only for
notification that an action is taking place, and
not intended to indicate an electrical problem
or that the battery requires replacement.
After battery replacement, or in some cases
after charging the battery with an external
charger, the battery management system
requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to
relearn the battery state of charge. During
this time, your vehicle must remain fully
locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state of
charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
Remove and Reinstall the Battery
Install a battery approved for use by our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 460).
To disconnect or remove the battery, do the
following:
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
example lights and radio.
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
disconnecting the battery.
Note: The engine management system has
a power hold function and remains powered
for a period of time after you switch the
ignition off. This is to allow the system to
store diagnostic and adaptive tables.
Disconnecting the battery without waiting
can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable
terminal.
5. Disconnect the positive battery cable
terminal.
415
Maintenance
6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
7. Remove the battery.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Note: Before reconnecting the battery, make
sure the ignition remains switched off.
Note: Make sure to fully tighten the battery
cables.
If you disconnect or replace the vehicle
battery, you must reset the following
features:
• Window bounce-back. See Power
Windows (page 121).
• Clock Settings.
• Pre-set radio stations.
Battery Disposal
E107998
Make sure that you dispose of old
batteries in an environmentally
friendly way. Seek advice from
your local authority about recycling old
batteries.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
If your vehicle has been involved in a crash,
have the aim of the headlamp beam checked
by an authorized dealer.
E142
592
8 ft (2.4 m).A
Ground to the center of the
headlamp high beam bulb.
B
25 ft (7.6 m).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park your vehicle on level ground
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) from a wall or
screen.
2. Measure the distance from the ground
to the center of the headlamp high beam
bulb and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) long
horizontal reference line on the wall or
screen at this height.
Note: There may be an identifying mark on
the lens to help you locate the center line of
the headlamp high beam bulb.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps and
open the hood.
416
Maintenance
E1424
65
4. On the wall or screen you will observe a
flat zone of high intensity light located at
the top of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the flat zone of high intensity
light is not on the horizontal reference
line, adjust the aim of the headlamp
beam.
E292163
5. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver or socket wrench, to turn the
adjuster clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp. The horizontal edge of the
brighter light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and switch off the lamps.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F (5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase
the risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 460).
417
Maintenance
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E1424
63
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE FRONT WIPER
BLADES - VEHICLES WITHOUT:
HEATED WIPER BLADES
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.
Removing the Front Wiper Blades
E292280
1. Lift the wiper blade from the windshield
by holding the middle of the retainer.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
2. Rotate the blade toward the windshield
by gripping it under the connector until
a “click” sound is heard and the wiper
blade position is fixed.
3. Push the blade release button on top of
the connector and pull the blade from
the arm.
418
Maintenance
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
Installing the Front Wiper Blades
1. Line up the wiper blade, water and
electrical connectors with the receptors
on the wiper arm by lifting the arm from
the windshield.
2. Slide the blade into the connector until
a “click” sound is heard.
3. Rotate the blade toward the wiper arm
by gripping it under the connector until
a “click” sound is heard. Verify that the
blade has rotation.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
CHANGING THE FRONT WIPER
BLADES - VEHICLES WITH:
HEATED WIPER BLADES
Replacing the Rubber Insert
E292277
1. Remove the wiper blade.
2. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully move the tab on
the end cap.
3. Pull the end cap to release the rubber
insert
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CHANGING THE REAR WIPER
BLADES
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.
419
Maintenance
E292279
1. Switch your vehicle ignition on and off to
move the wiper arm to the service
position.
2. Lift the wiper arm and then press the
wiper blade locking buttons together.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
3. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
CHANGING A BULB
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable. See an
authorized dealer if they fail.
420
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-F/M (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
421
Vehicle Care
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions
Immediately remove fuel spillages, AdBlue
residuals, bird droppings, insect deposits
and road tar. These may cause damage to
your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Cleaning the Exterior Lamps
Note: Do not scrape the exterior lamps
lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents
or chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the exterior lamps when
they are dry.
422
Vehicle Care
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
• Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent cosmetic
damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40 degree wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90 degree angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Regularly clean the entire underside of your
vehicle. This includes the chassis, body floor
sheet metal and wheel wells using fresh
water. Keep body and door drain holes free
of debris or foreign material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from under
the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel
and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
423
Vehicle Care
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
remove the cover before application of
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser.
Immediately rinse away any over spray.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
424
Vehicle Care
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a crash.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the material,
spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft
Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or
the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products
or glass cleaners, which can stain and
discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
Mirrors
Do not clean the housing or glass of any
mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or instrument
panel to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
426).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
425
Vehicle Care
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
426
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Read the instructions before using cleaning
products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you use
Ford approved bug and tar remover if
available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This reduces
the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake
pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
427
Vehicle Care
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if you disconnect the battery cables.
428
Vehicle Care
Plugging in Your HYBRID
We recommend the following options for
your plug-in vehicle (PHEV) :
• Leave your vehicle plugged in. The 12
volt battery maintains power if left
plugged in. However, this periodically
uses electricity from the household
outlet.
• Connect a battery charger to your 12 volt
battery and leave it on a continuous, slow
charge.
• Disconnect the 12 volt battery. If your 12
volt battery is located in the luggage
compartment, do not fully shut the
luggage compartment after
disconnecting the 12 volt battery. Only
leave the luggage compartment open if
your vehicle is stored in a locked
location.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
BODY STYLING KITS (IF EQUIPPED)
The distance between the underside of your
vehicle and the ground is less than that of
other models. Drive with extreme care to
avoid damage to your vehicle.
429
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
The recommended tire inflation pressures
are found on the Tire Label which is located
on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver door.
This information can also be found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label, affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post; next to the driver’s seating
position.
We strongly recommend maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the way
your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least once
per month.
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the
pressure to the highest value given for your
vehicle and tire size combination.
Use only approved wheels and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your vehicle.
If you change the diameter of the factory
installed tires, the speedometer may not
display the correct speed. This could effect
the functionality of the All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system, if equipped. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer and have the engine
management system reprogrammed.
If you intend to change the size of the factory
installed tires, check the suitability with an
authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found in the Wheels and Tire section.
See Tire Care (page 432).
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
430
Wheels and Tires
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to reduce
the risk of an accident or serious injury.
All-wheel drive system (if equipped)
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of all-wheel
drive vehicles. Although an all-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with all-wheel drive has
the ability to use all four wheels to power
itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. Power is
supplied to all four wheels through a transfer
case operation and drive mode selection.
See All-Wheel Drive (page 264). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your vehicle.
Some limited All Wheel Drive (AWD) traction
may be provided if a temporary spare is
installed on one of the front wheels. If you
are in driving conditions where limited All
Wheel Drive (AWD) traction needed while a
temporary wheel is installed, it is
recommended the temporary spare be
installed on the front axle.
For all-wheel-drive vehicles, a spare tire of
a different size other than the tire provided
should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire
size; other than the spare tire provided or
major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the
all-wheel-drive system to stop functioning
and default to rear-wheel drive.
How your vehicle differs from other
vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few noticeable
ways. Your vehicle could be:
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components. All
other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase could make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
431
Wheels and Tires
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, sport utility vehicles and trucks
often have a higher center of gravity and a
greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
E14254
2
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires us to give you
the following information about tire
grades exactly as the government has
written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak
traction characteristics.
432
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the original
equipment tire sizes, recommended
inflation pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire size
and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier
maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle being
driven for 1 mi (1.6 km).
433
Wheels and Tires
*Recommended inflation pressure: The
cold inflation pressure found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
*B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
*Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142
5
4
3
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
434
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to
186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
Speed ratingLetter rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
435
Wheels and Tires
Speed ratingLetter rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured,
the next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st
week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification
codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers
if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. See the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
436
Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142
5
44
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
437
Wheels and Tires
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual, defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single, defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
438
Wheels and Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures and
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check the pressure
of all tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by the
manufacturer.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the
most common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire cracking,
tread separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle control and
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation
increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup
and internal damage to the tire. It also
may result in unnecessary tire stress,
irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. We recommend the use of
a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire pressure
gauge. Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation
or over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
You will find a Tire Label containing the
manufactures recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size and
other important information located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door.
The recommended tire inflation pressure
is also found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch on
the B-pillar, or on the edge of the
driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely affect
the way your vehicle handles.
439
Wheels and Tires
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve stems
for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit
air leakage and repair or replace the tire
and replace the valve stem. Inspect the
tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired
or replaced. For your safety, tires that
are damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142
5
4
6
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear on
the tire when the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall). If damage is observed or
suspected, have the tire inspected by a
tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade over
time depending on many factors such
as weather, storage conditions, and
conditions of use (load, speed, inflation
pressure) the tires experience
throughout their lives.
440
Wheels and Tires
In general, tires should be replaced
after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging
process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it
has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels that are
the same size, load index, speed rating
and type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided
by Ford. The recommended tire and
wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or edge of the driver's door. If this
information is not found on these
labels, then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
441
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
serious injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall of
the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed below. If
the beads do not seat at the maximum
pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure,
a Ford dealer or other tire service
professional should do the mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate steel
carcass tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from
the wheel and tire assembly.
WARNING: When inflating the
tire for mounting pressures up to
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire sidewall,
the following precautions must be
taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:
• Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m)
away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
• Use both eye and ear protection.
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair if the worn tires still
have usable depth.
To avoid potential All Wheel Drive (AWD)
malfunction or All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system damage, it is recommended to
replace all four tires rather than mixing
significantly worn tires with new tires.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used in
aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended may affect the operation
of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, your system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
442
Wheels and Tires
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is
stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires
can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little
as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a passenger
or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there
is always the possibility that you may
eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are driving,
the wheels may be out of alignment.
Have an authorized dealer check the
wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment of all
four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
443
Wheels and Tires
Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label shows
different tire pressures for the front
and rear tires and the vehicle has a
tire pressure monitoring system, then
you need to update the settings for
the system sensors. Always perform
the system reset procedure after tire
rotation. If you do not reset the system,
it may not provide a low tire pressure
warning when necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear,
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly, it is intended for temporary
use only and should not be used in a
tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes irregular
tire wear can be corrected by rotating
the tires. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 579).
Tire Rotation Diagram
Rear-wheel drive and all-wheel drive
vehicles, front tires at left of diagram.
E142
548
USING SUMMER TIRES
Summer tires provide superior performance
on wet and dry roads. Summer tires do not
have the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire
traction rating on the tire side wall. Since
summer tires do not have the same traction
performance as All-season or Snow tires, we
do not recommend using summer tires when
temperatures drop to approximately 45°F
(7°C) or below (depending on tire wear and
environmental conditions) or in snow and ice
444
Wheels and Tires
conditions. Like any tire, summer tire
performance is affected by tire wear and
environmental conditions. If you must drive
in those conditions, we recommend using
Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or
Snow tires.
Always store your summer tires indoors at
temperatures above 19°F (-7°C). The rubber
compounds used in these tires lose flexibility
and may develop surface cracks in the tread
area at temperatures below 19°F (-7°C). If the
tires have been subjected to 19°F (-7°C) or
less, warm them in a heated space to at least
41°F (5°C) for at least 24 hours before
installing them on a vehicle, or moving the
vehicle with the tires installed, or checking
tire inflation. Do not place tires near heaters
or heating devices used to warm the room
where the tires are stored. Do not apply heat
or blow heated air directly on the tires.
Always inspect the tires after storage periods
and before use.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Do not exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h). Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use snow chains
on snow-free roads.
WARNING: Only fit snow chains to
specified tires.
WARNING: If your vehicle is fitted
with wheel trims, remove them before
fitting snow chains.
WARNING: Wheels and tires must
be the same size, load index and speed
rating as those originally fitted on the
vehicle. Use of any other tire or wheel can
affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels can
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure. Follow
the recommended tire inflation pressures
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification label, or the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
or personal injury or death.
Only use snow chains on rear wheels. Install
snow chains in pairs. Do not use
self-tensioning snow chains.
Only use snow chains on the following
specified tire sizes:
• 255/60R19
• Only install chains that are 10 mm or
less.
• 255/55R20
• Only install chains that are 10 mm or
less.
We recommend you use steel wheels of the
same size and specification if snow chains
are required because chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices:
445
Wheels and Tires
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Purchase snow chains from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body to
tire dimension restrictions.
• When driving with snow chains do not
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the snow
chains rub or bang against the vehicle,
stop and tighten them. If this does not
work, remove the snow chains to prevent
vehicle damage.
• Remove the snow chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use snow
chains on dry roads.
• If a temporary spare wheel is mounted
on your vehicle, do not use snow chains
on the axle with the temporary spare
wheel.
• Use snow chains that fit against the
sidewall of the tire to prevent the chains
from touching the wheel rims or
suspension, see following illustration.
E292547
E292547
2
547
446
Wheels and Tires
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains, please contact your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
447
Wheels and Tires
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
When Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E250820
E250820
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure
readings through the information display.
See General Information (page 136). The low
tire pressure warning light will turn on if the
tire pressure is significantly low. Once the
448
Wheels and Tires
light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure.
Even if the light turns on and a short time
later turns off, your tire pressure still needs
to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
449
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflated
Solid warning light Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
Flashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
450
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa) from a
cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature
significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease
about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C)
in ambient temperature. This lower pressure
value may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or
more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the
vehicle to the nearest location where air can
be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the tire
pressure monitoring system sensors. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 447).
Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible. During repairing or
replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized
dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor for damage.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
451
Wheels and Tires
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by us.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, you should replace it rather than
repair it.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
452
Wheels and Tires
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
a flat tire in an emergency. Do not attempt
to do any other work on your vehicle when
it is supported by the jack, as your vehicle
could slip off the jack. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park (P),
set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed. For example,
when changing the front left wheel, place
an appropriate block or wheel chock on
the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Only use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle.
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
WARNING: Only use the specified
jacking points. If you use any other
locations you could damage vehicle
components, such as brake lines.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and your vehicle.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change
a tire on the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road
to not obstruct the flow of traffic and avoid
the danger of being hit when operating the
jack or changing the wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
66
E1
66
72
2
453
Wheels and Tires
Note: No maintenance or additional
lubrication of your jack is required over the
service life of your vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and switch on the hazard flashers.
2. Apply the parking brake, place the
transmission in park (P) and turn the
engine off.
3. If your vehicle has air suspension, use
the touch screen to switch on the Air
Suspension Service Mode prior to
jacking.
E14255
1
4. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire. For example, if the left front tire
is flat, block the right rear wheel.
E288598
5. Unfold the third row seat if it is in the
stowed position, then remove the
carpeted cargo area to access the spare
tire and jack storage compartment.
6. Turn the wing nut securing the spare tire
counterclockwise, remove the wing nut.
7. Remove the spare tire, jack and wrench
from the spare tire storage compartment
under the trunk load floor.
E175694
8. Turn the hex nut on the jack
counterclockwise to remove the lug
wrench from jack. This lowers the jack
and loosens the mechanical lock.
E181744
E181744
454
Wheels and Tires
9. Unfold the wrench for use.
E288597
10. Remove the strap from the jack.
1
E181745
2
11. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the flat tire is raised
off the ground.
E145908
12. Find the jacking points shown here,
small arrow-shaped marks on the sills
show the location of the jacking points.
E307860
E307860
455
Wheels and Tires
13. If your vehicle is equipped with running
boards the jacking points will be
marked on the front and rear of the
running board.
E310613
E310613
E310
E310
E310
E310
1
1
10
0
613
613
613
613
14. Place the jack at the jacking point next
to the tire which you are changing. Turn
the lug wrench handle clockwise until
the flat tire is completely off the ground.
E201156
15. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
16. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward.
17. Install the lug nuts snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the vehicle is lowered.
18. Turn the wrench handle
counterclockwise to lower the vehicle
completely.
1
2
3
4
5
E306781
E306781
19. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 458).
20. If you enabled the Air Suspension
Service Mode, switch the mode off prior
to driving.
21. Remove the wheel blocks.
456
Wheels and Tires
Stowing the jack
E176165
1. To store the folded wrench on the jack,
engage the bracket of the jack base and
the lug wrench pin, swing the wrench
upwards, adjust jack height until the
wrench hook engages the hole on jack.
Tighten the hex nut clockwise by hand
until secure.
2. Place the jack in the spare tire
compartment, install the wing nut and
tighten clockwise by hand until secure.
Stowing the flat tire
You cannot store the full-sized road wheel
in the temporary spare tire well.
1. Find the flat tire retainer strap tucked
inside the jack channel. Lower the
carpeted load floor.
2. Stow the flat tire in the cargo area on the
load floor with the wheel facing up.
Secure the flat tire with the retainer strap
by following the next steps.
E142
906
3. Locate the rear left side and right side
cargo tie-down rings. Push the loop end
of the retainer strap through one cargo
tie-down ring. Thread the non-loop end
through the loop.
4. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
E294325
E
E294
E294
E
E294
2
2
29
29
9
94
4
325
3
3
325
3
3
32
2
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
E294E294
E2
E294
E294
E2
E294
E294
E294
E294
E294
E294
4
E294
E294
4
E294
E
E294
E
E294
9
9
9
94
E
9
9
94
9
94
E
29
4
2
4
2
325
325
325
325
325
325
32
325
325
325
325
325
325
25
325
325
32
325
325
32
325
2
5
325
3
5
5
3
325
3
3
5
5
5
5. Locate the front cargo tie-down in the
opposite rear corner of the cargo area.
Thread the retainer strap through the
tie-down and pull tight.
E
14
3
746
6. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.
457
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the
wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that attach
the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact
at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in
loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
lb.ft (Nm)
*
Bolt size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only our recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 mi (160 km) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire,
wheel removal).
458
Wheels and Tires
E14
595
50
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
459
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - EXCLUDING: PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
3.0LEngine
180 in³ (2,956 cm³)Displacement.
Minimum 87 octaneFuel type.
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
0.028–0.031 in (0.7–0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
9.5:1Compression ratio.
460
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E2
9
717
8
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
SpecificationEngine
180 in³ (2,956 cm³)Displacement.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
0.0276–0.0315 in (0.7–0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
9.5:1Compression ratio.
461
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E294410
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - EXCLUDING: PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter.
FL-2062-A
Oil filter.
1
BAGM-94RH7-800
Battery.
2
SP-594Spark plug.
FP-103Cabin air filter.
WW-2617-NH (non-heated driver side)Windshield wiper blade.
462
Capacities and Specifications
Part NumberComponent
WW-2618-H (heated driver side)
WW-2619-R (refill driver side)
WW-2114-NH (non-heated passenger side)
WW-2115-H (heated passenger side)
WW-2116-R (refill passenger side)
WW-1111Rear window wiper blade.
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
2
See your authorized dealer for correct replacement.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your authorized dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
engineered for your vehicle meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability.
Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
463
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter.
FL-2062-A
Oil filter.
1
BAGM-94RH7-800 (main-engine compartment)
Battery.
2
BHAGM-AUX1-A (auxiliary-rear mount)
SP-594Spark plug.
FP-103Cabin air filter.
WW-2617-NH (non-heated driver side)Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2618-H (heated driver side)
WW-2619-R (refill driver side)
WW-2114-NH (non-heated passenger side)
WW-2115-H (heated passenger side)
WW-2116-R (refill passenger side)
WW-1111Rear window wiper blade.
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
2
See your authorized dealer for correct replacement.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your authorized dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
engineered for your vehicle meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability.
Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
464
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E
14247
7
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS
- EXCLUDING: PLUG-IN HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets the
defined specification and viscosity grade, it
could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
465
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning System
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
5.92 fl oz (175 ml)35 oz (0.99 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf
Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
466
Capacities and Specifications
Automatic Transmission
Note: Only use MERCON® ULV transmission
fluid for automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® ULV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid could cause transmission
damage.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
12.6 qt (11.9 L)
1
All.
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile
pour boîtes automatique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
467
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Coolant
Capacities
QuantityVariant
18.0 qt (17 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant / Antigel/liquide de refroidissement
prédilué jaune Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
468
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Oil
E1427
32
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available,
use motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that display the API Certification Mark
for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
6.0 qt (5.7 L)All.
469
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C961-A1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil / Huile moteur de très haute
qualité SAE 5W-30 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely
Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C963-A1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend
470
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
Fuel Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
20.2 gal (76.5 L)All.
Grease
471
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
ESA-M1C75-BMotorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease / Graisse longue durée de qualité première
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XG-1-E1(U.S. & Canada)
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse tout usage en aérosol Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XL-5-A(U.S. & Canada)
Hydraulic Brake System
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de
frein automobile haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
472
Capacities and Specifications
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid could cause reduced brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials could result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Locks
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-1(U.S.)
CXC-51-A(Canada)
Transfer Case
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.1 qt (1 L)All-wheel drive.
473
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid / Huile pour boîte auto-
matique MERCON® LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
Front Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
0.6 qt (0.6 L)All-wheel drive.
474
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant / Lubrifiant synthétique
pour pont arrière SAE 75W-140 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
CXY-75W140-1L(Canada)
Rear Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.9 qt (1.8 L)All.
475
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile
synthétique de haute qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
476
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute
qualité Motorcraft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-F/M(Canada)
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS
- PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE (PHEV)
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets the
defined specification and viscosity grade, it
could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
Air Conditioning System
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
6.93 fl oz (205 ml)35 oz (0.99 kg)All.
477
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C31-B2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant POE Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant POE Oil / Huile POE pour frigorigène R-1234yf
Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-34(U.S. & Canada)
Automatic Transmission
Note: Only use MERCON® ULV transmission
fluid for automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® ULV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid could cause transmission
damage.
478
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
QuantityVariant
13.7 qt (13 L)
1
All.
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile
pour boîtes automatique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
Engine Coolant
Capacities
QuantityVariant
19.3 qt (18.3 L)Engine coolant loop (big coolant bottle).
5.1 qt (4.8 L)Motor electronics and battery cooling loop (small coolant bottle).
479
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant / Antigel/liquide de refroidissement
prédilué jaune Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
Engine Oil
E1427
32
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available,
use motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that display the API Certification Mark
for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
480
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
6.0 qt (5.7 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C961-A1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil / Huile moteur de très haute
qualité SAE 5W-30 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely
Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
481
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C963-A1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend
E240523
482
Capacities and Specifications
Fuel Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
18.0 gal (68.1 L)All.
Grease
Materials
SpecificationName
ESA-M1C75-BMotorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease / Graisse longue durée de qualité première
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XG-1-E1(U.S. & Canada)
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse tout usage en aérosol Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XL-5-A(U.S. & Canada)
Hydraulic Brake System
483
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de
frein automobile haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid could cause reduced brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials could result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Locks
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-1(U.S.)
CXC-51-A(Canada)
484
Capacities and Specifications
Transfer Case
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.1 qt (1 L)All-wheel drive.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid / Huile pour boîte auto-
matique MERCON® LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
Front Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
0.6 qt (0.6 L)All-wheel drive.
485
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant / Lubrifiant synthétique
pour pont arrière SAE 75W-140 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
CXY-75W140-1L(Canada)
Rear Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.9 qt (1.8 L)All.
486
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile
synthétique de haute qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
487
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute
qualité Motorcraft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-F/M(Canada)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
All exterior and interior lamps are LED.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
488
Capacities and Specifications
INSTALLING THE VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION CARD
Install any devices that use radio frequency
identification, for example, toll readers or
vehicle identification cards, to the specified
area on the windshield.
Note: Follow the manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
Note: When installing the radio frequency
identification device, do not block objects
such as the rain sensor and the
auto-dimming sensor.
E291100
DimensionDimension DescriptionItem
No less than 1.6 in (40 mm).The top edge of the windshield to the top
edge of the identification card.
A
No more than 3.9 in (100 mm).The center of the windshield to the right edge
of the identification card.
B
489
Vehicle Identification
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO A
MOBILE NETWORK
WHAT IS THE MODEM
The modem allows you to connect your
vehicle to the Internet to use when you are
on the road.
If you enable the modem using the Lincoln
Way app, you can access the following
services:
• Locating and remotely starting, locking
and unlocking your vehicle. See the
information in the Lincoln Way app.
• Automatic system updates.
Note: We may need to update operating
system software on your vehicle to keep
connected services updated without prior
notice to you.
ENABLING THE MODEM USING THE
LINCOLN WAY
1. Open the Lincoln Way app on your
device and log in.
2. Select your vehicle.
3. Select the option for vehicle details.
4. Select the option to activate your vehicle.
5. Switch the ignition on.
6. Make sure that the name on the screen
matches the name shown in your Lincoln
Way account.
7. Confirm the association of your vehicle
with your Lincoln Way account.
ENABLING THE MODEM USING THE
TOUCHSCREEN
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Lincoln Connect .
2. Select Connectivity Settings.
3. Switch connectivity features on.
490
Network Connectivity
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Wi-Fi Network
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi network. – Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal
is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID,. Do not use the default name unless it contains a
unique identifier, for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection disconnects after
successful connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal
is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot but the network
signal strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position your vehicle so that the windshield
is not facing the Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows but not on the windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or open the windows
that are facing the hotspot.
491
Network Connectivity
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows and the windshield, open the
windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the garage door closed, open the garage
door.
I cannot see a network in the list of available
networks that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again.
I cannot see the Wi-Fi Hotspot name when I
search for Wi-Fi networks on my cell phone
or other device.
– System limitation.
• Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
• The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal
is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the network requires a subscription or
acceptance of terms and conditions, contact the network service provider.
The system seems to connect to a Wi-Fi
network and the signal strength is excellent
but the software does not update.
492
Network Connectivity
Mobile Network
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Modem is not enabled.
• Enable the modem through Lincoln Way.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I cannot confirm association with Lincoln Way
when trying to enable the modem.
493
Network Connectivity
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI
HOTSPOT
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it for
access to the Internet.
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Lincoln Connect.
2. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting is
on.
3. Press Settings.
4. Press Wi-Fi visibility.
Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting is
on.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and
Password
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Lincoln Connect.
2. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
3. Press Settings.
Note: The SSID is the hotspot name.
4. Press View Password.
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot
1. On your device, switch Wi-Fi on and
select the hotspot from the list of
available Wi-Fi networks.
2. When prompted, enter the password.
Purchasing a Data Plan
1. Connect a device to the hotspot.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal
opens on your device.
2. If the portal does not open on your
device, open a website and it redirects
to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
3. Follow the instructions on the carrier
portal to purchase a plan.
Note: If you have an active plan, the system
does not redirect to the vehicle network
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website to
purchase more data.
Note: If data usage information is available
in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
approximate.
Note: If you carry out a master reset, the
system does not remove your vehicle from
your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
remove your vehicle from the account,
contact your vehicle network carrier.
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-FI
HOTSPOT NAME OR PASSWORD
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press Lincoln Connect.
494
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
2. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
3. Press Settings.
4. Press Edit.
5. Press Change SSID Name.
6. Enter your required SSID.
7. Press Done.
8. Press Change Password.
9. Enter your required password.
10. Press Done.
495
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
496
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E286905
E286905
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as satellite radio,
may not be available in your location. Check
with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls most
of the audio features.
Adjusting the Volume
E2
265
373
E2
265
373
265373
Turn to adjust the volume.
Changing Radio Stations
E2
265
696
E2
265
696
265696
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
497
Audio System
Locking the Rear Audio Controls (If
Equipped)
E270448
Press and release the button to
lock the rear passenger audio
controls.
Selecting the Audio Modes
E265276
Press and release the button to
access different audio modes such
as AM, FM and CD.
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching the Display On and Off (If
Equipped)
E272035
Press and release the button.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The system
stops at the first station it finds in that
direction.
In satellite radio mode, press and release to
select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category, such
as jazz, rock or news, press to find the next
or previous station in that category.
Rear Passenger Audio Controls
Use the rear passenger touchscreen to
select the following:
E100027
Touch the audio button on the
feature bar.
Note: Depending on the source selected,
some options may not be available.
Accessing the Source Menu
E287123
Touch the button to access the
source menu.
Selecting a Preset
Touch Presets to select a preset station.
Switching Repeat Mode On and Off
E287125
Touch the button to cycle through
the various repeat modes and off.
Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off
Touch the button to play music on
the selected source in random
order.
Playing or Pausing Media
Touch the button to either play or
pause the audio.
498
Audio System
Switching the Audio Control On and
Off
Adjusting the Volume
Touch the arrow buttons to adjust the
volume.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
touch either button. The system stops at the
first station it finds in that direction.
In satellite radio mode, touch to select the
next or previous satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category, such as jazz, rock
or news, touch to find the next or previous
station in that category.
Rear Audio Control Lock Message
A message displays when the controls are
locked through the front and you try to
operate them.
Note: The controls also lock when a voice
session or phone call is active.
DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available
in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a
special receiver that allows it to receive
digital broadcasts, where available, in
addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide
to available stations and programming,
please visit www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you may
also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode,
only, if the current station is broadcasting
multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers signify available digital channels
where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations, HD2
through HD7, are only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
499
Audio System
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute
due to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is
available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station
mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog
to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
500
Audio System
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for the accuracy of all audio
streams and data fields.
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.This is poor time alignment by the radio
broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in audio volume.
No action required. The reception issue may
clear up as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between analog and
digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in and out.
No action required. This is normal behavior.
Wait until the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not available until the
HD Radio broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or direct tune.
No action required. The station is not avail-
able in your current location.
The previously stored multicast preset or
direct tune is not available in your current
reception area.
Cannot access the HD2 or HD3 multicast
channels when recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.Text information does not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.There is no text information shown for
currently selected frequency.
1
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback.
501
Audio System
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of DTS. Ford and DTS are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed, added
or deleted at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic
and entertainment satellite radio channels.
For more information and a complete list of
SiriusXM satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Factory-installed and aftermarket vehicle structures including, but not limited to, roof racks and soft top roofs
in a partially open position could reduce reception performance.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system could mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the interference and the audio system could mute.Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
502
Audio System
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates will be
liable to you or any third party for any such
modification, suspension or termination.
E2
086
2
5
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service that
broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news,
weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM
satellite radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See
an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms, a service fee is required,
the online media player and a complete list
of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and
other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com
in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in
Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account.
Locating Your ESN
1. Select SiriusXM as the audio source.
2. Tune to channel 0.
503
Audio System
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This message should
disappear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to
produce audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not clear shortly, or with
an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or choose another
preset.
The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to
subscribe to the channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not include this
channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the SiriusXM satellite
or SiriusXM tower to your vehicle antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The process may take up
to three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
504
Audio System
ActionConditionMessage
Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or
Skip function on that station.
All the channels in the selected category are
either skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the channels available
for your vehicle.
Subscription Updated
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
USB A
E201595
E201595
USB C
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
E301
E3
E301
301
30
301
E
E
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices.
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
cables and adapters may not work.
505
Audio System
Locating the USB Ports
The USB ports may be in the following
locations:
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the lower instrument panel.
Note: The number and type of USB ports
may vary depending on your vehicle.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have
data transfer capabilities. See Auxiliary
Power Points (page 200).
506
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
About SYNC
The system allows you to interact with the
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands and a touchscreen.
The system provides easy interaction with
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings.
Note: You can switch the system on and use
it for up to an hour without switching the
ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes or
until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to
when your vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Using the Touchscreen
98
E2
9
7
8
44
Status bar.A
Home screen.B
Clock. See Settings (page 555).C
Outside air temperature.D
Feature bar.E
507
SYNC™ 3
Status Bar
Cell phone microphone muted.
Audio system muted.
Software update installed.
Wi-Fi connected.
Cell phone roaming.
Text message received.
Automatic crash notification system
off.
Cell phone network signal
strength.
Vehicle data sharing active.
Vehicle location sharing active.
Vehicle data and location sharing
active.
Feature Bar
E100027
Select to use the radio, a USB, a
media player or a Bluetooth
device. See Entertainment (page
521).
E283811
Select to adjust climate settings
See Climate (page 533).
Select to make calls and access
the phonebook on your cell phone.
See Phone (page 536).
Select to use the navigation
system. See Navigation (page 538).
Select to search for and use
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device. See Apps (page
552).
E280315
Select to adjust system settings.
See Settings (page 555).
Cleaning the Touchscreen
See Cleaning the Interior (page 425).
Updating the System
Updating the System Using a USB Drive
Downloading an Update
1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
regional website.
2. Download the update.
Note: The website notifies you if an update
is available.
3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
meet the minimum requirements detailed on
the website.
4. Follow the instructions provided to
download the update to the USB drive.
508
SYNC™ 3
Installing an Update
Note: You can use the system when an
installation is in progress.
1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
the USB ports.
2. Connect the USB drive with the update
to a USB port.
Note: Installation starts automatically within
a few minutes.
Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi Network
Connection
Switching Automatic System Updates On
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Automatic Updates.
2. Switch Automatic System Updates on.
The system is now set to check for and
receive system updates when it is connected
to a Wi-Fi network.
Note: You can use the system when a
download is in progress.
Note: If the system is disconnected from the
Wi-Fi network when a download is in
progress, the download continues the next
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi
network.
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
See Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (page 494).
Additional Information and Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to the local
website.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The system allows you to interact with the
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands. This allows you to
keep your hands on the steering wheel and
focus on what is in front of you.
E142599
Press the voice control button on
the steering wheel and wait for the
voice prompt.
Note: Press the voice control button again
to interrupt a voice prompt and begin
speaking.
Note: Turn the volume control when a voice
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
Note: Press and hold the voice control
button on the steering wheel to use Siri on
your iOS device.
The following voice commands are designed
to help you from any screen:
• List of Commands
• Help
The following tables list some of the more
frequently used voice commands. For a
complete list of voice commands, refer to
our website.
509
SYNC™ 3
General
DescriptionVoice Command
Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.
1
___ List of Commands
Cancel an active voice session.Cancel
Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.
1
___ Help
Return to the previous screen.Go back
Go to the main menu.Main Menu
Go to the next page.Next Page
Go to the previous page.Previous Page
1
Add the name of the feature to the command.
510
SYNC™ 3
Entertainment
Audio Source
DescriptionVoice Command
Use the radio.Radio
Use the CD player.CD Player
Use a Bluetooth® device.Bluetooth Stereo
Use a USB or media player.USB
Radio
DescriptionVoice Command
Listen to AM radio.AM
Tune to a specific AM frequency.
1
AM ___
Listen to SiriusXM radio.
2
Sirius Channel ___
511
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice Command
Listen to FM radio.FM
Tune to a specific FM frequency.
1
FM ___
1
Add the radio frequency to two decimal places to the command.
2
You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius Channel 16" or "Sirius The Pulse".
USB and Media Player
DescriptionVoice Command
Play your music by category.
1
Play Album ___
Play Artist ___
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Play Podcast ___
Browse music on a USB device.
Browse All Albums
Browse All Artists
512
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice Command
Browse All Audiobooks
Browse All Genres
Browse All Playlists
Browse All Podcasts
Browse All Songs
Browse your music by category on a USB device.
1
Browse Album ___
Browse Artist ___
Browse Audiobook ___
Browse Genre ___
Browse Playlist ___
Browse Podcast ___
1
Add an album name, artist name, audiobook name, genre name, playlist name, podcast name or track name to the command. Say the name
exactly as it appears on your device.
Climate (If Equipped)
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature setting.
513
SYNC™ 3
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F (15.5–29.5°C).Set Temperature ___
Phone
DescriptionVoice Command
Pair a cell phone or Bluetooth®-enabled device.Pair Phone
Redial the last number that you dialed.Redial
Dial a number.
1
Dial ___
Call a specific contact from your phonebook.
2
Call ___
Call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location.
3
Call ___ ___
Listen to a text message.Listen to Message
514
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice Command
Listen to a specific text message from a list of text messages.Listen to Message ___
Reply to the last text message.Reply to Message
1
Add the number you want to dial to the command.
2
Add a contact name from your phonebook to the command. Say the first and last name of your contact exactly as it appears on your device.
3
Add a contact name and location from your phonebook to the command. Say the first and last name of your contact exactly as it appears
on your device.
515
SYNC™ 3
Navigation (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination
DescriptionVoice Command
Enter a destination address. When prompted, provide the house number, the street
and city.
Find an Address
Search for a point of interest by name or by category.Find a Place
Search for a nearby point of interest by category.
1
Find the Next ___
Search for a point of interest category.
1
Find a POI Category
Set your saved home address as your destination.Drive Home
Set your saved place of work as your destination.Drive to Work
Display and select from a list of previous destinations.Show Previous Destinations
Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.Show Favorites
1
Add a point of interest category or the name of a major brand or chain to the command.
516
SYNC™ 3
Route Guidance
DescriptionVoice Command
Cancel the current route.Cancel Route
Select an alternate route.Detour
Repeat the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Display an overview of the route.Show Route
Display a list of traffic events on your route.Show Traffic
Display the map on the touchscreen.Show Map
Display a two-dimensional map with north toward the top of the touchscreen.North Up
Display a two-dimensional map with the direction you are traveling toward the top
of the touchscreen.
Heading Up
Display a three-dimensional map with the direction you are traveling toward the
front.
Show 3D
517
SYNC™ 3
Apps
General
DescriptionVoice Command
Start an app. The system prompts you for the app name.Mobile Applications
Get a list of apps running on your device.List Applications
Search and connect to apps running on your device.Find Applications
Active App
DescriptionVoice Command
Get a list of voice commands for a specific app.
1
___ Help
Close an app.
1
Exit ___
1
Add an app name to the command.
518
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Equipped)
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Fore-
cast
Voice Settings
DescriptionVoice Command
Go to the voice settings menu.Voice Settings
Switch long voice prompts on.Interaction Mode Novice
Switch short voice prompts on.Interaction Mode Advanced
Switch call confirmation on. The system prompts you to confirm before making a
call.
Phone Confirmation On
519
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice Command
Switch call confirmation off. The system does not prompt you to confirm before
making a call.
Phone Confirmation Off
Switch the display of voice commands on.Voice Command Lists On
Switch the display of voice commands off.Voice Command Lists Off
Automatic Blower Motor Speed
Reduction
If necessary, the system decreases the
blower motor speed when you are using
voice commands to reduce the amount of
background noise in your vehicle. It returns
to normal when you are done.
Switching Automatic Blower Motor Speed
Reduction Off
Simultaneously press the A/C and
recirculated air buttons.
520
SYNC™ 3
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
93 9
E2
93
4
91
Audio source. Select to choose a
different audio source.
A
Presets. Swipe left to view more
presets.
B
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu Item
AM
FM
1
SIRIUS
CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
521
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections.Apps
1
This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on the
radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the touchscreen,
select:
Menu Item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only enter
a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's call
numbers, you can select:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit without
changing the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station and
then press and hold one of the memory
preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while
the system saves the station and then
returns.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E2
3
44
51
522
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service that
broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news,
weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM
satellite radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term that begins on
the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See
an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a list of SiriusXM
satellite radio channels, and other features,
please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United
States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates will be
liable to you or any third party for any such
modification, suspension or termination.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station.Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play.Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number.
523
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as
you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not able to select a different
preset until you return to live audio. Pressing this button returns you
to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on
any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts.
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then press
and hold one of the memory preset buttons.
The audio mutes briefly while the system
saves the station and returns once the
station is stored.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
524
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep
luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree
foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a
weaker one and the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.Satellite radio signal interference
Troubleshooting Tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This message should disap-
pear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to produce
audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault.
See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or choose another preset.The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel
525
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting Tips
ActionCauseMessage
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe
to the channel, or tune to another channel.
Your subscription does not include this channel.Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the SiriusXM satellite or
SiriusXM tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring signal…
No action required. The process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide or the Sirius XM Settings
tile to turn off the Lock or Skip function on that
station.
All the channels in the selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found. Check channel guide.
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the channels available for
your vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription updated
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 555).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available
in all markets.
526
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a
special receiver that allows it to receive
digital broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide
to available stations and programming,
please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142
6
1
6
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode
(only) if the current station is broadcasting
multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers signify available digital channels
where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2
through HD7) are only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature for
stations that have more than 1 HD multicast
(For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and
Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this
button allows you to cycle through all of the
HD stations on that specific frequency. For
example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1,
HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly
causes the radio to cycle through the HD
stations in a cyclic increasing order.
527
SYNC™ 3
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes
before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station
may mute due to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital
broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the
station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts
to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when
the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or
digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
528
SYNC™ 3
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.This is poor time alignment by the radio broad-
caster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in audio
volume.
No action required. The reception issue may clear
up as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between analog and digital
audio.
Sound fading or blending in and out.
No action required. This is normal behavior. Wait
until the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not available until the HD
Radio broadcast is decoded. Once decoded, the
audio is available.
There is an audio mute delay when
selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
No action required. The station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast
channel when recalling a preset or
from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.Text information does not match
currently playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.There is no text information shown
for currently selected frequency.
1
You can find the form here:
529
SYNC™ 3
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of DTS. The vehicle manufacturer and DTS
are not responsible for the content sent using
HD Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
CD (If Equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat.Repeat
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number
one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order.Shuffle
530
SYNC™ 3
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth® Stereo or USB
Bluetooth® Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth® device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth® and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not
highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number
one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the currently
playing track, press the cover art or Info
button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide
30-second skip buttons when you listen to
audio books or podcasts. These buttons
allow you to skip forward or backward within
a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
531
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist.Browse
This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all
tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories.
New Search
Play All
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the
category you are browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your
USB device.
Explore Device
532
SYNC™ 3
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the instrument
panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB media
devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb
drives, and charge devices if they support
this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain audio
apps such as iHeartRadio through a USB or
Bluetooth®-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 552).
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod, iPhone,
and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA,
WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include MP3,
WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the media
files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000
songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the touchscreen
to access the climate control features.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 555).
Accessing the Climate Control Menu
E265038
Touch the button to access
additional controls for the front
climate system.
Directing the Airflow
Touch the button to direct airflow
to the windshield air vents and
de-mister.
533
SYNC™ 3
E244097
Touch the button to direct airflow
to the instrument panel air vents.
Touch the button to direct airflow
to the footwell air vents.
You can direct air through any combination
of these air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Touch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume of air that
circulates in your vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
Touch up or down on the left-hand
temperature control to set the left-hand
temperature.
Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Touch up or down on the right-hand
temperature control to set the right-hand
temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Touch the button to switch on
automatic operation, then set the
temperature.
The system adjusts the blower motor speed,
air distribution, air conditioning operation,
and outside or recirculated air to reach and
maintain the temperature you have set.
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off
A pop-up appears on the screen
to display the air conditioning
options.
MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and
maximize cooling. The driver and passenger
temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air
flows through the instrument panel vents, air
conditioning automatically turns on and the
fan automatically adjusts to the highest
speed.
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on
or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to
improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, such as
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off
Touch the button.
Switching the Climate Controlled Seats
On and Off
E265282
Touch the button to cycle through
the various climate controlled seat
settings.
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Off
E265280
Touch the button to switch on
temperature control for the
right-hand side of the vehicle.
534
SYNC™ 3
Switching the Heated Exterior Mirrors
On and Off
E266189
Touch the button.
Switching the Heated Windshield On
and Off
Touch the button to clear the
windshield of thin ice and fog. The
heated windshield turns off after a
short period of time.
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off
E184884
Touch the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog.
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off
Touch the button to cycle through
the various heat settings.
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
On and Off
Touch the button.
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning
On and Off
Touch the button for maximum
cooling.
Recirculated air flows through the instrument
panel air vents, air conditioning turns on and
the blower motor adjusts to the highest
speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off
Touch the button for maximum
defrosting.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the highest
speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns on
when you select maximum defrost.
Note: Depending on your region, air
conditioning turns on.
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Touch the button to switch
between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may reduce
the time needed to cool the interior, when
used with A/C, and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
535
SYNC™ 3
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and
Off
E268558
Touch the button to cycle through
the various ventilated seat settings.
Accessing Rear Climate Controls
E270447
Touch the button to access
additional controls for the rear
climate system.
Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator
E265289
Touch the button.
When on, you can only operate the
rear passenger settings through
the front controls.
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off
Touch the button to switch on rear
automatic operation, then set the
temperature.
Switching the Rear Climate Controlled
Seats On and Off
E265282
Touch the button to cycle through
the various climate controlled seat
settings.
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On
and Off
Touch the button to cycle through
the various heat settings.
Switching the Rear Ventilated Seats
On and Off
E268558
Touch the button to cycle through
the various ventilated seat settings.
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Check the compatibility of your device on
the regional website.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time
Go to the settings menu on your device and
switch Bluetooth® on.
Select the phone option on the
feature bar.
536
SYNC™ 3
1. Select Add Phone.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your cell phone.
2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone
and on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the number on your cell
phone matches the number on the
touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your cell phone.
4. Download the phonebook from your cell
phone when you are prompted.
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone,
use the phone settings to specify the primary
phone. You can change this setting at any
time.
Using Your Cell Phone (If Equipped)
Recent Call List
Display and select an entry from a list of
previous calls.
Contacts
Display a smart search form to look up your
contacts. Use the List button to alphabetically
sort your contacts.
Change Phone
Display the list of paired or connected
devices that you can select.
Phone Settings
Change ring tones, alerts or pair another
phone.
Do Not Disturb
Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
and alerts off.
Phone Keypad
Directly dial a number.
Mute
Mute the microphone when in a call.
Phone Voice Assistant
Say a command to use the Google or Siri
voice assistant available on your connected
phone to access supported features.
Text Messaging
Setting Text Message Notification
iOS
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth®.
3. Select the information icon to the right of
your vehicle.
4. Switch text message notification on.
Android
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth®.
3. Select the profiles option.
4. Select the phone profile.
5. Switch text message notification on.
537
SYNC™ 3
Using Text Messaging
DescriptionMenu Item
Hear the text message.Hear It
View the text message.View
Call the sender.Call
Reply to the text message with a standard text message.Reply
Apple CarPlay (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: Certain features of the system are not
available when you are using Apple CarPlay.
Switching Apple CarPlay Off
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Apple CarPlay Preferences.
2. Switch Apple CarPlay off.
Android Auto (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: You might need to enable Android
Auto from the settings menu.
Note: Certain features of the system are not
available when you are using Android Auto.
Switching Android Auto Off
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Android Auto.
2. Switch Android Auto off.
NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: For more information, refer to our
website.
Select the navigation option on the
feature bar.
538
SYNC™ 3
E297846
E297846
Map view menu.A
Zoom out.B
Zoom in.C
Route guidance menu.D
Destination entry menu.E
539
SYNC™ 3
Setting a Destination
Destination Entry Menu
DescriptionItem
Enter a destination address.Search
Display and select from a list of previous destinations.Previous Destinations
Set your saved home address as your destinationHome
Set your saved place of work as your destination.Work
Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.Favorites
540
SYNC™ 3
Setting a Destination Using the Text Entry
Screen
E297857
E297857
Text entry field.A
Automatic suggestions based on
the text you enter.
B
Information icon.C
Search.D
Keyboard settings.E
Note: Select one of the suggestions to
copy the detail to the text entry field.
You can search by entering all or part of the
destination, such as the Address, POI
Category or Name, Intersection, City, and
Latitude/Longitude. Tips: If you do not specify
a location, the system uses the current
vehicle location. You can specify a location
by address, city, state or zip code. For
additional information, visit
www
.owner.lincoln.com.
Note: Press the button in the top right-hand
corner of the main map to display estimated
time of arrival, remaining travel time or
distance to destination.
Setting a Destination Using the Map Screen
E297858
E297858
Re-center the map.A
Selected location.B
3D map rotation. Swipe left or right.C
Destination name.D
Start route guidance.E
Select the location on the map.
Select Start to begin route guidance.
541
SYNC™ 3
Changing the Format of the Map
Display the map in one of the following
formats:
• A two-dimensional map with the direction
you are traveling toward the top of the
screen.
• A two-dimensional map with north toward
the top of the screen.
• A three-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the
front.
Zoom
Display more or less detail on the map.
Note: Use pinch gestures to zoom in and
out. Place two fingers on the screen and
move them apart to zoom in. Place two
fingers on the screen and bring them
together to zoom out.
Route Guidance
E297859
E297859
Turn indicator. Select to hear the
last voice prompt.
A
Point of interest.B
Estimated time of arrival, distance
to destination or time to
destination.
C
Current road.D
Mute guidance prompts.E
Note: To change guidance prompt volume,
turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays.
542
SYNC™ 3
Route Guidance Menu
DescriptionMenu Item
Adjust your map preferences for when route guidance is active.Screen View
View a full screen map when route guidance is active.Full Map
View highway exit information for your current route.Highway Exit Info
View the turn list for your current route. Select a road to avoid it.Turn List
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information
requires an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a route is not active, a list
of nearby traffic incidents displays. When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic
nearby or on the route.
Traffic List
Adjust navigation settings. See Settings (page 555).Navigation Settings
View information about your current location.Where Am I?
Cancel route guidance.Cancel Route
View the entire current route on the map.View Route
View an alternative route compared to your current one.Detour
Change the order or remove waypoints.Edit Waypoints
The system determines the order of waypoints for you.Optimize Order
Go to the next screen and start the new route.Go
543
SYNC™ 3
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt Volume
Turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
Note: If you have inadvertently adjusted the
volume to zero, press the turn indicator
button to play the last voice prompt and then
adjust the volume to the desired level.
Muting Guidance Prompts
Select the mute option on the
screen to mute guidance prompts.
Note: The system mutes the next and all
future guidance prompts.
Adding Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation route
as a destination along your route. You can
add up to five waypoints.
1. Select the search option on the map.
2. Set a destination.
3. Select Add Waypoint.
4. Select Go.
Canceling Route Guidance
Select the route guidance menu
option on the active guidance
screen.
Select Cancel Route.
E297860
E297860
Note: The route guidance menu option is
always in the bottom right-hand corner of
the main map.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants, hotels
and attractions.
Note: cityseeker information is limited to
approximately 1,110 cities (1,049 in the United
States, 36 in Canada and 15 in Mexico).
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such as
address, phone number and a star rating.
Press More Information to see a photo, a
review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
544
SYNC™ 3
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average cost,
review, handicap access, hours of operation,
and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation
and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate and
subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link information. It helps you locate
the best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see current
sports scores.
The system calculates a reasonable efficient
route based on available speed limits, traffic,
and road conditions. You may know a local
shortcut that is more efficient at a given time
than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you
should expect a slight difference in minutes
or miles with the SYNC 3 route.
Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped)
The Michelin travel guide is a service which
provides additional information about certain
places of interest, for example restaurants,
hotels and tourist sites. Points of interest that
have Michelin travel guide information
display a button to show you more
information. Press the button to see the
additional information. If you have paired
your phone with the system, you can press
the phone button to directly establish a call
with the selected point of interest.
Navigation Map Accuracy and Updates
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to HERE
by going to www.here.com. HERE evaluates
all reported map errors and responds with
the result of their investigation by e-mail.
545
SYNC™ 3
The navigation system map data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due to
the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the nature
of collecting comprehensive geographic
data, any of which may lead to incorrect
results. Inaccurate speed limit information,
turn restrictions and other road attributes
may affect the determined route and
associated guidance
Annual navigation map updates are available
for purchase through your dealership.
Depending on your purchase agreement,
you might be eligible for free map update.
You can choose to download the map data
update onto a USB, order a USB, or use Wi-Fi
to deliver automatic updates. To update your
map data over Wi-Fi, your vehicle must be
connected to a Wi-Fi access point. Map data
files are large, so it is highly recommended
to perform the update when free Wi-Fi is
available otherwise high data rates may
apply. For USB updates, free map update
eligibility, and other details, contact dealers
at 1-866-462-8837 in the United States and
Canada or 800-557-5539 in Mexico or visit
our local website for more information.
ELECTRIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
(IF EQUIPPED)
Power Flow
E304437
The Power Flow information for
your plug-in hybrid vehicle is
available through the Home screen
or under Apps.
Vehicle Operational States
Power will flow to or from the front and rear
wheels depending on operational state and
drive conditions.
• Idling: The vehicle is running and in park
(P). The engine and, or the high voltage
battery are on.
• Electric Driving: The vehicle is running
and in drive (D) or neutral (N). The high
voltage battery provides power to the
wheels.
• Hybrid Driving: The vehicle is running
and in drive (D) or neutral (N). The engine
and the high voltage battery provide
power to the wheels.
• Engine Driving: The vehicle is running
and in drive (D) or neutral (N). The engine
provides power to the wheels.
• Regenerative Braking: The vehicle is
running in drive gear (D) and is slowing
down. The regenerative braking system
captures power and sends it back to the
high voltage battery.
• Charging: The vehicle is plugged in and
the high voltage battery is being charged.
Engine On Due To
The following conditions help to explain why
the engine is on, and what you can do to
allow all electric operation.
• Drive Power: The engine is on due to
accelerator pedal pressure or speed
control activation. Reduce pressure on
the accelerator pedal or switch off the
speed control to return to full electric
mode.
• High Speed: The engine is on because
the vehicle speed exceeds the level for
full electric operation. Reduce the speed
to return to electric operation.
546
SYNC™ 3
• Heater Setting: The engine is on because
of the heater setting. Reduce or switch
off the heater setting to return to electric
operation.
• Neutral Gear: The engine is on because
the vehicle is in neutral (N). Shift out of
neutral gear to return to electric
operation.
• Engine Cold: The engine is on because
it is cold. The vehicle returns to electric
operation once the engine is sufficiently
warm.
• Battery Charging: The engine is on to
charge the high-voltage battery. The
vehicle returns to electric operation once
the battery is sufficiently charged.
• Low Gear: The engine is on because the
vehicle is in low gear. Shift out of low
gear to return to electric operation.
• Normal Operation: The engine is on to
optimize vehicle operation. The vehicle
returns to electric operation when
possible.
• Low Use: The engine is on to maintain
engine oil quality. The vehicle returns to
electric operation when low engine use
mode is complete. See Plug-In Hybrid
Vehicle Operation (page 219).
• Fuel Maintenance: The engine is on to
maintain fuel freshness. The vehicle
returns to electric operation when fuel
freshness mode is complete. See Fuel
Quality (page 224).
• Engine Braking Active: The engine is on
to provide increased powertrain braking.
This can occur when you turn on the
grade assist feature, when speed control
is on or when driving with your foot off
the accelerator pedal. Turning off grade
assist or speed control may allow the
vehicle to return to electric operation.
• Battery Temperature: The engine is on
due to high or low high-voltage battery
temperature. This is a normal operating
condition. The vehicle returns to electric
operation when possible.
• Drive Mode: The engine is on due to the
drive mode selection. Select an
appropriate drive mode for electric only
operation.
Charge Settings
E304452
The Charge Settings information
for your plug-in hybrid vehicle is
available through the Home screen
or under Vehicle Settings. To Improve your
charging experience, your vehicle has the
following convenience features.
Charge Times
Once you set up Charge Times for a specific
charging location, your vehicle prioritizes
charging based on your preferred time
settings. You can set two preferred charging
time windows for weekdays and two for
weekends. This feature allows you to take
advantage of electric utility rate plans that
offer lower pricing during certain times of
day. Contact your utility company to see what
plans are available.
Note: You can also set up and use these
features using the Lincoln Way app.
547
SYNC™ 3
Departure Times
Setting Departure Times allows you to
control charging schedules and have the
vehicle cabin heated or cooled while
plugged in, so your vehicle is ready to drive
when you are. By setting a departure time
your vehicle can use your charge time
settings to minimize your electricity costs but
still prioritize finishing charging before your
scheduled departure. A calendar view allows
you to program two departure times per day
for each day of the week.
Note: You can also set up and use these
features using the Lincoln Way app.
Charge Settings Screen
E304455
E304455
Charging status.A
Charging time information.B
High voltage battery state of
charge.
C
Plug and charging status.D
Charging Status
Displays the present state of the charging
system. See Charging the High Voltage
Battery (page 238).
548
SYNC™ 3
Description and ActionCharging Status
Your vehicle is unplugged and starts charging when plugged in.Will charge when plugged in.
Your vehicle is unplugged at a saved location with Charge Times is
enabled. Charging is scheduled to start at the time displayed based
on your charge time settings. You must plug in prior to the start time
shown for the vehicle to begin charging at that time.
Will wait for preferred charge time.
Your vehicle is plugged in at a saved location with Charge Times
enabled. Charging starts at the time displayed, which is based on your
Charge Times settings.
Waiting for preferred charge time.
Your vehicle is plugged in and using power to charge the high voltage
battery or run electrical systems.
Charging.
Your vehicle is finished charging.Charged.
Your vehicle is plugged in and there is a fault within the vehicle
charging system. Unplug and plug back in. If the fault is still present,
contact your dealer.
Vehicle charge fault.
Your vehicle is plugged in and a fault is detected with the charge
station or charging cord. Check the charging cord and the charge
station or electrical supply.
Charge station fault.
549
SYNC™ 3
Description and ActionCharging Status
A charging coupler is plugged into the vehicle but there is no
connection with a charging power source.
Charge station not detected.
Your vehicle is plugged in but cannot communicate with the charging
station. Contact the station provider.
Incompatible charge station.
Your vehicle is plugged in and charging is paused at the charge
station.
Charge station paused.
Charging Time Information
Displays estimates of how long your vehicle
takes to fully charge when plugged into a
high or low power charger.
• High power estimate: The minimum time
to a 100% charge using a high power
charger.
• Low power estimate: The longest time to
a 100% charge using a low power
charger.
When charging, the start and estimated end
time displays. When your vehicle is not
plugged in and at a location with Charge
Times enabled, the start and end times
display based on known charging power.
Note: Charging durations and end times are
only estimates. Certain conditions may result
in longer charging times. See Charging the
High Voltage Battery (page 238).
High Voltage Battery State of Charge
Displays the remaining charge percentage
with 100% representing the total amount of
energy you can get from an external charge.
Plug and Charging Status
Displays the plug and charging status icons.
E304458
Not plugged in.
E304459
Plugged in and not currently
charging.
E304460
Plugged in and charging.
E304461
Plugged in and waiting to charge
based on charge time settings.
Charge Preferences
Touch the button to access Charge Time and
Departure Time settings. Additional
information and settings are displayed on
the charge settings screen once Charge
Time or Departure Times are set up.
550
SYNC™ 3
E304454
Charge Times on and off switch.A
Charge time location name.B
Departure Times on and off switch.C
Next departure time and cabin
temperature.
D
Charge Times On and Off Switch
This switch is visible when your vehicle is at
a saved Charge Times location. Use the
switch to turn your charge time settings on
and off for this location.
Charge Times Location Name
Displays when your vehicle is at a saved
Charge Times location.
Departure Times On and Off Switch
This switch is visible when you have at least
one departure time set. Use this switch to
turn all departure times on and off. Switching
departure times off does not delete your
settings.
Next Departure Times and Cabin
Temperature
Displays the next departure time and
associated cabin temperature setting.
Charge Time Settings
Follow these steps to set a preferred charge
time for a charging location.
1. Select Charge Preferences on the
Charge Settings screen.
2. Select Charge Time Setup on the Edit
Charge Preferences screen.
3. Select Add New Location on the Charge
Times screen. You can also edit settings
for previously saved locations from this
screen.
4. Select an address from the Recent
Charge Locations screen.
5. Set Location Name as desired and then
select Continue to Schedule on the
Confirm Location for Charge Times
screen.
6. Select WEEKDAY or WEEKEND on the
Preferred Charge Times screen.
7. On the Select preferred WEEKDAY or
WEEKEND Charge Times screen, use the
circular 24 hour clock to select your
charging time windows. You can select
up to two time windows by pressing and
dragging across the hour buttons. When
551
SYNC™ 3
you have selected your preferred times
then press Next to return to the Preferred
Charge Times screen. Repeat for
WEEKEND or WEEKDAY as desired.
Once you are done setting preferred
charge times, press Save.
Note: Selecting all or none of the 24 hours
results in any time of day given equal priority
for charging.
8. Your saved location now shows on the
Charge Times screen. Select Done to
return to the main charge settings screen.
Whenever your vehicle is at a saved
charging location, the charge settings
screen displays the location name, and
the charging times are based on your
Charge Time settings for that location
plus the next Departure Time.
Note: A 100% charge by your next Departure
Time is always the priority. When Charge
Times are set, charging outside your
preferred charging time windows could be
necessary in order to finish by your next
Departure Time. A notification appears when
this condition occurs.
Note: When a 100% charge cannot be done
by your next departure time, a notification
appears which includes an estimate of the
charge level you will have at your departure
time.
Departure Time Settings
1. Select Charge Preferences on the
Charge Settings screen.
2. Select Departure Time Setup on the Edit
Charge Preferences screen.
3. Two time settings show for each day of
the week on the Departure Times
schedule screen. Select any one.
4. On the Departure Time settings screen,
set your desired departure time, cabin
temperature and days of the week to
repeat. Press Save.
5. Your settings are now shown on the
Departure Times schedule screen. Press
Back two times to return to the main
charge settings screen. The next
departure time and cabin temperature
setting display.
Note: Cabin conditioning can perform
differently depending on if you plug in with
the included convenience cord or a higher
power charging station. The power available
for conditioning is limited to the charging
station power available.
Note: Your vehicle may not always reach
the set cabin temperature due to charging
and ambient temperature conditions. This is
normal operation
APPS
The system allows you interact with select
mobile apps while keeping your eyes on the
road. Voice commands, your steering wheel
buttons, or a quick tap on your touchscreen
give you advanced control of compatible
mobile apps. You can also stream your
favorite music or podcasts, share your time
of arrival with friends, and keep connected
safely.
552
SYNC™ 3
When you start an app through the system
for the first time, you could be asked to grant
certain permissions. You can review and
change the permissions that you have
granted at any time when your vehicle is not
moving. We recommend that you check your
data plan before using your apps through
the system. Using them could result in
additional charges. We also recommend that
you check the app provider's terms and
conditions and privacy policy before using
their app. Make sure that you have an active
account for apps that you want to use
through the system. Some apps will work
with no setup. Others require you to
configure some personal settings before you
can use them.
Note: For more information about available
apps, visit catalog.ford.com.
Using Apps on an iOS Device
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. If your device is connected via USB,
switch Apple CarPlay off. See Phone
(page 536).
2. Connect your device to a USB port or
pair and connect using Bluetooth.
3. If prompted to enable CarPlay, select
Disable.
4. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the
system.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Connect your device to a USB port if
you want to use a navigation app. When
using a navigation app, keep your device
unlocked and the app open.
Using Apps on an Android Device
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. If your device is connected via USB,
switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 536).
2. Pair your device. See Phone (page 536).
3. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the
system.
4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
Note: The system searches and connects to
compatible apps that are running on your
device.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Mobile Apps on your device use the
USB port to establish a connection with
SYNC. Some devices may lose the ability to
play music over USB when Mobile Apps are
enabled.
Using Mobile Navigation on an Android
Device
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 536).
3. Switch on Enable Mobile Apps via USB
in the Mobile Apps Settings tile.
553
SYNC™ 3
4. Select the apps option on the feature bar.
5. Select the navigation app that you want
to use on the touchscreen.
Note: When using a navigation app, keep
your device unlocked and the app open.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click
on Coverage map and details for a complete
listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, it can help you locate the best
gas prices, find movie listings, get current
traffic alerts, view the current weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see scores
to current sports games.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle’s current location
or near any of your favorite places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active
navigation route.
Fuel Prices
554
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available.Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the
chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map, which can show storms,
radar information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of weather locations.Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to
10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
E280315
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
E268570
Once you select a tile, press the
button next to a menu item to view
an explanation of the feature or
setting.
Sound
Select this tile to adjust the sound settings.
Clock
Select this tile to adjust the clock settings.
Bluetooth
Select this tile to switch Bluetooth on and off
and adjust settings.
Phone
Select this tile to connect, disconnect, and
manage the connected device settings.
Audio
Select this tile to adjust the audio settings.
555
SYNC™ 3
Driver Assist (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust Driver Assist features
like Parking Aids, Lane Keeping system,
Pedestrian Detection, and Auto-Start-Stop.
Vehicle
Select this tile to adjust vehicle settings like
windows, alarm, lighting, backup starting
passcode, and MyKey settings.
Lincoln Way
Select this tile to adjust the Lincoln Way
settings.
General
Select this tile to adjust settings like
language, measurement units, or to reset the
system.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
Select this tile to switch 911 Assist on and off.
Automatic Updates
Select this tile to adjust automatic update
settings.
Mobile Apps
Select this tile to adjust permissions, enable,
disable, and update mobile apps.
Display
Select this tile to adjust display settings like
brightness and auto dim.
Charge Settings (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the electric vehicle
charge setting.
Voice Control
Select this tile to adjust voice control settings
like command confirmations and displayed
lists.
Navigation (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust navigation settings
like map preferences and route guidance.
Seats (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the lumbar function
and massage function of your multi contour
seats.
Message Center (If Equipped)
Select this tile to view vehicle messages.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust recalled memory
features when using personal profiles.
Valet Mode (If Equipped)
Select this tile to enable and disable valet
mode.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Select this tile to change the color or
intensity of the interior lighting.
556
SYNC™ 3
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Voice Recognition
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
The system does not understand what I am
saying.
– You might not be using supported voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 509).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our website.
– You might be speaking too soon.
• Wait for the voice prompt before you speak.
The system does not understand the name of
a track or artist.
– Device limitation. Bluetooth® does not support voice commands.
• Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice control button on the steering
wheel to use Siri to play specific tracks.
– You might not be using supported voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 509).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our website.
– You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your device.
• Say the name of the track or artist exactly as it appears on your device. Spell out any
abbreviations in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *, - or +.
• Rename the files on your device or use the touchscreen to select and play the track.
557
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your device.
• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly as it appears on your device. Spell
out any abbreviations in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *, - or +.
• Rename the contact on your device or use the touchscreen to select and call the
contact.
The system does not understand the name of
a contact in the phonebook on my device and
calls the wrong contact.
– You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your device.
• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly as it appears on your device. The
system applies phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the names
of contacts in the phonebook on your device. Select the name of the contact on the
touchscreen and use the Hear it option to get an idea of how the system expects you
to pronounce it.
The system does not understand certain
names of contacts in the phonebook on my
device.
– Device limitation.
• The system uses text-to-speech technology and uses a synthetically generated voice
rather than pre-recorded human voice.
The system voice prompts and the pronunci-
ation of some words do not seem to be very
accurate.
558
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth® Audio
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect my device. – Device malfunction.
• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off and on to reset it and try again.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the device manufacturer.
559
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Incorrect device settings.
• Make sure that your device does not have an auto-install program or active security
settings.
• Check that your device is not set only to charge.
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
The system does not recognize my device. – Device limitation.
• Do not leave your device in your vehicle during very hot or very cold weather condi-
tions.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the device manufacturer.
The system does not understand the name of
a track or artist.
– Device limitation. Bluetooth® does not support voice commands.
• Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice control button on the steering
wheel to use Siri to play specific tracks.
560
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot stream audio from my Bluetooth®
device.
– Incompatible device.
• Check the compatibility of your device on our website.
– Device not connected.
• Pair your device. See Phone (page 536).
– Media player not running.
• Start the media player on your device.
The system does not recognize the music on
my device.
– Missing or incorrect audio file metadata, for example artist, song title, album or genre.
• Repair the files on your device.
– Corrupt files.
• Repair the files on your device.
– Copyright-protected files.
• Use a device that contains files that are not copyright protected.
– Unsupported file format.
• Repair or convert the files to a supported format.
– Device indexing required.
• Re-index your device. See Settings (page 555).
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
561
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
Sometimes I cannot hear a track playing on
my device.
– Device malfunction.
• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off and on to reset it and try again.
When I disconnect my iOS device the audio
volume is set to maximum.
– Device limitation.
• Turn the volume down on your device.
If the system does not play the tracks on your USB device in the correct order, the following
information could help:
The system does not play the tracks on my
USB drive in the correct order.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source when the system is still indexing, SYNC plays
tracks sorted alphabetically by file name in the root directory.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source after the system has finished indexing, SYNC
plays all tracks sorted alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag regardless of where they
are located. SYNC uses the file name if the title in the ID3 tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting the option to play all tracks from the browsing menu, SYNC plays all
tracks sorted alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag regardless of where they are located.
SYNC uses the file name if the title in the ID3 tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting a track when using the explore device option, SYNC plays tracks
sorted alphabetically by file name in the folder you have selected. SYNC then plays all
tracks in any subfolders in the folder you have selected.
562
SYNC™ 3
Phone
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
During a call, I can hear excessive background
noise.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Check and adjust the audio settings on your cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's
user manual.
During a call, I can hear the other person but
they cannot hear me.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone on and off, and vehicle Bluetooth® on and off and try again.
– Cell phone microphone muted.
• Unmute your cell phone microphone.
– Privacy mode is enabled.
• Switch off privacy mode.
During a call, I cannot hear the other person
and they cannot hear me.
– System restart required.
• Switch the ignition off and open the door. Close the door and lock the vehicle. Wait
until the touchscreen is off and any illuminated USB ports are not illuminated. Unlock
the vehicle, switch the ignition on and try again.
563
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot download a phonebook. – Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our website.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's
user manual.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See Settings (page 555).
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off and on to reset it and try again.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's
user manual.
• Check the location of the missing contacts on your cell phone. If they are stored on
the SIM card, move them to the cell phone memory.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See Settings (page 555).
A message displays suggesting that my
phonebook has downloaded but it is empty
or it has missing contacts.
564
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our website.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off and on to reset it and try again.
• Install the latest cell phone firmware.
• Delete your device from the system and delete SYNC from your device and try again.
• Switch automatic phonebook download off. See Settings (page 555).
I cannot connect my cell phone.
Text messaging does not work. – You might not have switched on text message notifications.
• Switch text message notifications on. See Phone (page 536).
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our website.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off and on to reset it and try again.
– Device message sharing is not enabled.
• Check the permissions on your device to ensure text message sharing is enabled.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our website.
I cannot hear text messages.
565
SYNC™ 3
Navigation (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot enter a street name when I am
abroad.
– Incorrect entry method.
• Enter the street name with the country.
The system does not recognize coordinates. – Using the wrong coordinates format.
• Use the format ##. #####, ##. ##### (for N/S , E/W). Add a minus before coordinates
if the direction is West and keep a positive value if the direction is East, for example
12.5412 means East and -12.5412 means West.
566
SYNC™ 3
Apps
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
The system cannot find any apps. – Incompatible device.
• You need an Android device with OS 4.3 or higher or an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or
higher. Pair and connect your Android device to find compatible apps. Connect your
iOS device to a USB port or pair and connect using Bluetooth®.
I have a compatible device and it is correctly
connected but the system still cannot find any
apps.
– Compatible apps are not installed on your device.
• Download and install the latest version of the app.
– Compatible apps are not running on your device.
• Start the apps to allow the system to find them and make sure you sign in to any apps
if required.
– Incorrect app settings.
• Check and adjust the app settings on your device and allow SYNC to access the app
if required.
I have a compatible device, it is correctly
connected and my apps are running but the
system still cannot find any apps.
– Apps failed to fully close.
• Restart the apps and try again.
• If you have an Android device with apps that have an exit or quit option, use this and
then restart the apps. Alternatively, use the force stop option in the settings menu on
your device.
• If you have an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher, tap the home button on your device
twice and then swipe the app upward to close it.
567
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I have an Android device that is correctly
connected, I have restarted my apps and they
are running but the system still cannot find
them.
– An issue on some older versions of the Android operating system could result in apps
not being found.
• Switch Bluetooth® off and on again to force the system to reconnect to your device.
I have an iOS device that is correctly
connected, I have restarted my apps and they
are running but the system still cannot find
them.
– Cable connection issue.
• Disconnect the cable from your device, wait for a moment and then connect it again
to force the system to reconnect to your device.
I have an Android device running a media app
which the system has found but I cannot hear
the sound, or the sound is very quiet.
– Device volume is low.
• Turn the volume up on your device.
I have an Android device running a number
of compatible apps but the system cannot find
all of them.
– Device limitation. If you have more apps running on your device than the number of
available Bluetooth® links, the system cannot find all of them.
• Close some of the apps to allow the system to find those that you want to use.
568
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Connectivity
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi network. – Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal
is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the default name unless it contains a
unique identifier, for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection disconnects after
successful connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal
is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot but the network
signal strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position your vehicle so that the windshield
is not facing the Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows but not on the windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or open the windows
that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows and the windshield, open the
windows that are facing the hotspot.
569
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the garage door closed, open the garage
door.
•
I cannot see a network in the list of available
networks that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again.
I cannot see SYNC when I search for Wi-Fi
networks on my cell phone or other device.
– System limitation.
• SYNC does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal
is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the network requires a subscription or
acceptance of terms and conditions, contact the network service provider.
The system seems to connect to a Wi-Fi
network and the signal strength is excellent
but the software does not update.
570
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
You might not have set up Personal Profiles.
I cannot create a profile.
You might have entered an invalid profile.
You might not have selected a memory button when prompted.
You might not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you shifted out of park (P) when creating
a profile.
Personal Profiles has been switched off.
You might not have selected the lock button on the remote control.
I cannot link a remote control.
The remote control selected was already associated with another profile and the system
declined to overwrite.
The system performed a profile recall when linking a remote control.
You might not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you shifted out park (P) when creating a
profile.
You might be using the old linking method.
Personal Profiles does not support your unsaved settings.
My personalized settings do not save. A different personal profile is active.
Another user changed the settings for the wrong personal profile.
571
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
You might not have created a personal profile.
My profile will not recall.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The profile you requested is already active.
You might not have linked the memory button you are using to a profile.
You might not have linked the remote control you are using to a profile.
You might be using the wrong remote control.
You might be pressing a button other than the unlock or remote start on a linked remote
control.
You might have deleted the personal profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.My preset positions recall, but my profile does
not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my preset positions do
not.
The preset positions are the same as the guest or previously active profile.
572
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
Unlink and relink your remote control in the Personal Profiles menu. You may need to see
your authorized dealer.
I lost a remote control.
You might have erased and reprogrammed the remote controls. This could happen if you
let a dealership add a new remote control to replace a lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Someone performed a master reset.
Resetting the System
1. Simultaneously press and hold the seek
up and the audio unit power buttons until
the screen goes black.
2. Wait three minutes to allow the system
to complete the reset.
3. Press the audio unit power button to
switch the system on.
Note: You can reset the system to restore
functionality that has stopped working. The
system reset is designed to restore
functionality and not delete any data that
you have stored.
Additional Information and Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to our website.
573
SYNC™ 3
For a complete listing of the accessories that
are available for your vehicle, please contact
your authorized dealer or visit the online
store website:
Web Address (United States)
https://accessories.lincoln.com/
Web Address (Canada)
www.lincolncanada.com
We will repair or replace any properly
authorized dealer-installed Lincoln Original
Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship
during the warranty period, as well as any
component damaged by the defective
accessories.
We will warrant your Lincoln Original
Accessory through the warranty that provides
the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Lincoln Licensed Accessories
The accessory manufacturer designs,
develops and therefore warrants Lincoln
Licensed Accessories, and does not design
or test these accessories to Lincoln
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the accessory
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer. See your
warranty guide for more information.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Ask an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that have radio
transmitters, for example two-way radios,
telephones and theft alarms. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle
should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) and
Canadian Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulations and
should only be installed by an authorized
dealer.
574
Accessories
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did not
design them specifically for automotive
use.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
575
Accessories
Protect yourself from the rising cost of
vehicle repairs with a Lincoln Protect
Extended Service Plan.
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plans
- United States Only
Lincoln Protect means peace of mind. It is
the extended service plan backed by Lincoln,
and provides more protection beyond the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
When you visit your Lincoln Dealer, insist on
genuine Lincoln Protect extended service
plans.
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan Can
Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Lincoln Protect
extended service plan. With Lincoln Protect
you minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four mechanical Lincoln Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1,000 covered
components, this plan is so complete it’s
probably easier to list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Lincoln dealers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
First Day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we will give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage and other transportation.
576
Lincoln Protect
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle
The Lincoln Protect extended service plan
also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• Clutch disc - if equipped.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers and struts.
• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Engine belts.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment - if
equipped.
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Lincoln Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved with
no credit check or hassles. To learn more,
call our Lincoln Protect extended service
plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the following information and mail
to:
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Lincoln Protect - Canada Only
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Protect extended
service plan. Lincoln Protect extended
service plan is the only service contract
backed by Lincoln. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Lincoln Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
577
Lincoln Protect
There are several Lincoln Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each
plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Protect
extended service plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.LincolnCanada.com
to find the Lincoln Protect extended service
plan that is right for you.
578
Lincoln Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes: one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 460).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Our Genuine Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock our genuine manufactured
or our authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use our authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor system; a message appears in the
information display at the proper oil change
interval. This interval may be up to one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km), hybrid vehicles
may exceed 10,000 mi (16,000 km).
579
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi (800 km)
of the message appearing. Make sure you
reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after
each oil change. See Oil Change Indicator
Reset (page 402).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or
5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 mi
(16,000 km) between oil change intervals,
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
We have recommended maintenance
intervals for various parts and component
systems based upon engineering testing.
We rely upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance schedules
that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
We strongly recommend the use of only our
genuine manufactured or our authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and our Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using our
approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
580
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
581
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Six Months
Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
582
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
2
Fluid levels
1
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how you use
your vehicle. By using several important
factors in its calculations, the monitor helps
reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and
reduces environmental waste at the same
time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
583
Scheduled Maintenance
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and Example
Interval
1
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi (12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi (8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi (4,800–8,000 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Extended engine idling
1
Hybrid vehicles may achieve longer distances between oil changes, but do not exceed the 1 year maximum oil change interval. Remaining
oil life can be accessed through the information display. See Information Displays (page 136).
584
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Change the engine oil and filter.
2
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the front axle.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension and the tire-rod ends.
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
1
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 401).
585
Scheduled Maintenance
Brake Fluid Maintenance
1
Change the brake fluid.
2
Every Three Years
1
Perform this maintenance item every three years. Do not exceed the designated time for the interval.
2
Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace the cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Replace the engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change the engine coolant and motor electronics coolant.
2
At 200,000 mi
(322,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Inspect the accessory drive belt or belts.
3
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
586
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance Items
1
Change the automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Replace the accessory drive belt or belts.
4
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance
for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (322,000 km), then every 5 years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3,000 mi
(4,800 km) of the message appearing in the
information display prompting you to change
your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,750 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25,000 mi
(40,000 km). Perform the engine air filter
replacement.
587
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect front axle.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints.
Inspect half-shaft boots.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
588
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions - Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
1
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
1
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 402).
Exclusive use of E85 - Flex Fuel Vehicles Only
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel.Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle and PTU maintenance: The Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (four wheel
drive only) in your vehicle does not require
any normal scheduled maintenance. Vehicles
are electronically monitored and notify the
driver required service by displaying a
message in the information display. The PTU
589
Scheduled Maintenance
lubricant will be more likely to require a
change if the vehicle has experienced
extended periods of extreme/severe duty
cycle driving. Changing or checking the PTU
lubricant is not necessary unless the unit has
been submerged in water, shows signs of
leakage or a message indicating required
service is displayed. Contact your authorized
dealer for service.
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine air filter
and cabin air filter is dependent on exposure
to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles
operated in these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
590
Scheduled Maintenance
ROLLOVER WARNING
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
RADIO FREQUENCY CERTIFICATION
LABELS
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM
SENSORS
Argentina
E363578
E363578
Belarus
E253816
E253816
591
Customer Information
Brazil
E340204
E340204
Canada
Short Range Radar Sensor SRR3-B
IC ID: 4135A-SRR3B
592
Customer Information
E351800
E351800
593
Customer Information
Djibouti
3086
E
3
4
08
2
6
European Union EU
3003
E
3
1
00
4
3
Ghana
E2
69695
Jamaica
E340517
E340517
Malaysia
E2
69697
RALM/24A/0715/S(15-2272)
594
Customer Information
Mauritania
E353342
E353342
Mexico
E353300
E353300
Moldova
E337971
E337971
Pakistan
E35
E35
52
429
52429
Paraguay
E337181
E337181
Russia
E253816
E253816
595
Customer Information
Serbia
E340200
E
3
4
0
2
00
Singapore
3399 0
E
3399
4
0
South Africa
E2
69696
South Korea
E3510
001
E3510
001
596
Customer Information
Taiwan, China
E340203
E340203
597
Customer Information
Ukraine
E356737
E356737
598
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E338020
E338020
United Kingdom
E362840
E362840
United States of America
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
Vietnam
E
353397
Zambia
3005
E
3
4
0
2
05
599
Customer Information
REMOTE FUNCTION ACTUATOR
China
CMIIT ID: 2018DJ4563
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: HYQS2NA0
IC: 1551A-S2NA0
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
BODY CONTROL MODULE
Argentina
3385
E
3385
4
7
Brazil
E340499
E340499
Ghana
333
E
3
414
33
600
Customer Information
Jamaica
E340500
E340500
Moldova
E337971
E337971
Morocco
3050
E
3
4
0501
Paraguay
3398
E
3398
1
2
2019-01-I-000076
Serbia
E
3
414
3
4
601
Customer Information
Singapore
3399 0
E
3399
4
0
South Africa
E
3
4051
0
Ukraine
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA REGISTERED No: ER68566/19
DEALER No: DA37380/15
United Kingdom
E362840
E362840
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: M3NA2C766336
IC: 7812A-A2C766336
602
Customer Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Vietnam
E27
8
2
62
Zambia
E
3
4
051
1
CRUISE CONTROL MODULE
Argentina
E308030
E
308030
Brazil
E3401
E3401
18
18
603
Customer Information
Djibouti
E342394
E342394
Ghana
E340191
E
3
4
0
1
91
Indonesia
E342395
E342395
Jamaica
E340518
E340518
Malaysia
E
339836
RALM/61A/0318/S(18-0852)
604
Customer Information
Mauritania
E340190
E
3
4
0
1
90
Moldova
E337971
E337971
Morocco
E340192
E
3
4
0
1
92
Pakistan
E342396
E342396
Paraguay
039
Serbia
E308040
040
605
Customer Information
Singapore
E340193
E
3
4
0
1
93
South Africa
E340194
E340194
South Korea
E339675
E339675
R-CMM-DLH-L2C0065TR
Syria
E342397
E342397
Taiwan, China
E340195
E340195
Ukraine
E
3
3080
4
3
606
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates
E308044
044
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2C0065TR
IC: 3432A-0065TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Zambia
E340196
E340196
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: NZLSAHL5E
IC: 4112A-SAHL5E
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
607
Customer Information
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS
Argentina
E339844
E
3398
44
3036
E
3
4
03
1
6
Brazil
E340121
E340121
Djibouti
330
E
3
4
30
1
7
Ghana
E
3
4
03
1
7
303
Jamaica
E340219
E340219
E
3
4
03
1
8
608
Customer Information
Jordan
E355964
E355964
Mauritania
E340487
E340487
Moldova
E337971
E337971
Morocco
3308
E
3
4
30
1
8
Paraguay
3398
E
3398
1
2
NR: 2016-9-I-000222
609
Customer Information
Serbia
E2
69681
Singapore
3399 0
E
3399
4
0
South Africa
E343025
E
3
4
30
2
5
South Korea
E339675
E339675
MSIP-CRM-TAL-A2C97102000
Ukraine
E2
6968
2
610
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E340486
E340486
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931426
IC: 7812A-A2C931426
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Vietnam
E27
8
2
62
Zambia
E
3
4
30
2
6
RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE
Argentina
E355973
E355973
611
Customer Information
Brazil
E355960
E355960
China
CMIIT ID: 2016DJ0249
Djibouti
E356133
E356133
E355968
E355968
Ghana
E355969
E355969
E355958
E355958
Indonesia
E341733
E341733
Jamaica
E341734
E340651
E340651
612
Customer Information
Mauritania
E356134
E356134
E355955
E355955
Moldova
E337971
E337971
Morocco
E355952
Pakistan
E355957
E355957
957
Paraguay
3398
E
3398
1
2
NR: 2016-9-I-00244
613
Customer Information
Serbia
E
3
414
3
4
South Africa
E355959
E355959
South Korea
E339675
E339675
KCC-REM-DDG-FO3
Syria
E341738
E341738
Taiwan
E355954
E355954
Ukraine
E2
6968
2
614
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E
355966
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2C0062TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Zambia
E355967
E355967
SYNC
Argentina
E339829
E339829
Brazil
E339830
E339830
615
Customer Information
China
E341500
E341500
Djibouti
3399
E
3399
4
1
European Union EU
E310043
E
3
1
00
4
3
Ghana
350
E
3
41
502
Jamaica
E340519
E340519
Malaysia
E
339836
RBAB/57H/0318/S(18-0624)
616
Customer Information
Mauritania
3583
E
3
41
583
Moldova
E337971
E337971
Morocco
3399
E
3399
4
2
Pakistan
359
E
3
41
5
1
9
Paraguay
3398
E
3398
1
2
NR: 2017-12-I-0000413
617
Customer Information
Serbia
E339831
E339831
Singapore
3399 3
E
3399
4
3
South Africa
South Korea
E339675
E339675
MSIP-CMM-pAs-FA-170-BCAR-HS
Taiwan
E
339833
618
Customer Information
Ukraine
E2
6968
2
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E340520
E
3
4
05
2
0
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
IC Identification NumberFCC Identification NumberSYNC Version
216B-SYNCG3-LACJ-SYNCG3-L3.0
216B-FA170BCARHSACJ-FA-170-BCARHS3.1
216B-FG185SG32MHACJ-FG-185-SG32MH3.2
619
Customer Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Vietnam
E
33983
4
Zambia
E
339835
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT
Brazil
E364134
E364134
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E355570
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: LHJ-FB40ND1
IC: 2807E-FB40ND1
620
Customer Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM SENSORS - VEHICLES WITH:
315 MHZ SENSORS
Brazil
E33
39820
E339
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
820
8
8
8
8
8
8
88
82
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
820
0
0
0
0
0
0
82
8
8
820
820
0
8
8
8
8
8
8
82
8
8
8
8
8
82
8
8
820
8
82
82
8
8
8
8
8
82
2
20
8
8
8
8
8
8
82
2
2
2
2
2
0
8
8
8
8
8
8
82
2
2
2
2
2
20
39820
Mexico
E342359
E342359
Nigeria
E337972
E337972
621
Customer Information
Singapore
3399
E
3399
44
Taiwan
E339821
E339821
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: MRXAG2SM3
IC: 2546A-AG2SM3
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM SENSORS - VEHICLES WITH:
433 MHZ SENSORS
Argentina
E339822
E339822
622
Customer Information
Brazil
E339
9
9
9
9
9
823
E339
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
823
823
823
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
23
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
23
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
823
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
23
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Djibouti
3399 5
E
3399
4
5
European Union EU
E339849
E339849
Ghana
383
E
3
41
832
Jordan
E341833
E341833
Mauritania
3399 6
E
3399
4
6
623
Customer Information
Mexico
E342358
E342358
Moldova
E337971
E337971
Morocco
3399
E
3399
4
7
Nigeria
E337972
E337972
Oman
E341834
E341834
Pakistan
E337974
E337974
624
Customer Information
Paraguay
3398
E
3398
1
2
NR: 2018-06-I-000224
Philippines
E339824
E339824
Russia
E253816
E253816
Serbia
E338019
E338019
Singapore
3399 8
E
3399
4
8
625
Customer Information
South Africa
E339825
E339825
South Korea
E339675
E339675
R-CRM-SRD-AG2SM4
Taiwan
E339826
E339826
Ukraine
E
3380
24
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
3 835
E
3
41
835
626
Customer Information
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: 2546A- AG2SM4
IC: MRXAG2SM4
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Vietnam
E339827
E339827
Zambia
3398 8
E
3398
2
8
WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGING
MODULE
South Korea
E339675
E339675
R-R-1Ap-WACM2
627
Customer Information
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2C0094TR
IC: 3432A-0074TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
The following warranties may apply to your
vehicle:
• New vehicle limited warranties.
• Emissions warranties, if applicable. (Note:
Fully-electric vehicles are not eligible for
emissions warranties.)
• Other warranties, if applicable.
Detailed warranty information specific to your
vehicle can be found in the Warranty Guide
at www
.owner.lincoln.com.
The following California Warranty Statement,
required by California regulations, applies to
vehicles certified to California emissions
standards and registered in a state that
requires California emissions warranty. If
applicable, additional California Emissions
Warranties can be found in the Warranty
Guide at www
.owner.lincoln.com.
CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL
WARRANTY STATEMENT
YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND
OBLIGATIONS
The California Air Resources Board and Ford
Motor Company are pleased to explain the
emission control system warranty on your
(year) vehicle. In California, new motor
vehicles must be designated, built and
equipped to meet the State's stringent
anti-smog standards. Ford Motor Company
must warrant the emission control system on
your vehicle for the periods of time listed
below provided there has been no abuse,
neglect or improper maintenance of your
vehicle.
Your emission control system may include
parts such as the carburetor or fuel-injection
system, the ignition system, catalytic
converter and engine computer. Also
included may be hoses, belts, connectors
and other emission-related assemblies.
Where a warrantable condition exists, Ford
Motor Company will repair your vehicle at
no cost to you including diagnosis, parts and
labor.
628
Customer Information
MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY
COVERAGE:
(For 1990 and subsequent model passenger
cars, light-duty trucks, and medium-duty
vehicles.)
- For 3 years or 50,000 miles (whichever
occurs first);
1) If your vehicle fails a Smog Check
inspection, all necessary repairs and
adjustments will be made by Ford Motor
Company to ensure that your emission
control system PERFORMANCE WARRANTY.
2) If any emission-related part on your vehicle
is defective, the part will be repaired or
replaced by Ford Motor Company. This is
your short-term emission control system
DEFECTS WARRANTY.
- For 7 years or 70,000 miles (whichever
occurs first);
1) If an emission-related part listed in this
warranty booklet specially noted with
coverage for 7 years or 70,000 miles is
defective, the part will be repaired or
replaced by Ford Motor Company. This is
your long-term emission control system
DEFECTS WARRANTY.
OWNER'S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES:
- As the vehicle owner, you are responsible
for the performance of the required
maintenance listed in your owner's manual.
Ford Motor Company recommends that you
retain all receipts covering maintenance on
your vehicle, but Ford Motor Company
cannot deny warranty solely for the lack of
receipts or for your failure to ensure the
performance of all scheduled maintenance.
- You are responsible for presenting your
vehicle to a Ford or Lincoln dealer as soon
as a problem exists. The warranty repairs
should be completed in a reasonable amount
of time, not to exceed 30 days.
- As the vehicle owner, you should also be
aware that Ford Motor Company may deny
you warranty coverage if your vehicle or a
part has failed due to abuse, neglect,
improper maintenance or unapproved
modifications.
If you have any questions regarding your
warranty rights and responsibilities, you
should contact Lincoln Concierge at
1-800-521-4140 or the California Air Resource
Board at 9528 Telstar Avenue, El Monte, CA
91731.
629
Customer Information
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the front or rear
seatbacks, or in areas that may come into
contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and power
cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any
electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
applicable local legislation and other
requirements. Installation of some
aftermarket electronic devices could
degrade the performance of vehicle
functions, which use radio frequency signals
such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
pressure monitoring system, push button
start, Bluetooth® connectivity or satellite
navigation.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the following
illustrations and table. We do not provide
any other special provisions or conditions
for installations or use.
630
Appendices
Car/SUV
E2
39
12
0
631
Appendices
Van
E2
39
12
2
632
Appendices
Truck
E2
39
12
1
Antenna PositionsMaximum Output Power Watt (Peak RMS)Frequency Band MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
633
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum Output Power Watt (Peak RMS)Frequency Band MHz
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
634
Appendices
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
(If Equipped)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have
acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that include
software licensed or owned by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software
products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY
origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE")
are protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICES and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process. It is your
responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the
system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
translate, disassemble or attempt to
discover any source code or underlying
ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE
nor permit others to reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
635
Appendices
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICES, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third
party software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components".)
SOFTWARE updates may cause you to
incur additional charges from your
wireless service provider. If FORD
MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide
or make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms
are provided along with the
Supplemental Components, then the
terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD
636
Appendices
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
637
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The third
party sites are not under the control of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
affiliates nor its designated agent are
responsible for (I) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: Yo u
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety and
you agree to assume any risk associated
with the use of the DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICES as a replacement copy for the
existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any
additional EULA terms accompanying the
upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials accompanying
the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which
may be accessed through use of the
SOFTWARE is the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by
applicable copyright or other intellectual
property laws and treaties. This EULA grants
you no rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and
third party software and service providers
and suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
638
Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Ford
Motor Company is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of
their respective owners.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICES product
support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following
precautions found in the Owner Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious
injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system may
be accomplished using voice commands.
Using voice commands while driving
helps you to operate the system without
removing your hands from the wheel or
eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
639
Appendices
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic
and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could cause an accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can distract
your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious injury. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations.
Any such feature is not a substitute for
your personal judgment. Any route
suggestions made by this system should
never replace any local traffic regulations
or your personal judgment or knowledge
of safe driving practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow
the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always use
good judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals and
clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation
features.
640
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
641
Appendices
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving
an automobile or other vehicle in
violation of applicable law or otherwise
driving in an unsafe manner presents a
significant risk of distracted driving and
should not be attempted under any
circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE
at excessive volume poses a significant
risk of hearing damage and should not
be attempted under any
circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may
not be compatible with new or different
versions of an operating system, third
party software, or third party services,
and the SOFTWARE may potentially
cause a critical failure of an operating
system, third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software used
with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an
additional fee for access, (ii) may not
work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,
or error free, (iii) may change streaming
formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may
contain adult, profane or offensive
content; and (v) may contain inaccurate,
false or misleading traffic, weather,
financial or safety information or other
content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider (WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference only,
are not warranted in any way and should
not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in Section
(a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS
AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL
642
Appendices
OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE
GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO
YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND
IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION
INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO
THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY
CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS
SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET,
THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL
CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan govern
this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE
may also be subject to other local, state,
national, or international laws. Any
litigation arising out of or related to this
EULA shall be brought and maintained
exclusively in a court of the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County or in
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any
dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A
DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute
means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed
above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including
its price) or this EULA, whether in contract,
warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance,
or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the party
giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,
and the relief requested. You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve
any dispute through informal negotiation
within 60 days from the date the Notice of
Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY may commence
arbitration.
643
Appendices
(c) Small claims court. You may also litigate
any dispute in small claims court in your
county of residence or FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S principal place of business, if
the dispute meets all requirements to be
heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not
You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve the
dispute will be conducted exclusively by
binding arbitration. You are giving up the
right to litigate (or participate in as a party or
class member) all disputes in court before a
judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be
resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose
decision will be final except for a limited right
of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act.
Any court with jurisdiction over the parties
may enforce the arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to
resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum
will be conducted solely on an individual
basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute
heard as a class action, as a private attorney
general action, or in any other proceeding
in which any party acts or proposes to act in
a representative capacity. No arbitration or
proceeding will be combined with another
without the prior written consent of all parties
to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration
will be conducted by the American
Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an
individual and use the SOFTWARE for
personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the
dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not
You are an individual or how You use the
SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary
Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes
will also apply. To commence arbitration,
submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules
Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You
may request a telephonic or in-person
hearing by following the AAA rules. In a
dispute involving $10,000 or less, any
hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an
in-person hearing instead. For more
information, see adr.org or call
1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence
arbitration only in your county of residence
or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal
place of business. The arbitrator may award
the same damages to You individually as a
court could. The arbitrator may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only to You
individually, and only to the extent required
to satisfy Your individual claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly
reimburse your filing fees and pay the
AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement offer
made before the arbitrator was appointed
(“last written offer”), your dispute goes
all the way to an arbitrator’s decision
(called an “award”), and the arbitrator
awards you more than the last written
offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give
644
Appendices
you three incentives: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3)
reimburse any expenses (including expert
witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating,
preparing, and pursuing your claim in
arbitration. The arbitrator will determine
the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.
The AAA rules will govern payment of
filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s
fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any
arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or
arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your
filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY
commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and
arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It will not
seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from
you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses
are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within
one year. To the extent permitted by law,
any claim or dispute under this EULA to
which this Section applies must be filed
within one year in small claims court (Section
c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year
period begins when the claim or dispute first
could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is
not filed within one year, it is permanently
barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts
will be severed and proceed in a court of
law, with the remaining parts proceeding in
arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be severed
with the remainder of Section e remaining in
full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this
Agreement and the privacy policy at any
time, with or without notice to you. You agree
to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to
time to review the then current version of
this Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the TeleNav
Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive
safely;
645
Appendices
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by
the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the TeleNav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav
Software, to provide TeleNav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby
grants to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or
structure of the TeleNav Software without
the prior express written consent of
TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its
suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d) distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the
TeleNav Software to others, except as
part of your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or
646
Appendices
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)
lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will
TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or
agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
TeleNav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely
on the TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being
or survival of you or others is dependent
on the accuracy of navigation, as the
maps or functionality of the TeleNav
Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in
more remote geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE)
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT
INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
647
Appendices
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software
shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator
and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of
Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator
shall apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction.
Note that there is no judge or jury in an
arbitration proceeding and the decision
of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
both parties. You expressly agree to
waive your right to a jury trial. This
Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its
conflict of law provisions. To the extent
judicial action is necessary in connection
with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav
and you agree to submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment
or transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the TeleNav
Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
648
Appendices
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent
to receive from TeleNav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, "Notices") electronically.
TeleNav may provide such Notices by
posting them on TeleNav's Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the
TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party's right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words "without
limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors:
649
Appendices
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its
licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights
reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to
the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph,
you may not use this Data (a) with any
products, systems, or applications installed
or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real
time route guidance, fleet management or
similar applications; or (b) with or in
650
Appendices
communication with any positioning devices
or any mobile or wireless-connected
electronic or computer devices, including
without limitation cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries do
not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered by
the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
651
Appendices
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all
written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used], without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided
to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being
acquired by or on behalf of the United States
government or any other entity seeking or
applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government,
this Data is a “commercial item” as that term
is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these End-User
Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-
User Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing Data
for the United States shall contain the
following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal Service®
to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.”
“©United States Postal Service® 20XX.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.”
652
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provisions
apply to the Data for Canada, which may
include or reflect data from third party
licensors (“Third Party Data”), including
Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada
(“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department of
Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is
licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations
or warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a partic-
ular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any
claim, demand or action, irrespective
of the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action alleging any loss,
injury or damages, direct or indirect,
which may result from the use or
possession of such Data; or (ii) in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage media
of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the
copy; or (iii) other materials packaged
with the copy, such as user manuals or
end user license agreements: “This data
includes information taken with permis-
sion from Canadian authorities, including
© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of
Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario,
© Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®,
© The Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise
agreed by the parties, in connection with
the provision of any portion of the Data
for the Territory of Canada to End-Users
as may be authorized under the Agree-
ment, Client shall provide such End-
Users, in a reasonably conspicuous
manner, with terms (set forth with other
end user terms required to be provided
653
Appendices
under the Agreement, or as otherwise
may be provided, by Client) which shall
include the following provisions on
behalf of the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post and
NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect data
of licensors, including Her Majesty the
Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her
Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department
of Natural Resources Canada
(“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on
an “as is” basis. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, make no guarantees,
representations or warranties
respecting such data, either express
or implied, arising by law or otherwise,
including but not limited to, effective-
ness, completeness, accuracy or
fitness for a particular purpose. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be
liable in respect of any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which may
result from the use or possession of
the data or the Data. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
data or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and
their officers, employees and agents
from and against any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action, alleging loss, costs, expenses,
damages or injuries (including injuries
resulting in death) arising out of the
use or possession of the data or the
Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition
to all of the rights and obligations of the
parties under the Agreement. To the
extent that any of the provisions of this
Section are inconsistent with, or conflict
with, any other provisions of the Agree-
ment, the provisions of this Section shall
prevail.
654
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: “Fuente:
INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeTerritory
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Argentina
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-2011-
01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO
DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The fore-
going notice requirement for
Jordan Data is a material term
of the Agreement. If Client or
any of its permitted subli-
censees (if any) fail to meet
such requirement, HERE shall
have the right to terminate
Client’s license with respect to
the Jordan Data.
Jordan
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of Jordan
(“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise
Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities
for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan
or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition,
Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any)
and End-Users are restricted from using
the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications
if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity
using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or
(ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes
655
Appendices
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications”
shall mean Geomarketing applications,
GIS applications, mobile business asset
management applications, call center
applications, telematics applications,
public organization Internet applications
or for providing geocoding services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and
agrees that in certain countries of the
Europe Territory, Client will need to
obtain rights directly from third party
RDS-TMC code providers to receive and
use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to
deliver to End-Users Transactions in any
way derived from or based on such
Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE
shall deliver the Data incorporating
Traffic Codes to Client only after
receiving certification from Client of its
having obtained such rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends
for Belgium. Client shall, for each Trans-
action that uses Traffic Codes for
Belgium, provide the following notice to
the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium
are provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license
granted to Client relating to making,
selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a
map fixed on a paper or paper-like
medium): (a) such license with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain is
conditioned on Client’s entering into and
complying with a separate written agree-
ment with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to
create and sell paper maps, Client’s
paying to the OS any and all applicable
paper map royalties, and Client’s
complying with the OS copyright notice
requirements; (b) such license for selling
or otherwise distributing for charge with
respect to Data for the Territory of Czech
Republic is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining prior written consent from
Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling
or distributing with respect to Data for the
Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on
Client’s obtaining a permit from
Bundesamt für Landestopografie of
Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from
using Data for the Territory of France to
create paper maps with a scale between
1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is
restricted from using any Data to create,
sell or distribute paper maps that are the
same or substantially similar, in terms of
data content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National Land
Survey of Sweden.
656
Appendices
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data
for the Territory of Great Britain, Client
acknowledges and agrees that the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct
action against Client to enforce compli-
ance with the OS copyright notice (see
Section IV(D) below) and paper map
requirements (see Section IV(B) above)
contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich- und
Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright
and database right 2010
Contains Royal Mail data ©
Royal Mail copyright and
database right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed al
tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische Grundlage:
© Bundesamt für
Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not received
approvals to distribute map data for the
following countries in such respective
countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan,
Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may
657
Appendices
update such list from time to time. The
license rights granted to Client under this
TL with respect to the Data for such
countries are contingent upon Client’s
compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations, including, without limitation,
any required licenses or approvals to
distribute the Application incorporating
such Data in such respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing RDS-
TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall
contain the following notice: “Product
incorporates traffic location codes which
is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and
its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier Telematics
Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS AFFILIATES AND
CONTRACTORS AND THEIR RESPECTIVE
OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES,
SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. END USER
HAS NO CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP
WITH THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY AGREEMENT
BETWEEN FORD AND UNDERLYING
CARRIER. END USER UNDERSTANDS AND
AGREES THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HAS NO LEGAL, EQUITABLE, OR OTHER
LIABILITY OF ANY KIND TO END USER. IN
ANY EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM
OF THE ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH
OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR OTHERWISE,
END USER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, FOR
ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT OF
DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED
THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER FOR THE
SERVICES DURING THE TWO-MONTH
PERIOD PRECEDING THE DATE THE CLAIM
AROSE.
658
Appendices
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND
HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION CLAIMS
FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY PROPERTY
DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH,
ARISING IN ANY WAY, DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY, IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE,
OR INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT FORD
AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER CANNOT
GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF WIRELESS
TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY LACK OF SECURITY RELATING
TO THE USE OF THE SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR COVERAGE.
THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT END USERS CAN OR WILL
BE LOCATED USING THE SERVICE. THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER MAKES NO
WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SUITABILITY, OR
PERFORMANCE REGARDING ANY SERVICES
OR GOODS, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL
AT&T BE LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE
TO ITS OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A)
ACT OR OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, DELAYS,
OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE PROVIDED
BY OR THROUGH THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED
BY SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION BY THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY
IN CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END USER
RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND HOLDS THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HARMLESS FROM
AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS OF
ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY NATURE ARISING IN ANY WAY
FROM OR RELATING TO, DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY, SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S
USE THEREOF, INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING
IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as
necessary for your personal use to (i) view
659
Appendices
it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not
remove any copyright notices that appear
and do not modify the Data in any way. You
agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,
modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse
engineer any portion of this Data, and may
not transfer or distribute it in any form, for
any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication
with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication
with any positioning devices or any mobile
or wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation cellular
phones, palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants or
PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if
you fail to comply with these terms and
conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform
substantially in accordance with the
accompanying written materials for a period
of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt,
and (b) any support services provided by
NAV2 shall be substantially as described in
applicable written materials provided to you
by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will
make commercially reasonable efforts to
solve any problem issues.
Customer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with
a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty
is void if failure of the Data has resulted from
accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any
replacement Data will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or
thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither
these remedies nor any product support
services offered by NAV2 are available
without proof of purchase from an authorized
international source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET
FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
660
Appendices
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers
and are protected by applicable copyright
and other intellectual property law and
treaties. The Data are provided solely on the
basis of a license to use, not sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us
with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to (i)
its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder shall be submitted to the
Shanghai International Economic and Trade
Arbitration Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright©
661
Appendices
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;
6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;
6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other
patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device. This device may contain
content belonging to Gracenote's providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein
with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content
providers shall be entitled to all of the
benefits and protections set forth herein that
are available to Gracenote. You agree that
you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
(except in a Tag associated with a music file)
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music
file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company's own name.
662
Appendices
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE
ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
663
Appendices
Taiwan Territory
According to the "Technical Specifications
for Low Power Radio Frequency Equipment"
formulated by the National Communications
and Communication Committee of the
Executive Yuan: 3.8.2. For the low-power
radio frequency equipment that has obtained
the verification certificate, the company, firm
or user shall not change the frequency,
increase the power or change the
characteristics and functions of the original
design without authorization.
The use of low-power radio frequency
equipment must not affect flight safety and
interfere with legal communications: when
the system detects interference, immediately
stop using it until there is no interference.
The aforementioned legal communication
refers to the wireless communication
operated in accordance with the provisions
of the Telecommunications Management
Law. Low-power radio frequency equipment
needs to endure the interference of legal
communication or industrial, scientific and
medical radio wave radiation electrical
equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS AND
CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept certain
terms and conditions. The following is a brief
summary of the terms and conditions that
apply to you. To view the full terms and
conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA
Products and/or Services, please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcondi-
tions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcondi-
tions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for your
personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to provide
SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
664
Appendices
SUNA Products and/or Services are intended
as an aid to personal motoring and travel
planning, and do not provide comprehensive
or accurate information on all occasions. On
occasions, you may experience additional
delay as a result of using SUNA Products
and/or Services. You acknowledge that it is
not intended, or suitable, for use in
applications where time of arrival or driving
directions may impact the safety of the public
or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and active,
remain at all times responsible for observing
all relevant laws and codes of safe driving.
In particular, you agree to only actively
operate SUNA Products and/or Services
when the Vehicle is at a complete stop and
it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of the
SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable for
technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw SUNA
Products and/or Services at any time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or the
manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to any
third party for any damages either direct,
indirect, incidental, consequential or
otherwise arising out of the use of or inability
to use SUNA Products and/or Services even
if Intelematics or a Supplier has been advised
of the possibility of such damages. You also
acknowledge that the neither Intelematics
nor any Supplier guarantees nor make any
warranties that relate to the availability,
accuracy or completeness of SUNA Products
and/or Services, and to the extent which it
is lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State or
Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development may
mean that some information is not entirely
up-to-date. The information in this document
is subject to change without notice.
665
Appendices
666
3
360 Degree Camera...................................300
9
911 Assist...........................................................66
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................165
About This Manual...........................................11
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................271
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...............................................................272
Accessories....................................................574
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....14
Active Park Assist.........................................292
Adaptive Cruise Control.............................305
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting..............................................316
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering..................................312
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go.......................................313
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Intelligent Adaptive Cruise
Control...........................................................313
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering.................................307
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go......................................307
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering.................................305
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go......................................306
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting..........................................316
Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
Messages..........................................................316
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................114
Adjusting the Headlamps............................416
Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance..........316
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column..........................................................102
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column..........................................................102
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps.................................114
Airbag Disposal...............................................64
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................165
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter..............402
Air Suspension..............................................352
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................100
All-Wheel Drive.............................................264
Ambient Lighting............................................117
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................100
Appendices...................................................630
Apps................................................................552
At a Glance.......................................................24
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............135
Audio Control.................................................104
Audio System................................................496
General Information...........................................496
Audio Unit.......................................................497
Auto Air Refresh Hints..................................175
Auto Air Refresh Indicators.........................174
Auto Hold.......................................................275
Autolamps........................................................112
667
Index
Automatic Climate Control.........................165
Automatic High Beam Control....................119
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators......................................................120
Automatic Transmission.............................259
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................408
Auto-Start-Stop - Excluding: Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV).............................215
Autowipers......................................................108
Auxiliary Power Points................................200
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive..........................................264
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery - Gasoline....410
See: Changing the 12V Battery - Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV)..................................413
Blind Spot Information System.................326
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System..............326
Body Styling Kits...........................................429
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............398
Booster Seats..................................................40
Brake Fluid Check.......................................409
Brakes..............................................................271
General Information............................................271
Breaking-In......................................................361
Bulb Specification Chart.............................488
C
Canceling the Set Speed...........................304
Capacities and Specifications...................460
Capacities and Specifications - Excluding:
Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV)..........................................................465
Capacities and Specifications - Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)...............477
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................422
Catalytic Converter......................................235
Changing a Bulb...........................................420
Changing a Fuse..........................................395
Changing a Road Wheel.............................451
Changing the 12V Battery - Gasoline.......410
Changing the 12V Battery - Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV)..............................413
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................402
Changing the Front Wiper Blades -
Vehicles With: Heated Wiper
Blades............................................................419
Changing the Front Wiper Blades -
Vehicles Without: Heated Wiper
Blades............................................................418
Changing the Rear Wiper Blades..............419
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
or Password................................................494
Charging a Wireless Device......................202
Charging the High Voltage Battery - Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)...............238
Checking MyKey System Status.................80
Checking the Interior Air Quality...............173
Checking the Wiper Blades........................418
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................52
Child Restraint Positioning...........................42
Child Safety......................................................27
General Information.............................................27
Child Safety Locks..........................................44
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................426
Cleaning Products.........................................421
Cleaning the Engine....................................424
Cleaning the Exterior..................................422
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens...........................425
Cleaning the Interior....................................425
Cleaning the Wheels...................................427
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................424
668
Index
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................80
Climate............................................................533
Climate Control..............................................165
Cold Weather Precautions..........................361
Collision, Damage or Fire Event...............368
Connected Vehicle Data................................21
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network.......................................................490
Enabling the Modem Using The Lincoln
Way....................................................................490
Enabling the Modem Using the
Touchscreen...................................................490
What Is the Modem............................................490
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................404
Crash and Breakdown Information..........372
Post Impact Braking...........................................372
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........63
Creating a MyKey............................................79
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.............494
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................330
Cruise Control...............................................303
Cruise Control Indicators...........................304
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control With Lane
Centering......................................................104
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control..........................................................105
Customer Assistance...................................373
Customer Information..................................591
Radio Frequency Certification Labels............591
D
Data Privacy......................................................18
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running
Lamps.............................................................113
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).................113
Digital Radio..................................................499
Direction Indicators........................................116
Doors and Locks.............................................83
Drive Mode Control.....................................343
Drive Modes.........................................................343
Drive Modes...................................................343
Conserve..............................................................343
Deep Conditions.................................................343
Deep Sand...........................................................344
Excite.....................................................................344
Normal...................................................................344
Preserve EV.........................................................344
Pure EV.................................................................344
Slippery.................................................................345
Driver Alert......................................................319
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................56
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags..........61
Driving Aids.....................................................319
Driving Economically....................................361
Driving Hints...................................................361
Driving Through Shallow Water...............362
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running Lamps......113
See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).....................113
E
Electric Parking Brake.................................272
Electric Vehicle Information.......................546
Electromagnetic Compatibility..................630
Emergency Call Limitations..........................67
Emergency Call Requirements...................66
Emergency Call System Data......................22
Emergency Door Release..............................91
Emission Law.................................................234
End User License Agreement...................635
Engine Block Heater....................................213
Engine Coolant Check................................404
Engine Emission Control............................234
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................99
Engine Oil Check..........................................401
669
Index
Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................401
Engine Specifications - Excluding: Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)..............460
Engine Specifications - Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV).............................461
Entertainment.................................................521
Environment.....................................................23
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................272
Essential Towing Checks............................357
Event Data.........................................................19
Export Unique Options...................................16
Exterior Mirrors..............................................122
F
Fastening the Seatbelts................................47
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................451
Floor Mats......................................................362
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................113
Front Fog Lamps............................................113
Front Parking Aid.........................................288
Front Passenger Sensing System..............58
Front Wiper Blades
See: Changing the Front Wiper Blades - Vehicles
With: Heated Wiper Blades..........................419
See: Changing the Front Wiper Blades - Vehicles
Without: Heated Wiper Blades....................418
Fuel and Refueling.......................................223
Fuel Consumption........................................233
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................224
Fuel Filter.........................................................418
Fuel Quality....................................................224
Fuel Shutoff...................................................365
Fuses...............................................................382
Fuse Specification Chart............................382
G
Garage Door Opener...................................195
Garage Door Opener Introduction...........195
Garage Door Opener Precautions and
Frequencies.................................................195
Gauges.............................................................128
Gearbox
See: Transmission..............................................259
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................68
General Maintenance Information...........579
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..........................................................377
Getting the Services You Need.................373
Global Opening and Closing......................122
H
Hazard Flashers............................................365
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps........................416
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................113
Headrest
See: Head Restraints..........................................177
Head Restraints..............................................177
Heated Exterior Mirrors................................171
Heated Rear Window....................................171
Heated Seats...................................................191
Heated Steering Wheel...............................106
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................165
High Voltage Battery...................................238
General Information...........................................238
Hill Descent Control....................................284
Hill Descent Control Indicator...................285
Hill Start Assist..............................................274
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................168
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................272
670
Index
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............398
Horn..................................................................106
How Does 911 Assist Work...........................66
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work.....................................305
How Does Auto Air Refresh Work.............173
How Does Reverse Braking Assist
Work..............................................................277
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert System
Work...............................................................193
Hybrid Vehicle Frequently Asked
Questions.....................................................221
Hybrid Vehicle Operation............................217
I
In California (U.S. Only)................................374
Information Display Control........................106
Information Displays.....................................136
General Information............................................136
Information Messages..................................142
Installing Child Restraints.............................29
Installing the Vehicle Identification
Card..............................................................489
Instrument Cluster.........................................128
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................112
Instrument Panel.............................................24
Interior Air Quality.........................................173
Interior Air Quality – Troubleshooting............175
Refreshing the Interior Air.................................174
Interior Air Quality –
Troubleshooting..........................................175
Interior Air Quality – Information
Messages..........................................................175
Interior Lamps..................................................117
Interior Mirror..................................................124
Introduction........................................................11
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................366
K
Keyless Entry.....................................................91
Keyless Starting............................................205
Keys and Remote Controls..........................68
L
Lane Keeping System.................................320
Liftgate...............................................................94
Lighting Control...............................................111
Lighting..............................................................111
General Information..............................................111
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services......14
Lincoln Protect..............................................576
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers...............347
Load Carrying................................................346
Load Limit.......................................................348
Locating the Wireless Accessory
Charger........................................................202
Locking and Unlocking..................................83
Luggage Covers...........................................346
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................451
M
Maintenance..................................................398
General Information...........................................398
Memory Function..........................................184
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................136
Mirrors
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................121
Mobile Communications Equipment..........16
Mobile Device Data.........................................21
Moonroof.........................................................125
Motorcraft Parts - Excluding: Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV)............................462
671
Index
Motorcraft Parts - Plug-In Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (PHEV)...........................................464
MyKey – Troubleshooting..............................81
MyKey™..............................................................78
Principle of Operation..........................................78
N
Navigation......................................................538
Network Connectivity.................................490
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network............................................................490
Network Connectivity –
Troubleshooting..........................................491
Normal Scheduled Maintenance.............583
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................402
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................401
Opening and Closing the Hood...............398
Opening the Doors........................................90
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................379
Overhead Console......................................204
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control..........................................................120
Overriding Reverse Braking Assist..........278
Overriding the Set Speed...........................312
P
Parking Aids..................................................286
Principle of Operation.......................................286
Passive Anti-Theft System............................99
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................99
Pedestrian Alert System...............................65
Pedestrian Protection....................................65
Perchlorate........................................................14
Personalized Settings..................................140
Personal Safety System™..............................54
Phone as a Key Limitations..........................74
Phone as a Key................................................74
Phone as a Key – Troubleshooting..................76
Phone as a Key – Troubleshooting............76
Phone as a Key – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................76
Phone..............................................................536
Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation.............219
Post-Crash Alert System.............................370
Post Impact Braking.....................................372
How Does Post Impact Braking Work...........372
Overriding Post Impact Braking......................372
Post Impact Braking Indicators.......................372
Post Impact Braking Limitations.....................372
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..............................83
Power Liftgate..................................................94
Power Seats....................................................179
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................409
Power Windows..............................................121
Pre-Collision Assist.......................................337
Programming the Garage Door
Opener..........................................................196
Programming Your Phone.............................74
Protecting the Environment.........................23
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................451
R
Radio Frequency Certification
Labels............................................................591
Blind Spot Information System Sensors........591
Body Control Module........................................600
Cruise Control Module......................................603
Garage Door Opener........................................607
Keys and Remote Controls..............................608
Radio Transceiver Module.................................611
Remote Function Actuator...............................600
SYNC......................................................................615
Telematics Control Unit....................................620
672
Index
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Sensors..............................................................621
Wireless Accessory Charging Module..........627
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings.......................................................194
Rear Occupant Alert System
Indicators......................................................194
Rear Occupant Alert System
Limitations....................................................193
Rear Occupant Alert System
Precautions..................................................193
Rear Occupant Alert System......................193
Rear Parking Aid...........................................286
Rear Passenger Climate Controls -
Vehicles With: Quadruple Zone
Automatic Temperature Control.............169
Rear Passenger Climate Controls -
Vehicles With: Triple Zone Automatic
Temperature Control..................................170
Rear Seats.......................................................187
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................346
Rear View Camera.......................................297
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................297
Rear Window Wiper and Washers............109
Rear Wiper Blades
See: Changing the Rear Wiper Blades..........419
Recommended Towing Weights..............356
Reduced Engine Performance...................361
Refreshing the Interior Air...........................174
Automatically Refreshing the Interior Air.......174
Manually Refreshing the Interior Air...............174
Refueling - Excluding: Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)..............................................226
Refueling - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV)..........................................................229
Remote Control...............................................69
Remote Start...................................................172
Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................427
Replacement Parts Recommendation........14
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................73
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter.....................173
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................380
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......380
Resuming the Set Speed...........................304
Reverse Braking Assist Indicators...........278
Reverse Braking Assist Precautions........277
Reverse Braking Assist...............................277
Reverse Braking Assist –
Troubleshooting.............................................279
Reverse Braking Assist –
Troubleshooting.........................................279
Reverse Braking Assist – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................280
Reverse Braking Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................279
Roadside Assistance...................................364
Roadside Emergencies...............................364
Rollover Warning...........................................591
Roof Racks and Load Carriers...................347
Running-In
See: Breaking-In..................................................361
Running Out of Fuel....................................225
S
Safety Canopy™................................................61
Safety Precautions.......................................223
Satellite Radio...............................................502
Scheduled Maintenance............................579
Seatbelt Extensions.......................................53
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................49
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................50
Seatbelts...........................................................46
Principle of Operation..........................................46
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................49
Seats.................................................................176
Security.............................................................99
Selecting a Drive Mode..............................343
Service Data......................................................19
Settings Data...................................................20
673
Index
Settings...........................................................555
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Gap..................................................................311
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed............................................................310
Setting the Cruise Control Speed............303
Setting the Hill Descent Speed................284
Side Airbags.....................................................60
Side Sensing System..................................290
Sitting in the Correct Position....................176
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................445
Soft Closing Door............................................91
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................451
Special Notices................................................15
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................587
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................303
Speed Sign Recognition.............................335
Stability Control............................................282
Principle of Operation.......................................282
Starting a Gasoline Engine........................206
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
System...........................................................210
Starting and Stopping the Engine...........205
General Information..........................................205
Steering...........................................................336
Steering Wheel..............................................102
Storage Compartments..............................204
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.....................................................125
Sun Visors.......................................................125
Supplementary Restraints System.............55
Principle of Operation.........................................55
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On and
Off..................................................................309
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off.....................................................119
Switching Cruise Control On and
Off..................................................................303
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control.........................................313
Switching Hill Descent Control On and
Off..................................................................284
Switching Intelligent Mode On and
Off...................................................................315
Switching Lane Centering On and
Off...................................................................314
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System On
and Off...........................................................194
Switching Reverse Braking Assist On and
Off..................................................................278
Symbols Glossary.............................................11
SYNC™ 3..........................................................507
General Information...........................................507
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting..........................557
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications...............460
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)..........................375
Tire Care.........................................................432
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............447
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................430
Towing a Trailer.............................................354
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.......359
Towing.............................................................354
Traction Control.............................................281
Principle of Operation........................................281
Trailer Sway Control....................................355
Transmission..................................................259
Transporting the Vehicle............................370
U
Under Hood Overview...............................400
Unique Driving Characteristics..................215
USB Port.........................................................505
674
Index
Using All-Wheel Drive.................................264
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...........................................................81
Using Snow Chains......................................445
Using Stability Control................................283
Using Summer Tires....................................444
Using the Backup Start Passcode..............75
Using the Valet Mode....................................75
Using Traction Control.................................281
Using Voice Recognition............................509
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).............................................376
V
Vehicle Care...................................................421
General Information............................................421
Vehicle Identification Number..................465
Vehicle Identification...................................489
Vehicle Storage.............................................427
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot..................................494
Ventilated Seats............................................192
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................165
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...............465
Voice Control..................................................104
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators...................131
Warranty Information...................................628
Washer Fluid Check......................................417
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................422
See: Wipers and Washers.................................107
Waxing.............................................................423
Welcome Lighting..........................................116
What Is 911 Assist............................................66
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With Lane
Centering.....................................................305
What Is Auto Air Refresh..............................173
What Is Automatic High Beam
Control............................................................119
What Is Cruise Control................................303
What Is Drive Mode Control......................343
What Is Hill Descent Control.....................284
What Is Intelligent Adaptive Cruise
Control..........................................................305
What Is Phone as a Key.................................74
What Is Reverse Braking Assist................277
What Is the Cabin Air Filter.........................173
What is the Rear Occupant Alert
System...........................................................193
What Is the Wireless Accessory
Charger........................................................202
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................451
Wheels and Tires.........................................430
General Information...........................................430
Technical Specifications...................................458
Wi Fi
See: Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
or Password.....................................................494
See: Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.........494
See: Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot..............................494
Windows and Mirrors....................................121
Windshield Washers.....................................109
Windshield Wipers - Vehicles With: Heated
Wiper Blades...............................................108
Windshield Wipers - Vehicles Without:
Heated Wiper Blades................................107
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades....................418
Wipers and Washers.....................................107
Wireless Accessory Charger
Precautions.................................................202
Wireless Accessory Charger.....................202
675
Index
676
